JP2019042578A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a player by a smooth progress of display processing of images, even if many kinds of material images are used for displaying the images.SOLUTION: A peripheral control board 4140 mounts a peripheral control MPU 4150a, a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, a material image RAM and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a selects a scenario data corresponding to a presentation condition established from among many scenario data prepared in advance, obtains a presentation control data for each frame along the selected scenario data, and performs drawing process by using material image data groups specified on the basis of the presentation control data to control a liquid crystal display device 1900.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 117B

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a so-called ball-and-ball type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") and a so-called spinning-type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

  In a conventional gaming machine, in addition to a game control board for controlling a game operation, a presentation control board for controlling a presentation operation is mounted (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As such an effect control board, besides a so-called character ROM in which material image data used for displaying an image is stored in advance, a primary storage unit for temporarily storing material image data in advance, And, there is one equipped with VDP as a graphic chip. For example, this VDP fetches a certain number of pieces of material image data, such as during fluctuation or jackpot, into the primary storage unit from the character ROM in advance at the timing of power on or change of the gaming state. ing.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2005-192783

  In recent years, although effects in games tend to be diverse and colorful, the speed at which data is read from the character ROM is relatively low, which limits the material images that can be displayed in one frame, There is a risk that the player's interest may be lost without being able to perform display effect processing using a wide variety of material images.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's interest by smoothly performing image display processing even if many types of material images are used for image display. .

  In order to achieve the above-described object, the present invention provides a game control means for controlling the progress of a game, a video effect means for displaying an image, and a drawing for displaying an image on the image effect means from the game control means The effect control means for executing the effect accompanying the game using the image based on the image effect control information serving as a trigger for the start of the game; and the effect control means comprises a material image constituting the display surface of the image According to the display surface unit order, based on the video rendering control data, video rendering control data generating device for generating video rendering control data for controlling display of the video, and always storing means in which data are stored in advance. Temporary storage means for temporarily storing material image data for a predetermined display surface set according to the image rendering control data among the material image data, and the material image data Arrangement means for constantly reading out from the storage means and arranging in the temporary storage means in a predetermined arrangement manner, and for one display surface in the order of display surface units in which the arranged material image data is stored from the temporary storage means earlier Display surface image storage means for reading material image data and storing it as image data to be displayed on the video presentation means, and display surface image output means for outputting the image data stored in the display surface image storage means to the video presentation means And variably setting a period from the start timing of drawing by the video effect control information from the game control means to the image data corresponding to the video effect control information in the display surface image storage means. A game machine characterized in that it is possible.

  Here, in the case where the gaming machine of the present invention is a ball-ball-type gaming machine as an example, the ball-and-ball-type gaming machine is a firing means for firing a game ball as a game medium into a game area of a game board, and the game When a game medium is received by the starting opening formed in the area and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, it is then determined whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and thereafter the winning condition is satisfied. When the game control means for shifting from the normal game state to the special game state advantageous to the player and the start condition are satisfied, the effect operation according to the formation condition of the winning condition is thereafter controlled by the game control means. The effect control means for outputting an effect command for control, and the effect operation executing means for executing an effect operation along the effect instruction triggered by receiving the effect instruction from the effect control means , Characterized in that it comprises a.

  On the other hand, in the case where the gaming machine of the present invention is, as one example, a revolving gaming machine, this revolving gaming machine comprises a rotary display means comprising a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of types of symbols, A housing, a first operating means provided outside the housing, a plurality of second operating means provided outside the housing corresponding to the plurality of rotating bodies, and Each of the plurality of rotating bodies is rotated when the first operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and each corresponding rotation is performed according to the operation sequence of the plurality of second operation means. The rotating body control means for stopping the rotation of the body, the lottery means for executing the internal lottery that determines whether or not a predetermined winning condition is established triggered by the operation of the first operation means, and the predetermined If the winning conditions for are satisfied, then the normal The game control means having game state control means for shifting to a special game state more advantageous to the player from the game control means, and effect control for controlling the rendering operation according to the establishment condition of the winning condition by control of the game control means By means of the means, the display means for executing the display operation by the effect control means, and the game control means, within the symbol display area where the variation modes of the plurality of symbols attached to the plurality of rotating bodies can be viewed It is characterized by comprising: payout means for executing a payout operation of gaming media according to a combination mode of a plurality of stopped symbols.

  As described above, according to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player by smoothly progressing the display processing of the image, even if many kinds of material images are used to display the image. can do.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko game machine. It is a top view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko game machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko game machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko game machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from a main body frame, and made the main body frame open from an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko game machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko game machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rendering unit of the plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right rendering unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper countersinking unit of the countersink unit is attached to the countersink unit base, (b) is from behind with the upper countersink retractor mounted on the countersink unit base It is the seen perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit of a disc unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the front upper side, (b) is the perspective view seen from the front lower side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the payout device from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the payout device from the back side. It is a right view of a delivery apparatus. (A) is a perspective view at the time of non-sphering at the time of non-sphering seen from the front side of the dispensing apparatus which cut | disconnected the prize ball front box along XX of FIG. 50, (b) is a perspective view at the time is there. (A) is a perspective view at the time of non-spheroid removal seen from the back side of the dispensing device which cut a prize ball back box along the YY line of FIG. 50, (b) is a perspective view at the time of deballing is there. FIG. 50 (a) is a front view of the payout device with the prize ball front box cut along the line X-X in FIG. 50, and FIG. 50 (b) is a prize ball along the line Y-Y in FIG. It is a rear view at the time of the non-ball draining of the dispenser which cut | disconnected the back box. It is an explanatory view of maintenance of a payment device. It is a front view which shows the whole structure of the pachinko game machine with which the game board was mounted | worn with the main body frame. It is a front view showing an example of composition of a game board. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a payment control board etc. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection of the delivery control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a peripheral control substrate 4140 shown in FIG. 57 and a substrate connected thereto. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to a payout motor of a payout device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a touch panel controller and a touch sensor circumference. FIG. 6 is a configuration diagram of a memory map and the like showing configuration examples of prescribed storage areas of the liquid crystal and the sound ROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the model information data previously prepared in a model information data area. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. 70 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 69; It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power-on of FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is powered on, following FIG. 76; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball look determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for a rental ball. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock surveillance processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of payout ball look-up operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball ball operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of retry operation monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of inconsistency counter reset judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and input signal confirmation processing (A) from CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special motorized prize control process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening prize winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot game preparation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot game mode determination processing. It is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when jackpot flag is ON. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot game processing. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example regarding delay control. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control using a pointer is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control using a pointer is implemented. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a writing-in control process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of the response to a player's operation on the assumption that delay control is implemented. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of the response to a player's operation on the assumption that delay control is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing request list | wrist corresponding to each flame | frame regarding the drawing request | requirement of each flame | frame in the case of reproducing | regenerating a certain scene. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing process by the graphics chip of a general frame buffer system. It is a block diagram explaining the drawing process of a frame unit. It is an example of the timing chart based on drawing processing of Drawing 117A. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen represented on the display area of the upper-dish liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen represented on the display area of the upper-dish liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen represented on the display area of the upper-dish liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen represented on the display area of the upper-dish liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen represented on the display area of the upper-dish liquid crystal display. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko gaming machine]
A pachinko gaming machine 1 as a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a door frame of the pachinko game machine, a game board, a body frame, and It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the outer frame and was seen from back.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on a pachinko island facility (not shown) in the game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 openably and closably The main unit frame 4 supports the main unit 3 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door unit 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, etc., an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right; The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of the member 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is attached to a lower portion of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which has a square outer shape in front view. A plate unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing gaming balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100 The side unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 attached to the front lower right portion of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating the dish unit 200. A handle unit 500 which can be operated by a player to drive a ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a door frame base unit 100. Fall cover unit 520 which is attached to the lower part of the face and receives the game ball which has been broken into the game area and discharges it to the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and the game ball of the upper tray 201 attached to the lower rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for feeding the ball to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through hole 111, and a crime prevention cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. Have.

  A main frame 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main frame base 600 Is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door A main frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the frame side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main frame base 600 in a front view, and a main frame base A ball launcher 680 attached to the lower front of the 600 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a body frame attached to the front right side of the body frame base 4, and A locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L shape attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and paying out the gaming ball to the player Payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable And a back cover 980 covering the

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a pachinko island facility (not shown) in a box shape and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed from the front left A tank rail 803 having two ball guiding passages extending in right and left directions for guiding to the left and a rear surface attached to the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering downward direction 2 A ball guiding unit 920 having a ball guiding passage of a strip and a lower side of the ball guiding unit 920 are detachably removable from the dispensing unit base 801. Dispensing device which dispenses each game ball guided by the two ball guiding passages of the ball guiding unit 920 one by one based on an instruction from the dispensing control board 4110 housed in the dispensing control board box 950 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guided out the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the gaming balls are usually discharged according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 in the tray unit 200 Alternatively, the upper full tank passage unit 850 to be discharged from any of the full tank discharge ports and the gaming ball released from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 are guided forward. Then, the game ball released from the normal guideway and the full tank discharge port guided from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 is moved forward Guide to and a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a full guide path guiding the full ball socket 528 of the door frame 3 from the front end. In the two ball guiding passages formed in the ball guiding unit 920, a ball out switch 821 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball is provided.

  Further, the payout unit 800 of the main unit frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main unit frame base 600 and is provided with a ball discharge passage 865 for discharging the gaming ball with the ball removed from the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 And a lock member 870 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls in the ball tank 802 flow into the payout device 830 through a tank rail 803 having two ball guiding passages and a ball guiding unit 920 having two ball guiding passages. And, when paying out the gaming balls which flowed into the payout device 830 in two articles as a winning ball, the gaming balls which flowed in two articles are paid out as one article one by one and flow in the upper full tank passage unit 850, When the game ball which has flowed into the payout device 830 in two articles is removed from the payout device 830, the game balls which flow in two lines are made one passage and are discharged through the ball discharge passage 865 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. . (The gaming balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are to be supplied to a ball lifter installed in a pachinko island facility not shown). As described above, the dispensing device 830 in the present embodiment also has the function of converting the two articles into one.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the back of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 with the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and in which the power supply substrate 931 is accommodated, and the speaker unit 920 attached on the rear side and interface A payout control board is mounted over the interface control board box 940 in which the control board is housed, and the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940, and the payout control board 4110 in which the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls is accommodated. And a substrate box 950

  The payout control board 4110 is mounted with an operation switch 952 having various functions and an error LED indicator 953 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operation unit of the operation switch 952 is exposed from the payout control board box 950, and is operated by a clerk such as a salesclerk of the game hall. On the other hand, the error LED indicator 953 is not exposed from the payout control board box 950. A clerk or the like of a game hall clerk can visually recognize the contents displayed on the error LED display 953 through the transparent cover body constituting the payout control board box 950.

  The operation switch 952 is a RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 when the power is turned on, and a microprocessor of the main control board (not shown) for controlling the progress of the game contained in the main control board box provided in the game board 5 Is operated to clear the built-in RAM, or is operated to clear the error when an error is notified by the error LED indicator 953 after the power is turned on. It has a function of performing a RAM clear at the time of turning on and a function of performing an error release after turning on the power (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear).

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are A front component 1000 having a guide rail 1001 guiding to the top, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear side of the game panel 1100 A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the lower part and opened upward, and a main control board attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are housed inside A table with a main control board box 1300 and a plurality of winning openings which can be installed in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and can receive game balls hit in the game area 5a. A back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 above the substrate holder 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100; Is equipped.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The game ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the winning opening not shown, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 according to the accepted winning opening. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a door frame base unit 100 having a frame-like outer shape in a front view, a plate unit 200 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100, and the front lower right of the door frame base unit 100 And a handle unit 500 mounted through the pan unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the rear cover lower surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, And a crime prevention cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back direction; A tubular handle attachment member 120 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and for attaching the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. The door frame side attached to upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left side in the front view and projecting forward and rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  Although the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is vertically arranged in a row and bulges forward, and can store the game balls; an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202; A plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and an upper plate liquid crystal display 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image; On the right side of the top plate 201 in a front view, the effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the top plate effect button 257 operable by the player, the plate unit cover 260 covering the top plate 201 and the bottom plate 202 from the front side A door lower right rendering unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A arranged and rotating according to the gaming state is covered from the front side of the door lower right rendering unit 270 A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removing unit 310 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 201 into the lower plate 202, and a device for removing gaming balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower plate ball throwing out unit 320 and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. And a top plate top decorative member 340 attached to the top of the plate unit base 210 and capable of emitting light.

  The top unit 350 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 etc., a unit base 360 partially attached along the upper side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit base A translucent top decoration member 370 attached to the center of the right and left at the front of the 360 and bulging forward, and a top speaker mounted in the top decoration member 370 and outputting high-pitched sound ( A door frame upper decorative substrate 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof is provided.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front of the base 410 and having its upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 A left speaker unit 430 attached at a position to be the upper left corner of 3 and having a left speaker (not shown), and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front of the base 460 and having its upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame at the front of the right side decorative member 470 A right speaker unit 246 mounted at a position to be the upper right corner of 3 and having a right speaker (not shown), and mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front And a door frame right decoration substrate (not shown) to which is attached.

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle main body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle main body 502 as shown in FIGS. A handle lever 506 that can be pivoted by the player, and a handle cover 506 attached to the handle main body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and rotatably supporting the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle main body 502 And have. Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted in the handle body 502 and is operated by a handle operation sensor for detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and is attached to the handle body 502 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a touch detection sensor attached to the inside of the handle body 502 for detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 etc., the fal cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has a shallow box-like unit body 522 open on the front side, It mainly includes a flat lid member 524 attached to the front. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and connects the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 to the upper countersink supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. And 526, a full tank receiving hole 528 that opens rearward at the right side in a front view of the through ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A ball that opens upward at the right side of the ball socket 528 in a front view and receives a game ball (far ball) that has not been reached into the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball receptacle 530 and the bowl unit 200 which is opened forward in the lower right corner in a front view and releases gaming balls received in the full ball receptacle 528 and the far ball receptacle 530. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  The ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and a box-like unit main body 542 which extends left and right and whose rear side is opened as shown in FIGS. The unit cover 544 removably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 in a box shape with the front side opened and in a front view right side of the fal cover unit 520, A ball entry port 546 to which gaming balls stored in 201 enter, a ball exit port 548 which can release game balls entering the ball entry port 546 and is opened toward the rear, a ball entrance The game ball which has entered into 546 can be discharged, and there is provided a ball discharge port 550 which is open toward the front below the ball entry port 546. Also, although not shown, the ball feeding unit 540 is a ball feeding solenoid for releasing game balls entering from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball outlet 548, and the game ball entering from the ball entrance 546 And a switching mechanism for switching either the ball outlet 548 side or the ball outlet 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and to both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 closing the inside of the frame of the cage unit frame 562.

[2-1. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the pan unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  27 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as viewed from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as viewed from the bottom. 31 is a plan view of the pan unit, FIG. 32 is an enlarged sectional view of a part of the rendering operation unit in the AA section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is a rendering operation in the BB section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the plate unit, FIG. 34 (b) is a right view of the lower effect unit of the door, and FIG. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating-body internal unit of the door lower right rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating-body internal unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating unit of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and FIG. 42 (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating member facing backward.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a perspective view as viewed from the front when the upper countersinking unit of the countersink unit is attached to the countersink unit base, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken out from the rear. FIG. 46 (a) is a perspective view of the lower bowl ball punching unit of the bowl unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower bowl ball punching unit disassembled and viewed from the front.

  The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 is disposed from the upper plate 201 below the upper plate 201 and stores the game balls which are paid out from the payout device 830 and which hold gaming balls for hitting into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing a ball. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 210, and the left side is greatly expanded forward from the left and right center. And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the left and right center at the lower front of the plate unit base 210 and bulging forward largely to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the pan unit 200 covers the front and bottom sides of the rendering operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper pan body 212 and the front surface of the pan unit base 210, the upper pan body 212, the lower pan body 214, and the rendering operation unit. A tray unit cover 260 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit 270 disposed on the right side of the rendering operation unit 220 and mounted to the front right portion of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit A game unit cover 300 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210 covering the front side of the 270 and the gaming ball attached so as to sandwich the tray unit base 210 from the front and back and stored in the upper tray 201 of the upper tray main body 212 And the lower tray body 214 below the lower tray body 214. Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Furthermore, the bowl unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the gaming hall. The upper plate top decoration member 340 attached to the top of the plate unit base 210 and capable of emitting light, and the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 are attached to the front left side of the plate unit base 210 and light is directed forward. It is attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 behind the dish unit left decoration substrate 345 equipped with a plurality of LEDs that can be irradiated, and behind the effect unit cover 300 and below the door lower right effect unit 270 Dish unit right decoration board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the back, and the back side of the dish unit base 210 Top plate front decoration board 233, top plate back decoration board 235, top plate liquid crystal board 241, exciter 242, touch panel 246, effect button decoration board 251, effect button press sensor 258, door lower right relay, which will be described later. A plate unit left decorative substrate 345 and a plate unit relay substrate 347 relaying the connection between the plate unit right decorative substrate 346 and the peripheral control substrate (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[2-1 a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends laterally to the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The pan unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 210a and extends in a cylindrical shape extending backward. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower circular sphere feed port 210c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part in the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward, The ball feeding port 210c is provided with an upper flat ball feed port 210d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the ball feed port 210c and extends vertically and whose upper portion is positioned at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 210 is a through hole 210e having a square inner periphery penetrating in the front and rear direction on the left side in a front view of the upper plate ball feed port 210d, and a receiving plate projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e. Piece 210f, relief hole 210g penetrating back and forth in front right upper side of upper flat ball feed port 210d, and front and back in front right lower corner of front view and handle attachment member 120 of door frame base unit 100 is inserted Handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i which is penetrated back and forth near the front right corner and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right side front view of a cylindrical lower circular sphere supply port 210c And a notch 210j which is cut away from the rear end to the front in the side surface of the frame.

[2-1 b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 has a large container bulging forward on the left side than the center in the front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward and backward. ing. The upper tray main body 212 is opened only to the left and the rear on the right end side in a front view, and includes a guiding passage portion 212a through which the game ball can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is entirely lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper tray body 212 attached to the tray unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is from the lower position of the upper bowl ball supply port 210a to the gaming ball from the upper end of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thus, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls are received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate main body 212 is provided with a metal ground fitting 212b which extends from the center on the left and right sides to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and when the gaming balls are in contact, static electricity charged on the gaming balls can be removed.

[2-1 c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower tray main body 214 of the tray unit 200 is formed in the shape of a container having a trapezoidal shape in which the rear end side is long with respect to the front end side and whose upper and rear are open. The lower bowl body 214 has a ball removal hole 214a which penetrates up and down at the bottom and can be closed by the lower bowl ball removal unit 320, and the bottom is inclined to become lower toward the ball removal hole 214a. doing. The lower dish main body 214 can receive and store gaming balls discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 210c of the dish unit base 210, and makes the gaming balls downward of the dish unit 200 from the ball extraction holes 214a. It can be discharged.

[2-1 d. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
As shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish main body 212 at the center in the front view and the attachment base unit 220A. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side in a front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A The unit cover 224 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from the upper side, and the decoration member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire periphery at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is formed of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by alleviating the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It can reduce that the vibration by the vibration excitation apparatus 242 is transmitted to the attachment base unit 220A or the plate unit base 210 side.

[2-1 d-1. Mounting base unit]
The mounting base unit 220A of the rendering operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 mounted on the front of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and above the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 attached at the front end of the upper tray main body 212 and being open at the upper end capable of receiving the touch unit 200B from the upper side and a horizontally long upper tray attached to the front end A unit cover which covers the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232 and the upper plate front decoration substrate 233 disposed between the front lens member 232, the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs at the front surface And 240. A translucent upper-dish front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231, and is provided with a plurality of LEDs for emitting light upward, and a decoration substrate 235 for upper dish and an upper side of the decoration board 235 for upper dish. Between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property disposed on the unit cover 224 and the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 And a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side in a front view of the upper back decoration member 236, and a button attachment member. And an upper disc ball release button 239 slidably mounted up and down by 238.

  The mounting base 230 is a flat-plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a which is inclined downward from the approximate center of the front to the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a. And a cylindrical cylindrical receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through hole 230b. The through hole 230 b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed toward the lower side (see FIG. 33). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner circumferential wall extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner circumferential wall is below the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It inclines and extends forward as it goes to the other side. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes forward and backward from the accommodation recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view from the front to the left and the other in a cylindrical shape. The horizontal support pin 231b, and a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a at right and left, and from the left and right center of the bottom of the housing recess 231a It has a central support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e projecting in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and separated to the left and right. .

  The unit case 231 is vertically and circularly penetrated vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted and the insertion hole 231f on the top A button unit attachment portion 231g for attaching the button unit 220C, a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending downward from the upper end of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodation recess 231a And a notch portion 231h.

  The housing concave portion 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in which a shape in plan view is a combination of a square extending in the left and right direction and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the square. Further, the bottom of the square portion of the housing recess 231a is formed lower than the bottom of the trapezoidal portion of the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a is formed slightly lower than the height (the length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  The four horizontal support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a, and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the horizontal support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i at the upper end side, the diameter of which decreases as going to the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The distance between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a and the middle of the tapered portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length of the horizontal support pin 231 b is longer than that of the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c is insertable into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than a half length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving protrusion 231 e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231 e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230 b of the mounting base 230. In the receiving protrusion 231e, the outer peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward toward the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. It extends. Further, the receiving projection 231e is extended so that the outer peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. The lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted into the through hole 230b of the mounting base 230 in the assembled state, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The upper front decoration member 234 exposes the front to the outside when the lower unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish and rear decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for emitting and decorating the upper dish and rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237 .

  The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer in the left and right than the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the light receiving section 237a disposed on the upper side of the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish rear decoration substrate 235; And a flat linear light emitting portion 237b fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 in a continuous manner. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237b forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodation recess 231a by fitting the linear light emitting portion 237b into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to make the linear light emitting unit 237b The entire top end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper disc ball release button 239 is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a which extends downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 respectively inserted into the four horizontal support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of two receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the cylindrical receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220 B side acts, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent and transmitted to the mounting base 230 by the bending.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface inclined with respect to the surface (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B) on which they are formed. Because the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. Do. As a result, the force from the side of the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

[2-1 d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-like lower case 240 whose upper side is opened, and an upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 attached from the upper side in the lower case 240. The upper case is attached to the lower case 240 while covering the upper sides of a pair of vibration devices 242, the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 disposed in the lower case 240 outside the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 A shallow box-like base member 243, an upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 inserted from the upper side in the base member 243 and capable of displaying an image under control of the upper-dish liquid crystal substrate 241; A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the top surface of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In the state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at their rear end surfaces. It has a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 which extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 etc. ing.

  The outer case of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodation recess 231 a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 231 a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular substrate attachment portion 240 a extending in the left and right direction, a flat plate-like projection 240 b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from both left and right sides of the substrate attachment portion 240 a, and the projection 240 b. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and which are partially opened to the outside in the left and right direction and spaced apart back and forth and projecting from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c The vibration device mounting portion 240e is disposed between the flange portion 240d and the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting portion 240b, and is disposed closer to the substrate mounting portion 240a and to which the vibration generating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C-shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240 d is insertable into the groove 222 a of the damper 222.

  The excitation device 242 includes a small excitation drive motor 242 a and a weight 242 b attached with the center of gravity eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the excitation drive motor 242 a. The vibration generator 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242 b by the vibration drive motor 242 a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a formed in a shallow box shape by inserting the upper-tray liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side, and extending portions 243 b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a. A screw hole 243c which penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip end of the extending portion 243b and formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c And a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 allows the distal end side to pass through the tapered portion 231i of the horizontal support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the proximal end (lower side) than the tapered portion 231i It is formed in the size which can not pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a toughened glass which is hard to be broken by impact, a capacitive sensor transparent sensor sheet 246b provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover 246c covering the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. Is equipped.

  The damper 222 can be attached to the touch unit 220B by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C character into the damper attachment recess 240c provided on the left and right of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. As a result, axial movement of the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240 c is restricted. With the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end Stand out.

  Further, in the touch unit 220 B, the excitation drive motor 242 a of the pair of excitation devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of excitation devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Further, the touch unit 220B has the waterproof seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, so when the liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid is prevented from infiltrating into the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

[2-1d-3. Button unit]
The button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower portion of the unit body 250. A presentation button decoration substrate 251 disposed on the side and provided with LEDs on the top surface, and a substrate cover 252 covering the bottom side of the presentation button decoration substrate 251 and attached to the bottom side of the unit body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, with the button base 253 being inserted between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250. A spring member 254 for urging the light guide member 255, a light guide member 255 which is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255 Sheet-like diffusion lens member 256 provided with a prism, an upper plate effect button 257 having a light transmitting property that covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit body 250 extends outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and has three attachment pieces 250a attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface , And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 has a cylindrical lower cylindrical portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical cylindrical upper cylindrical portion 253b whose diameter increases in the upward direction from the upper end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a, and an upper portion A claw which extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and whose lower end is capable of penetrating the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and which can be projected outward from the lower end and can be engaged (contacted) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250 A pair of engaging claws 253c having a pair of pins and radially outwardly projecting shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250 A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper cylindrical portion 253b and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as shown. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253 d of the button base 253.

  The light guiding member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guiding parts 255b are provided to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire top surface of the main part 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper dish effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they may slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In the button base 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper dish effect button 257 projects upward than the upper end of the unit body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 By engaging with the lower surface 250, the further rise is regulated, and the upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the rising end.

  When the upper dish effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper dish effect button 257 etc. is lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper dish effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 are in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted The upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220C can emit light and decorate the upper dish effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 to emit light. The LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251 are full color LEDs, and the upper dish effect buttons 257 can be lighted and decorated in various colors.

[2-1 d-4. Characteristics of Production Operation Unit]
In the effect operation unit 220 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B in the assembled state is from the lower surface of the lower case 240 Also, since it protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surfaces of the counterbore of the screw holes 243c of the base member 243, and the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b The movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. The tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the horizontal support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on the left and right sides.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 220 tapers downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached from the upper side in the pyramidal cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c that narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the whole pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in the normal state, only the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the mounting base 230 in a state where the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) floats in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 etc., in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). Striped). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting part 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, on the right side in a front view of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, an upper plate ball withdrawal button 239 is disposed. Furthermore, the button unit 220C is disposed on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the gaming state which is changed by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and enjoyed.

  An image imitating the operation button is displayed as the image displayed on the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and the detection of the touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted to allow the player to receive the image. The operation button can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the game state. It can be vibrated. In the effect using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration generator 242 so that the finger of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246 vibrates the touch panel 246. Even if the player operates the image operation button to the player, the player can be surprised as though the user operates the operation button having a substantial effect, and can be surprised by the touch panel 246 and the effect by the vibration. Can be entertained to the player to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view, the player is allowed to press the upper plate effect button 257 in accordance with the game state. You can enjoy the operation. More specifically, the image operation button on the touch panel 246 is a touch only on the touch panel 246, and there is a dislike that it lacks the feeling of operation compared to the actual operation button. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of discomfort to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is disposed at the portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game is performed even during the effect other than using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a risk that the user may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and an impact (load) is applied from above, the left and right horizontal support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted dampers 222, and the touch unit 220B is lowered while the dampers 222 are lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Then, when the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 abuts on the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B abuts on the left and right bottom surfaces of the accommodation recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that the center thereof moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving protrusions 231e which project downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving protrusion 231e is further lowered by an impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B An impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  The outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid which is respectively narrowed downward, so from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side) The load to be transmitted is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, by the number of layers of structures that absorb the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. Thus, the touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be less likely to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the rear peripheral edge of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper dish rear decorative substrate 235 according to the gaming state The top end of 237 b can emit light linearly. Thereby, the interest of the player can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, depending on the game state, the decoration light up decoration member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the touch unit 220B (rear side than the linear light emitting portion 237b) by the decoration LED 235a of the decoration rear board 235 It can be done. By making the upper back decoration member 236 emit light and decoration, as with the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237, the player's interest is attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B. It is possible to enjoy the effects presented by the effect operation unit 220 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is covered by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows downward (upper plate lower covering portion 262) of the upper plate 201. Thus, it is possible to prevent the dew condensation water from intruding into the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a malfunction from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

[2-1 e. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally as shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, and the center of the left and right bulges forward and is formed like a shell opened rearward. . The pan unit cover 260 opens forward substantially at the center between the left and right, and has a lower pan opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the pan unit base 210 and a top plate side (upper side) in the inner peripheral wall of the lower pan opening 261 And a lower cover portion 262 covering the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220, and a bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 disposed on the left side in front view of the lower plate opening 261 The speaker grill 263 for transmitting the sound from the speakers, the plate unit left decoration member 264 disposed above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the plate unit left decoration substrate 345 and disposed on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view And the bottom of the dish unit cover 260 is formed by the handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening portion 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner circumferential wall. The speaker grille 263 and the plate unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal provided with a plurality of holes in a metal plate.

  The surface of the plate unit cover 260 is formed to have a smooth surface on the left side in a front view, while the surface on the right side is formed to have a rough surface. In addition, the right side in the front view has a light transmitting property substantially entirely.

  The plate unit cover 260 is formed in an assembled state with the plate unit 200 such that an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 can be held by one hand. Thus, when the player performs touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and touch operation on the touch unit 220B is performed. Can be done easily.

[2-1 f. Door lower right production unit]
The door lower right rendering unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and to the right of the rendering operation unit 220 as shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for emitting light is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the relief opening 210g, and is attached to the unit base 271 rotatably supporting the door lower right rotating body 270A A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 engaged with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotary body 270A, a follower And a shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  In addition, the door lower right rendering unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A to the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 rotatably supporting the opposite side of the rotating body 270A with the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271 and a rotation of the door lower right-handed rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271 Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decoration member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side in a front view of the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a back side of the unit base 271 A door lower right base decoration substrate 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271 A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative substrate 280, and a door lower right relay substrate 281 relaying connection between a door lower right rotary substrate decorative substrate 291 described later and a peripheral control substrate (not shown) are provided. .

  The door lower right rotation body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and each is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 in a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. The front shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface, a band decoration 285 b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285 b The heart of the decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286 b having metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction in a band shape on the translucent hemispherical shell-like surface. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285 b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286 b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  As shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a disk-shaped door right lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides and the center of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 A cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the bottom right side of the door lower right rotation body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 A cylindrical shape which is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277 And a second fixed shaft member 293. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay substrate 281 and the door lower right rotator decorative substrate 291 is inserted in the second fixed shaft member 293.

  In addition, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and is attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And an annular, axially outwardly opened first reflector 295 mounted on the reflector base 294 and a reflector base 294 mounted inside the annular ring of the first reflector 295 to the center and having a hexagonal shape And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Relatively rotatable, they are separated from each other.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape forward from the front right upper portion with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotation body 270A and the ring portion 271a. Of the first projecting piece 271b projecting in the second direction, and a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a plate shape forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape toward the rear from the front end.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft passes through. The driven gear 274 is formed larger in diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes an attachment portion 275a attached to the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b which protrudes from the attachment portion 275a in a cylindrical shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotor-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat detection piece 276b extending outward. The base bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271 d of the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second projecting piece 271 c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the door lower right rotation body 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c of the door lower right rotation body 270A faces the front (see FIG. 42A) and rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c faces the rear (FIG. 42B) Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 of this embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces the front. It is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like depending on whether or not the player is entertained and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached to the door lower right rendering unit 270, the door right right while the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates When the lower rotary body decorative substrate 291 (of the LED) emits light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotary body decorative substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotary body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 or the first reflector 295 Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the light emitting decoration of the door lower right rotating body 270A is lit as if the light is blinking even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 is not blinked The door lower right rotation body 270A can be made to emit light in a rainbow color by being made to emit light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

[2-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the effect unit cover 300 of the pan unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotary body cover portion 301 covering the front side of the spherical door lower right rotary body 270A in the door lower right staging unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotary body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side in a front view of the plate unit cover 260 and penetrating in the front and rear in the lower right side of the rotary body cover portion 301 And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 is in the form of a container whose back is open as a whole, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decoration substrate 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decoration substrate 346 Embellished by

[2-1 h. Upper bowl balling unit]
As shown in FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the upper countersink removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a in the upper part of which the extension piece 239a of the upper countersink ball release button 239 can be inserted at the upper part thereof, and a through hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311 A front base member 312 attached at a position on the upper left of the front view, a press transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and pivoted by pressing of the upper disc ball release button 239, and a press transmission member And 313 a first spring member 314 which biases the upper disc ball release button 239 in the upward direction.

  Further, the upper disc ball removing unit 310 is provided with a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the disc unit base 210 so as to close the upper disc ball feed port 210d of the disc unit base 210 from the rear side; An upper disc ball withdrawal slider 316 disposed between the disc unit base 210 and the disc unit base 210 and mounted so as to be vertically movable by the rear base member 315 and in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 biasing the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the pan unit base 210, and has a flat base 312a attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extended flats extending forward from the left and right sides of the base 312a. It is provided in the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape An upper extension piece 313c which extends in a flat plate shape upward from near the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239a of the upper disc ball release button 239 And a lower extending piece 313d extending downward in a flat plate shape from the right end in the front view on the lower surface of the rear extending piece 313b, and a downward direction from the lower side near the left end in the front view in the shaft portion 313a And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313 d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper countersink slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends flatly in parallel to the rear surface of the pan unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the pan unit base 210, and is separately provided on the front surface of the base portion 315a The slider support portion 315b slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and the front end of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a is opened forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It has an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base part 315a and through which gaming balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward and has a lower end curved in the rear direction, and An L-shaped second induction passage 315e which extends downward from the lower side of the first induction passage 315d and extends leftward in a front view and whose left end is opened leftward and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat channel lid 315f closing the rear end side of the left extending portion of the induction path 315e and the L-shaped second induction path 315e. An opening 315g is provided, and a spring locking portion 315h protruding in a boss shape forward from the front surface of the base 315a and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the left-side extending portion becomes lower toward the left. The left end of the second induction passage 315e is, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower disc ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second induction passage 315e and The lower flat ball supply port 210c is in communication with each other.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate having a slider base 316a slidably supported at the left and right ends on the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left to the front A transmission piece 316b capable of contacting the lower end of the downward extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313 with the upper surface of the receiving piece 210f extending through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and the slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward as it goes downward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring engagement that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and the lower end of the second spring member 317 is locked. And a stop portion 316d.

  In the upper tray bowling unit 310, when the tray unit 200 is assembled, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guiding passage 212a of the upper tray main body 212. Thus, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 can be supplied from the upper inlet 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide path 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper disc ball extracting button 239 is pressed downward, the push transmitting member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239 a of the upper disc ball extracting button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d pivots in the direction of moving downward about the shaft portion 313a. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressing transmission member 313, the upper flat ball withdrawal slider 316's transmission piece 316b contacts the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper ball ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316 c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315 d side is in communication with the second guide path 315 e side. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 210c to the lower tray 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first induction passage 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second induction passage 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  In addition, when the downward pressing of the upper disc ball releasing button 239 is released, the upper disc ball extracting slider 316 and the upper disc ball removing button 239 are raised by the biasing force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317 It is possible to return to the original state.

[2-1 i. Lower bowl balling unit]
The lower countersink removing unit 320 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the tray unit cover 260 as shown in FIG. A flat-plate-shaped lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the extraction hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 which can slide over the lower-disc spherical-draw base 321 to close the opening 321a. , A knob attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed from the front of the plate unit cover 260 to the outside, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 in the position opening the opening 321a against the biasing force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower countersinking base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By mounting the lower disc ball removal base 321 to the lower disc body 214, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported to the left and right between the lower disc ball removal base 321 and the lower disc body 214. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322 a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in a front view.

  The holding device 325 is provided with a main body 325a attached to the lower ball ball withdrawal base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b which can be opened and closed from the main body 325a and can grip the holding projection 322a. The holding device 325 inserts the holding projection 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325b and presses the holding projection 322a toward the main body 325a, thereby closing the pair of holding claws 325b and holding the holding projection 322a. The claws 325b are kept closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b is opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is located between the opening 321a and the lower hole body 214a of the lower plate main body 214 in a state where the picker 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right The gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be stored in the lower tray 202 without being dropped downward from the ball removal holes 214 a.

  From this state, by operating the knob portion 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a communicate. As a result, the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 come out of the lower portion of the tray unit 200 through the ball holes 214a and the opening 321a, and the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob portion 323 is stopped. You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide cover 322, slightly operating the knob 323 to the left opens the pair of holding claws 325b and releases the holding projection 322a, and the biasing force of the spring member 324 slides the slide cover 322 to the right. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. As described above, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower ball ball emptying unit 320, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 202, or the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 can be removed.

[2-1 j. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a unit case 331 attached to the upper surface near the right end in the front view of the rendering operation unit 220 and having transparency. A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player, and a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; And a display section 334 which can be viewed from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333. A CR unit lamp is disposed in the vicinity of the display unit 334, and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp can be viewed from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls when a ball lending button 332 is pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The unit 200 can be loaned (dispensed) into the upper tray 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned. Further, the display unit 334 displays the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[2-1 k. Upper plate top decoration member]
The upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 etc., a translucent upper dish top lens attached to the left and right center at the upper end of the dish unit base 210 An upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decorative member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band by causing the LEDs of the upper dish top decorative substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper dish top decorative member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, the upper dish top decorative member is the same as the light emitting decoration such as the upper dish rear decoration member 236 and the linear luminous lens member 237 By making the light emitting decoration 340 possible, the player's interest can be attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the rendering operation unit 220 is enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

  The upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200 of the present embodiment is a storage plate, the plate unit 200 of the present embodiment is a bulging portion, and the touch unit 220B (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) of the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment. In the effect presenting means, the upper dish rear decoration substrate 235, the upper dish rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the upper dish top decoration member 340 in this embodiment respectively correspond to light emitters.

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a When displaying an image on the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 in accordance with the gaming state changed by hitting a game ball into the area 5a, the outer side of the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 near the game area 5a is outside Since the strip-like linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, etc. are made to emit light along the peripheral edge, the line of sight of the player is concentrated in the game area 5a. Even if it is possible to notice the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. coming from the outside of the line of sight (visual field), the line of sight (interest) of the player It is possible to attract to 4 side. Therefore, when presenting effects such as an image according to the game state in the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emission lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, thereby providing the player with the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and it is possible to enjoy the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of a chance, it is arranged outside the gaming area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 being played, it is possible for the player to play the game in the game area 5a and the effect by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by giving attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed, and when displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the player can be made to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 by making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. It is possible to make the player pay attention and to surely recognize the arrival of the chance to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, there is a risk that the player will not be able to concentrate on either of the gaming area 5a and the gaming area 5a, and may decrease interest, but the gaming state Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light according to the arrival), the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the light emission and the game within the game area 5a is enjoyed As the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and tired.

  In addition, since the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the dish unit 200 which bulges to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 can be easily concealed by the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 becomes difficult to see from other players behind and behind. The effect presented by the upper-plate liquid crystal display 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and decrease in interest by being scolded by another player when enjoying the effects by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and it is also possible to reduce the upper plate liquid crystal display device. The linear luminous lens member 237 or the like emits light at the time of presentation of the effect by 244, making it difficult to miss the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and entertaining Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light emitting lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens members 237 and the like can be made more noticeable than in the case of emitting light in a point Can be made to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. easily, and enjoy the effects of the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the touch panel 246 etc. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission aspect is different from the light emission of the other light emission decorative body etc. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are disposed at a position on the rear side close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of vision, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper dish liquid crystal display 244.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, the effect operation unit 220 having the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 and the like is provided, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 strikes the game area 5a. The upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are turned when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201 since the player for checking the amount of game balls to be closed turns the line of sight at a certain frequency. It becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns the gaze toward the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the gaze from the inside of the game area 5a to the upper tray 201 (upper tray liquid crystal display 244). Therefore, when the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately shifted to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and the effect presented by the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the rendering operation unit 220 is disposed below the gaming area 5a, and light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is emitted to the player from below, the gaming operation unit 220 is disposed above the gaming area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to easily see the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc., so that it becomes possible to make the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 pay attention to the player reliably. It is possible to enjoy the effect by the operation unit 220 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 220 (upper dish liquid crystal display 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left and right direction, the center of the line of sight of the player is in any position in the game area 5a. However, it is possible to easily notice the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely make the player pay attention to the upper tray liquid crystal display 244, and enjoy the effect by the effect operation unit 220. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 220 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the rendering by the image, it is possible to perform rendering for the player to operate the touch panel 246, and it is possible to entertain the player by various renderings By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the effect, and it is possible to actively enjoy the effect for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) disposed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball emitting device 680). An upper tray ball extraction button 239 is disposed along the feeding guide passage portion 212a and operates the upper tray ball removal unit 310 with the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear luminous lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear luminous lens member 237 is disposed at a position which the player cares during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emission lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is drawn to the touch unit 220B and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 It is easy to notice the timing of touch operation etc.).

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 of the dish unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B while being disposed at a position higher than that of the touch unit 220B, the outer plate 201 can be exposed to the air on the upper plate main body 212 or the surface of the game ball Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows downward of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), the condensed water can be prevented from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the said embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko game machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it does not limit to this, A pachislot machine, and a game machine formed by uniting a pachinko game machine and a pachislot machine In this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[3. Dispensing device]
Next, the dispensing device 830 disposed on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 is a perspective view (a) of the dispensing device seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 47 is a perspective view (b) seen from the front lower side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device seen from the front side. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the back side, FIG. 50 is a right side view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 51 is a dispensation device in which a prize ball front box is cut along line X-X in FIG. FIG. 52 is a perspective view at the time of non-sphering as seen from the front side at the time of non-steaming (a), at the time of having the ball unsealed (b); 53 (a) and 53 (b) are respectively a perspective view and a perspective view at the time of unballooning when viewed from the back side of the ball, and FIG. 53 is a dispensation in which the prize ball front box is cut along line X-X in FIG. (A) of the front view of the device at the time of non-ball removal, and the back of the dispensing device at the time of non-ball removal of the prize ball back box cut along the line Y-Y in FIG. A diagram (b), FIG. 54 is an explanatory view of the maintenance of the dispensing device. In FIGS. 51 (a), (b), and 53 (a), the prize ball intermediate gear, the detection disk, and the like are shown by imaginary lines for easy viewing of the drawings.

  The dispensing device 830 is a box-like prize ball front box 831 opened at the rear where a bending passage 831b, a prize ball passage 831c, and a ball removing passage 831d are formed by a pair of bending passage walls 831a. While covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831, a box-like opening is formed in which the bending passage 832b constituting the ball passage by the pair of bending passage walls 832a, the prize ball passage 832c, and the ball removing passage 832d are formed. The prize ball back box 832, and the game ball passing through the flex passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 when attaching the prize ball back box 832 to the prize ball front box 831 and the flex path formed in the prize ball back box 832 The prize ball inner box 831 is formed with a bonus ball inner partition plate 833 for preventing the game balls passing through 832b from entering each other, and a game ball passing through a flex passage 831b formed in the prize ball outer box 831 A prize ball removing lever 834 for discharging game balls passing through a flexing passage 832b formed in a prize ball back box 832 to a ball withdrawal passage 832d formed in a prize ball back box 832 while discharging the ball into the ball withdrawal path 831d. And a group of gears provided on the surface area of the prize ball table box 831 while covering the front of the prize ball table box 831 (the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disc 842 described later And a box-shaped award ball gear cover 835, which is open at the rear to cover the. Bent passage 832b, prize ball passage 832c, and ball removal passage 832d formed in prize ball back box 832 correspond to bending passage 831b, prize ball passage 831c, and ball withdrawal passage 831d formed in prize ball front box 831. Are provided at the respective positions. Here, the configuration of the prize ball outer box 831, the prize ball back box 832, the prize ball inner partition plate 833, the prize ball pull lever 834, and the prize ball gear cover 835 is described, followed by the fixed position of the sprocket and the payout. The maintenance of the device will be described.

[3-1. Prize ball front box]
First, the configuration of the prize ball front box 831 will be described. The prize ball front box 831 is formed in a rectangular box shape having a rear opening, and the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 is headed toward the prize ball back box 832 A bent passage 831 b is formed by the pair of bent passage walls 831 a protruding from each other. Of the pair of curved passage walls 831a, one of the curved passage walls 831a is the middle of the upper center of the upper side of the winning ball front box 831 and the left is largely on the downstream side from the front center of the winning ball front box 831 The other bent passage wall 831a is viewed from the front of the prize ball front box 831 while the other bent passage wall 831a is bent and doubles as the side wall of the left end side of the prize ball front box 831 from the front to the downstream end A notch 831e is formed at a portion of the upper center of the top of the prize ball front box 831 and a large right turn from the middle to the downstream from the upper center to the right, and the right end of the prize ball front box 831 extends from about the middle to the downstream end It doubles as a side wall.

  At the upper end of the notch 831e formed in the other bending passage wall 831a, a support shaft 831f is protruded from the bottom surface of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 side. A ball-extracting piece 836 that can be rocked by being mounted is attached. The hollowed out piece 836 is formed by curving the shaft portion 836a into which the support shaft 831f is inserted at one end and the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a so as to be flush The side wall 836b capable of closing the portion 831e is integrally formed, and the upstream and downstream sides of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a are opposite to the rolling surface of the side wall 836b on which the game ball rolls A reinforcing rib 836c is formed on the side surface. At the other end of the blanking piece 836, a support shaft 832f which is provided in a projecting manner in a prize ball back box 832 described later is inserted, and a side wall 836b of the blanking piece 836 The upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bending passage wall 832a to be provided are curved and formed to be flush with each other.

  Below the cutaway portion 831e formed in the other curved passage wall 831a, a passage partition wall 831g is formed as a pair of curved passage walls 831a divided left and right from the middle to the downstream end of the prize ball front box 831. It is formed. That is, two passages are formed by the bent passage wall 831a and the passage partition wall 831g which are bent in the left and right direction from the middle of the prize ball front box 831, one passage constitutes the bent passage 831b, and the other passage The passage 831d is configured. The passage partition wall 831g is a recess space constituting a board attachment housing space 831h for housing and attaching a prize ball case inner substrate 847 on which a rotation angle switch 846 for detecting the rotational position of the sprocket 837 described later is mounted. Is formed by being formed from the surface of the prize ball front box 831 to the rear. The board attachment housing space 831h is a passage partition wall 831g constituting the bending passage 831b, and a sprocket 837 which receives the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b and sends it out to the winning ball passage 831c is arranged downstream of the bending passage 831b. It is formed to constitute a ball sending space 831k for

  A passage section wall 831i is formed protruding from the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 from the lower part of the ball delivery space 831k to the downstream end of the prize ball front box 831. That is, a passage for feeding the gaming balls received by the recess 837a of the sprocket 837 along the downstream bending passage wall 831a bent from the middle of the prize ball front box 831 to the left, and the middle from the middle of the prize ball front box 831 A passage formed by the downstream bent passage wall 831a and the passage partition wall 831i is formed in communication with each other, and this passage constitutes a winning ball passage 831c.

  As described above, the sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed in the ball delivery space 831k. On the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three recesses 837a in which the game balls fit are formed equally at every 120 degrees. A ball sending space 832k, which will be described later, is also formed in the award ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the award ball front box 831, and the sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed also in the ball sending space 832k. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three recesses 837b in which the game balls fit are formed equally by every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 are ball delivery spaces 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. Are disposed on the front side of the three recesses 837 b of the sprocket 837 disposed in Also, three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and three sprockets 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 The concave portions 837b are disposed so as to be displaced by 60 degrees from each other.

  On the downstream side of the prize ball passage 831c, a guiding protrusion 831m for guiding the gaming ball sent out by the sprocket 837 to a ball intake not shown provided in the upper full ball path unit 850 shown in FIG. The bottom of the box 831 is protruded toward the prize ball back box 832 side. Below the guide protrusion 831 m, a count switch 838 is arranged to detect the game ball guided by the guide protrusion 831 m. The counting switch 838 is formed of a rectangular magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which the game ball passes is formed at the tip, and the lower side of the curved passage wall 831a and the passage partition wall 831i constituting the ball sending space 831k. A counting switch 838 is supported by a sensor mounting portion 831n formed on the lower side. In the vicinity of the sensor mounting portion 831n formed under the passage partition wall 831i, a wiring port 831o for passing the electric wiring to the counting switch 838 is opened under the prize ball front box 831. The wiring port 831o is in communication with the above-described substrate mounting and accommodating space 831h.

  In addition, on the upper side of the prize ball front box 831 and looking at the prize ball front box 831 from the front, the left side flexing path wall 831a of the pair of flexing path walls 831a, and the left side wall of the prize ball front box 831; A motor housing space 831p for housing the payout motor 839 is formed between them. The cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 839 is accommodated in the motor accommodation space 831p. The payout motor 839 is fixed by screwing with a screw (not shown) on the bottom side of the prize ball front box 831 by a pair of mounting pieces 839 b formed on the front surface. Although the prize ball motor gear 840 is fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, the payout motor 839 is attached to the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 in a state that the prize ball motor gear 840 is fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. A shaft insertion hole 831 q is drilled on the bottom surface of the prize ball front box 831 so as to be attachable to the prize ball motor gear 840. A wire port 831o for passing an electrical wire to the payout motor 839 is opened on the upper side of the prize ball front box 831 in the vicinity of the upper side of the cylindrical main body of the payout motor 839.

  In addition, on the upper side of the prize ball front box 831 and looking at the prize ball front box 831 from the front, the flexing passageway wall 831a on the right side of the pair of flexing passageway walls 831a; And the game ball passing through the flexing passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is discharged to the ball pulling out path 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and is formed in the prize ball back box 832 A mechanism for operating the ball-extracting piece 836 for discharging the gaming ball passing through the flexing passage 832b to the ball-extracting passage 832d formed in the winning ball back box 832 is formed. On the right side of the curved passage wall 831a, from the bottom wall of the prize ball front box 831 to the vicinity of the support shaft 831f described above, the position defining wall from the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 831r is provided in a protruding manner. On the side of the right side wall of the prize ball outer box 831 of the position defining wall 831r, a position where the state in which the prize ball unleaving lever 834 is not operated is maintained, and a state where the prize ball extracting lever 834 is operated out Recesses 831s for respectively defining the position to be maintained are spaced apart in the vertical direction. A guide piece 831t for sliding the prize ball release lever 834 in the vertical direction is provided on the right side wall of the prize ball front box 831 so as to project from the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 It is done. On the upper rear side of the right side wall of the prize ball front box 831 is formed a notch 831 u for causing an operation portion 834 aa of the prize ball pulling lever 834 described later to project from the right side wall of the prize ball front box 831.

  The gear group provided on the surface area of the prize ball front box 831 includes a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disc 842. The tip of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 831q drilled on the bottom surface of the prize ball table box 831 as described above, and protrudes on the surface of the prize ball table box 831 and the protruding portion The prize ball motor gear 840 (in the present embodiment, the number of teeth Z1 = 12) is fixed to the gear. Under the prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841 (in this embodiment, the number of teeth Z2 = 60 in this embodiment) engaged with the prize ball motor gear 840 is rotatably provided on the prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843. Under the gear 841 is a prize ball sprocket shaft 845 on which a detection disk 842 having a prize ball sprocket gear 844 (in this embodiment, the number of teeth Z3 = 54 in this embodiment) engaged with the prize ball intermediate gear 841. It is provided rotatably. The prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843 is supported by a bearing cylinder 835a having one end protruding from the bottom surface of a prize ball gear cover 835 described later, and a bearing whose other end protrudes from the face of the prize ball front box 831 It is supported by the cylinder 831v. The prize ball sprocket shaft 845 is supported by a bearing tube 835b having one end projecting from the bottom surface of a prize ball gear cover 835 described later and the other end projected from the bottom surface of a prize ball back box 832 described later The shaft through hole 831w is formed on the lower side of the gear area (left side of the board mounting and accommodating space 831h described above when the prize ball front box 831 is viewed from the front) although supported by the bearing cylinder 832v. And rotatably support the sprocket 837 in the ball delivery space 831k described above, and rotatably support the detection disk 842 in the space formed by the prize ball gear cover 835 and the prize ball front box 831. There is.

  An uneven joint portion 842a is formed on the center rear surface of the detection disk 842 and an uneven joint portion 837c is formed on the front end of the sprocket 837. The joint portion 842a and the sprocket 837 formed on the detection disk 842 The detection disc 842 and the sprocket 837 can be integrally rotated about the prize ball sprocket shaft 845 by being engaged with the joint portion 837 c formed in Therefore, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a is rotated so that the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disc 842 are rotated. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 via it.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 842 is formed a size larger than the circle of the award ball sprocket gear 844, and the outer circumferential portion projecting outward from the award ball sprocket gear 844 is the same as the recesses 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837 A number (in the present embodiment, three recesses 837a and three recesses 837b, six in total) of detection notches 842b are formed. The detection notch 842b is a light emitting / receiving rotation type mounted on the award ball case inner substrate 847 held by the substrate attachment portion 831ha (see FIG. 53A) formed in the substrate attachment accommodation space 831h described above. It is detected by the corner switch 846. The rotation angle switch 846 is used to monitor whether or not the sprocket 837 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 842b within a predetermined time during the dispensing operation. Temporarily, when abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 846 (in many cases, the ball grip state by the sprocket 837), the sprocket 837 is rotated forward and reverse a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, ball grip state) It is The number of gaming balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 838 described above. In addition, the other end side of the award ball case inner substrate 847 is also held by a substrate attachment portion 835 c formed on an award ball gear cover 835 described later.

  In the prize ball sprocket gear 844, the insertion holes 844 a are equally distributed every 60 and drilled on the same circumference. An arc-shaped tool insertion elongated hole 831 zz is drilled on the bottom surface of the prize ball front box 831 at a position corresponding to the same circumference where the insertion holes 844 a are disposed. The arc-shaped tool insertion elongated hole 831 zz checks the rotation degree of a gear group including the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disc 842 by rotating the prize ball sprocket gear 844. To insert a tool such as a piano wire or wire into one of the insertion holes 844 a of the prize ball sprocket gear 844 through the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831 zz to check the rotation degree of the sprocket 837. It is. The arc length of the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831 zz can be determined by rotating at least one insertion hole 844 a of the prize ball sprocket gear 844 toward one end of the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831 zz with a tool Another insertion hole 844a adjacent to the insertion hole 844a can emerge from the other end of the arc-shaped tool insertion long hole 831zz on the opposite side to the rotation direction and can be visually recognized.

[3-2. Prize ball back box]
Next, the configuration of the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear face of the prize ball front box 831 will be described. The prize ball back box 832 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front is opened. A bent passage 832b is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 832a protruding from the bottom toward the prize ball front box 831 side. Of the pair of curved passage walls 832a, one of the curved passage walls 832a is substantially from the middle of the upper center to the downstream side of the prize ball back box 832 to the left when the prize ball back box 832 is viewed from the front. The other bent passage wall 832a is seen from the front of the prize ball back box 832, while the other bent passage wall 832a is bent and doubles as a side wall of the left end side of the prize ball back box 832 from the front of the downstream end to the downstream end. A notch 832e is formed at a portion of the upper center of the top of the prize ball back box 832 and a large degree to the right from the middle to the downstream on the downstream side, and the right end of the prize ball back box 832 extends from about the middle to the downstream end. It doubles as a side wall.

  A support shaft 832f is protruded from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 at the upper end of the notch portion 832e formed in the other bending passage wall 832a. A ball-extracting piece 836 that can be rocked by being mounted is attached. As described above, one end of the shaft portion 836a of the hollowed out piece 836 is inserted with the support shaft 831f protrudingly provided to the prize ball front box 831 and the other end of the axial portion 836a of the hollowed out piece 836 is an award By inserting a support shaft 832f protruding from the ball back box 832, it can be rocked by the support shafts 831f and 832f. Further, as described above, the side wall portion 836b of the hollowed out piece 836 is curved so that the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bending passage wall 831a protruding from the prize ball front box 831 are flush with each other. Can be formed to block the cutaway portion 831e, and the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bending passage wall 832a protruding from the prize ball back box 832 are curved so as to be in the same plane It can be formed to close the notch 832e and is formed as one smooth surface.

  Below the notch portion 832e formed in the other bending passage wall 832a, the prize ball back box 832 is formed as a pair of bending passage walls 832a divided left and right from the middle to the downstream end of the prize ball back box 832. A passage section wall 832g is formed from the bottom surface of the ball to the prize ball front box 831 side. That is, two passages are formed by the curved passage wall 832a and the passage partition wall 832g which are bent in the left and right direction from the middle of the prize ball back box 832, one passage constitutes the curved passage 832b, and the other passage The passage 832d is configured. The downstream side of the bending passage 832b is formed to constitute a ball delivery space 832k for arranging a sprocket 837 for receiving the game balls passing through the bending passage 832b and delivering them to the prize ball passage 832c.

  A passage section wall 832i is formed protruding from the bottom of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 from the lower part of the ball delivery space 832k to the downstream end of the prize ball back box 832. That is, a passage for feeding the game balls received by the recess 837b of the sprocket 837 along the downstream bending passage wall 832a which is curved from the middle of the prize ball back box 832 to the left, and the middle to left of the prize ball back box 832 A downstream bent passage wall 832a and a passage by the passage partition wall 832i are formed in communication with each other, and this passage constitutes a prize ball passage 832c.

  Sprockets 837 are rotatably disposed in the ball delivery space 832k. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three recesses 837b in which the game balls fit are formed equally by every 120 degrees. As described above, the sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed also in the ball delivery space 831 k formed in the prize ball outer box 831 disposed in front of the prize ball back box 832. On the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three recesses 837a in which the game balls fit are formed equally at every 120 degrees. That is, the three concave portions 837b of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are balls delivered in the prize ball front box 831 disposed in front of the prize ball back box It is arrange | positioned behind the three recessed parts 837a of the sprocket 837 arrange | positioned at space 831k. Also, as described above, it is disposed in the three recess portions 837a of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 The three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 are disposed so as to be displaced by 60 degrees from one another.

  On the downstream side of the prize ball passage 832c, a guiding projection 832m for guiding the gaming ball sent out by the sprocket 837 to a ball intake not shown provided in the upper full ball path unit 850 shown in FIG. The bottom of the box 832 is protruded toward the prize ball back box 832 side. Below the guide projection 832m, a count switch 838 is arranged to detect the game ball guided by the guide projection 832m. As described above, the counting switch 838 is formed of a rectangular magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole formed at the tip end so that the game ball passes, and one end of the counting switch 838 is a bend forming the ball sending space 831k. A bent passage wall 832a which is supported by a sensor mounting portion 831n formed on the lower side of the passage wall 831a and the lower side of the passage partition wall 831i, and the other end side of the counting switch 838 constitutes a ball delivery space 832k. The sensor mounting portion 832 n formed on the lower side and the lower side of the passage section wall 832 i is supported so as to be held.

  The other end of the above-mentioned prize ball sprocket shaft 845 is inserted into the bottom of the prize ball back box 832, and a bearing tube 832v for supporting the prize ball sprocket shaft 845 is from the bottom of the prize ball back box 832 It is projected towards 831.

  In addition, the bending passage wall 832a on the left side of the pair of bending passage walls 832a, which is the upper side of the award ball back box 832 and the prize ball back box 832 is viewed from the front, A motor housing space 832p for housing the payout motor 839 is formed between the two. The cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 839 is accommodated in the motor accommodation space 832p. The bottom of the prize ball back box 832 facing the back surface (surface opposite to the surface on which the output shaft 839a is provided) of the payout motor 839 is a heat radiation port 832r for dissipating the heat generated from the payout motor 839 to the outside. A plurality of holes are drilled.

  In addition, the bending passage wall 832a on the right side of the pair of bending passage walls 832a, which is the upper side of the award ball back box 832 and the winning ball back box 832 is viewed from the front, And the game ball passing through the flexing passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is discharged to the ball pulling out path 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and is formed in the prize ball back box 832 A mechanism for operating the ball-extracting piece 836 for discharging the gaming ball passing through the flexing passage 832b to the ball-extracting passage 832d formed in the winning ball back box 832 is formed. For the right bent channel wall 832a, from the bottom wall of the prize ball back box 832 to the vicinity of the support shaft 832f mentioned above, the position defining wall from the bottom face of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 832s are provided in a protruding manner. On the side of the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832 of this position defining wall 832s, a position where the state in which the prize ball pulling lever 834 is not operated is maintained, and a state where the winning ball opening lever 834 is operated Recesses 832t for defining the position to be maintained are respectively formed apart in the vertical direction. A guide piece 832 u for sliding the prize ball removing lever 834 in the vertical direction is provided on the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832 so as to protrude from the bottom face of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 It is done. At the upper rear of the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832, a notch 832x is formed for causing an operation portion 834aa of the prize ball pulling lever 834 described later to project from the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832.

  In addition, on the upper end surface of the prize ball back box 832, a pair of insertion pieces 832y are located at positions corresponding to a pair of positioning recesses (not shown) formed on the lower end surface of the ball guiding unit It is projected towards.

  Further, at the center of the lower wall of the prize ball back box 832, a notch 832z for inserting a locking convex portion (not shown) formed on the main body frame base 600 shown in FIG. 4 is formed.

  In the bottom of the prize ball back box 832, a tool insertion slot 832zz for inserting a tool such as a piano wire or a wire to check the swinging degree of the ball removal piece 836 is a side wall of the ball removal piece 836 It is curved and drilled along the shape of the portion 836b.

[3-3. Prize ball partition board]
Next, when the prize ball back box 832 is attached to the prize ball front box 831, the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the game passing through the bending passage 832 b formed in the prize ball back box 832 To describe the configuration of the prize ball inner partition plate 833 for preventing the balls from intruding into each other, the prize ball inner partition plate 833 has the shape of the bending passage 831 b formed in the prize ball outer box 831 and the prize It is formed in the shape of a plate bent along the shape of the bending passage 832 b formed in the ball back box 832.

  The top surface of the prize ball inner partition plate 833 is in a state of being held between the prize ball front box 831 and the prize ball back box 832, the top face of the prize ball front box 831 and the top face of the prize ball back box 832 are the same surface. Become. In order for game balls passing through the front ball guiding passage and the rear guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 920 to flow smoothly into the front upper end portion and the rear upper end portion of the prize ball middle partition plate 833, respectively (inflow The inclined portions 833a are arranged such that the cross-sectional area of the prize ball middle partition plate 833 in the front-back direction gradually increases within a predetermined distance from the upper end portion of the prize ball middle partition plate 833 in a downward direction. It is formed.

  The bottom surface of the prize ball inner partition plate 833 is a ball delivery space 831 k formed in the prize ball outer box 831 in a state where the prize ball inner partition plate 833 is held by the prize ball outer box 831 and the prize ball back box 832. Between the three concave portions 837a on the front side of the sprocket 837 and the three concave portions 837b on the rear side of the sprocket 837 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 and slightly above the sprocket 837 main body Has reached. A ball sending space 831k is formed in the winning ball front box 831 with game balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the winning ball front box 831 at the front lower end portion and the rear lower end portion of the prize ball middle partition plate 833. In order to be able to flow smoothly into the three recesses 837a on the front side of the sprocket 837 at the same time (for easy flow-in), the game ball passing through the flexing passage 832b formed in the In order to be able to smoothly flow into the three concave portions 837b on the rear side of the sprocket 837 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the box 832 (for easy flow), the prize ball upper partition plate 833 is located above the lower end Inclined portions 833b are formed so that the cross-sectional area in the front-rear direction of prize ball middle partition plate 833 gradually increases within a predetermined distance dimension toward the end (see FIG. , Toward the lower end of the Shodama partition plate 833, the inclined portion 833b as the cross-sectional area in the longitudinal direction of the Shodama partition plate 833 is gradually reduced are formed).

[3-4. Prize ball ball lever]
Next, the gaming ball passing through the flex passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is discharged to the ball removal passageway 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831, and the flex passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 To explain the configuration of the winning ball releasing lever 834 for discharging the game ball passing through to the ball removing passage 832d formed in the winning ball back box 832, the winning ball releasing lever 834 is formed in a rectangular solid elongated in the front-rear direction An elongated plate-like elastic piece 834b is protruded upward from the upper surface of the lever main body 834a and the lever main body 834a, and a convex portion 834ba is an upper end of the elastic piece 834b and protrudes leftward. It is done. An operation portion 834 aa protrudes rightward on the upper right side of the lever main body 834 a. On the lower side of the left surface of the lever main body 834a, a convex portion 834ab (see FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)) which can contact with a reinforcing rib 836c formed on the winning ball ball release lever 834 is directed leftward. It has been erected. Slide guide grooves 834ac and 834ad are respectively formed on the front and rear sides of the lever main body 834a.

  The slide guide groove 834 ac formed on the front side of the lever main body 834 a protrudes from the prize ball outer box 831 in a state where the award ball ball release lever 834 is held between the prize ball outer box 831 and the award ball back box 832. The slide guide groove 834ad formed on the rear surface of the lever main body 834a is inserted into the guide piece 831t to be installed, and is inserted into the guide piece 832u formed to project from the prize ball back box 832, The extraction lever 834 can slide in the vertical direction along the guide pieces 831 t and 832 u. When sliding the operating portion 834aa of the winning ball ball release lever 834 in the vertical direction, the convex portion 834ba protruding from the elastic piece 834b is formed on the position defining wall 831r protruding from the winning ball front box 831. Is engaged with the lower concave portion 831s and the lower concave portion 832t formed in the position defining wall 832s protruding from the prize ball back box 832, the lever main body 834a protrudes to the lower side of the left surface. By maintaining the state in which the provided convex portion 834ab is in contact with the reinforcing rib 836c formed on the winning ball ball pulling lever 834, the side wall portion 836b of the hollowing piece 836 protrudes from the winning ball front box 831. A notch 831e formed in the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a to be cut and a notch 832e formed in the other bent passage wall 832a projected from the prize ball back box 832, respectively. With conditions that can be blocked are is maintained, the right side and a state in which contact with the Shodama partition plate 833 is maintained. In such a state, the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and / or the ball removing 836 by the weight of the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 Since it is not possible to swing relative to the support shaft 831 f protrudingly provided to the prize ball front box 831 and the support shaft 832 f projectingly provided to the prize ball back box 832, the ball removing piece 836 is operated to pull out the balls And the gaming balls passing through the flexing passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 can not be discharged to the ball pulling out passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the prize ball back box It will be in the state which can not discharge the game ball which passes along the bending passage 832b formed in 832 to the ball extraction passage 832d formed in the award ball back box 832.

  On the other hand, in the case of sliding the operation portion 834aa of the winning ball ball release lever 834 in the vertical direction, the position defining wall in which the convex portion 834ba protruding from the elastic piece 834b is provided protruding from the winning ball front box 831 The lower surface of the left side of the lever main body 834a is engaged with the upper recess 831s formed in 831r and the upper recess 832t formed in the position defining wall 832s protruding from the prize ball back box 832, respectively. The side wall portion 836b of the ball-extracting piece 836 is formed on the prize ball front box 831 by releasing the state in which the convex portion 834ab protruding to the left is in contact with the reinforcing rib 836c formed on the prize ball ball-extracting lever 834. A notch 831e formed on the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a provided in a projecting manner, and a notch 832e formed in the other bent passage wall 832a provided in the prize ball back box 832 for projecting Along with a state that can be closed respectively is released, the right side and a state in which contact with the Shodama partition plate 833 is released. In such a state, the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and / or the ball removing 836 by the weight of the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 Since the support shaft 831 f and the support shaft 832 f protruding from the prize ball back box 832 can be swung, the ball-extracting piece 836 can be punched out, and the prize ball front box 831 can be operated. The gaming ball passing through the formed bending passage 831b can be discharged to the ball removing passage 831d formed in the winning ball front box 831, and the game passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the winning ball back box 832 The ball can be discharged to the ball removal passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832. The gaming balls discharged from the ball removal passages 831d and 832d pass to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the ball discharge passages 865 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It is discharged and supplied to a ball lifter installed in a pachinko island facility (not shown).

[3-5. Prize ball gear cover]
Next, a gear group (made up of a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball middle gear 841, and a detection disc 842) provided on the surface area of the prize ball casing 831 while covering the front face of the prize ball casing 831. The prize ball gear cover 835 is formed in a rectangular box shape with a rear opening and is disposed on the front face of the prize ball front box 831 (a prize gear The gear partition wall 835d is directed from the bottom of the prize ball gear cover 835 to the prize ball front box 831 so that the electric wiring is not involved in the ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disc 842). As a result, the gear protection space 835 e is formed, and the space other than the gear protection space 835 e is formed as a wiring space 835 f for routing electric wiring. It is.

  A bearing tube 835a is inserted into the gear protection space 835e from the bottom of the prize ball gear cover 835 from the bottom of the prize ball gear cover 835 to the front face of the prize ball gear cover 835. A bearing sleeve 835b is provided protruding from the bottom surface of the award ball sprocket shaft 845 by inserting one end of the award ball sprocket shaft 845 described above below the bearing tube 835a from the bottom of the award ball gear cover 835. It projects toward the front of the 835. In addition, the prize ball case inner substrate 847 held in the gear protection space 835e by the substrate attachment portion 831ha (see FIG. 53A) formed in the substrate attachment accommodation space 831h of the prize ball front box 831 described above. A base plate mounting portion 835c which holds and supports the other end side of the second base member 713c protrudes from the bottom surface of the first base ball gear cover 835 toward the first base ball box 831.

  In the wiring space 835f, the prize ball casing 831 is passed through the wire opening 831o of the prize ball casing 831 established in the upper vicinity of the cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 839 on the bottom upper side and the bottom right of the gear protection space 835e. Wiring processing piece 835g which hangs and fixes the electric wiring to the dispensing motor 839 fixed by screwing with a screw not shown on the bottom side of the cover to the sump ball gear cover 835 protrudes from the bottom of the prize ball gear cover 835 toward the prize ball front box It is done.

  In addition to the electrical wiring to the payout motor 839 assembled by the wiring processing piece 835g, the electrical wiring to the counting switch attached to the back side of the prize ball front box 831 (the electrical wiring to the counting switch 838 is in the vicinity of the counting switch 838 The board attachment storage space 831 h of the prize ball table box 831 can be passed through the wiring opening 831 o of the prize ball table box 831 established in the above. The electrical connection from the wiring space 835f to the outside of the gear protection space 835e from the wiring space 835f (that is, the dispensing control of the dispensing device 830, the dispensing control shown in FIG. 4) The wiring cut-out portion 835h for passing through electrical wiring electrically connecting the dispensing control substrate 4110 accommodated in the substrate box 950 and the dispensing device 830 is a gear protection empty space. It is formed on the lower side of the right side wall of 835E.

  A through hole 831y is drilled in the prize ball front box 831 at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 832w provided with a plurality of protrusions on the prize ball back box 832 and a mounting hole at a position corresponding to the through hole 831y. 835i is drilled in the prize ball gear cover 835. By screwing the mounting hole 835i, the through hole 831y and the mounting boss 832w from the front surface of the winning ball gear cover 835 with a screw (not shown), the winning ball front box 831 and the winning ball middle partition plate 833 are obtained. The prize ball gear cover 835 and the prize ball back box 832 are integrally fixed in a holding state.

  Further, the award ball gear cover 835 can be detachably attached to the rear surface side of the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 provided with the dispensing device 830 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. A plurality of hook-shaped engaging portions 835k for attachment are provided in a protruding manner, and when the dispensing device 830 is pressed against the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 and slid upward, the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 extends vertically. A guide protrusion 835m to be inserted into a guide groove (not shown) to be formed is provided in a protruding manner. These hook-shaped engaging portions 835k are engaged with engaging projections (not shown) formed on the main body frame base 600, respectively, and the dispensing device 830 is pressed against the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 to move upward. By sliding and pushing up, the hook-shaped engaging portion 835k and the not-shown engaging projection are engaged with each other. Then, a pair of insertion pieces 832y formed on the upper end surface of the prize ball back box 832 are inserted into a pair of positioning recesses (not shown) formed on the lower end surface side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. At this time, the lock member 870 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 provided on the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 4 is pushed upward. Thus, the not-shown locking convex portion formed on the locking member 870 is inserted into the notched portion 832z formed on the lower wall of the prize ball back box 832, and the not-shown locking convex portion and the notched portion 832z are engaged Do. Thus, the dispensing device 830 can be fixed to the rear side of the dispensing unit base 801.

[3-6. Fixed position of sprocket]
Next, the home position of the sprocket 837 will be described. The rotation angle of the sprocket 837 is configured such that the detection notch 842b formed on the outer periphery of the detection disk 842 can be detected by the rotation angle switch 846 as described above. It is done. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 is transmitted to the payout control substrate 4110 housed in the payout control substrate box 950 shown in FIG. The rotational position of the sprocket 837 can be grasped based on the signal. When stopping the rotational position of the sprocket 837 at a fixed position, the payout control board 4110 determines the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 in advance when detecting the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the rotational angle switch 846. After being rotated by the rotation angle, the sprocket 837 is kept in the standby position at the fixed position by maintaining the stopped state.

  On the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, as described above, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831, three recesses 837a in which the game balls fit are formed equally at every 120 degrees. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 is formed by equally dividing three recesses 837b into which the game balls fit. And the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are mutually offset by 60 degrees. There is. At each rotation of the sprocket 837, it is possible to send the game balls received by the three recesses 837a and 837b up to six at the downstream side.

  When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a is rotated as described above, so that the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket of the detection disc 842 are rotated. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 via the gear 844. The payout motor 839 is a small stepping motor, and when the output shaft 839a is rotated by 15 steps, the sprocket 837 rotates 60 degrees to receive the game ball received in any one of the above-mentioned recesses 837a and 837b. When the output shaft 839a is rotated by 90 steps, the sprocket 837 rotates 360 degrees, that is, when it rotates one turn, all of the gaming balls received in the above-mentioned recesses 837a and 837b are moved downstream. It can be sent to the side.

  In the state where the sprocket 837 is stopped at the fixed position, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the ball sending space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831, at the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a. As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 is in a state of receiving the game balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 on a certain ridge line. Controlled by the payout control board 4110 so as to be in a state of receiving gaming balls passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. There is.

  In this embodiment, as the payout motor 839, the same one as a small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used. The small stepping motor is an extremely small one with a cylindrical main body having an outer diameter of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. With such a small stepping motor, the payout motor 839 has a very small static torque, so the game ball received in the recess 837a of the sprocket 837 passes through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831. The self-weight of the game ball and the self-weight of the following game ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the ball back box 832 with respect to the game ball received into the recess 837b of the sprocket 837, exceeds the stationary torque of the payout motor 839 The state in which the rotation stop 837 is stopped can not be maintained, and the sprocket 837 may be rotated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the fixed position of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831, the outer peripheral portion and the recess of the sprocket 837 shown in FIG. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, as shown in FIG. In the state shown in (b), the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is received on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. Is held in the fixed position, the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage 831 b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is that of the sprocket 837. When the sprocket 837 is viewed clockwise from the front side with respect to the ridgeline which is the boundary portion between the circumferential portion and the recess 837a, the load is applied in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 53A). While the weight of the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. On the other hand, when the sprocket 837 is viewed from the front side of the dispensing device 830, a load can be applied in a direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 53 (b)) to rotate counterclockwise. The load of the game ball by its own weight is well-balanced between the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a and the ridge which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. It can be given and balanced.

  As a result, even if the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor with extremely small static torque, is adopted by setting the sprocket 837 as a fixed position and keeping the load of the game ball by its own weight well balanced. , And the sprocket 837 can be kept stopped at the home position. In addition, when the sprocket 837 is stopped at the fixed position, the load of the game ball by its own weight is given in a well-balanced manner and is in a balanced state. The load on the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 can be prevented from becoming extremely large, so that step-out can be prevented, and the sprocket 837 can be smoothly rotated.

  Further, as described above, the load by the weight of the game ball on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a and the ridge which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. Because it is possible to be in a well-balanced state in which it is applied in a well-balanced manner, even if an earthquake occurs after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off after the game hall is closed, the sprocket The possibility of the rotational position shifting from the fixed position can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the same small stepping motor as provided for operating the various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used as the payout motor 839. Thus, by reducing the distance in the depth direction of the payout device 830, it is possible to ensure a large distance in the depth direction of the game board 5 at the position corresponding to the payout device 830. A large space in the depth direction on the rear surface of the game board 5 at the position can be secured, and a large movable body device having a plurality of electric drive sources can be arranged.

  For example, the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received and stopped in the recess 837a of the sprocket 837, and the prize ball back box 832 is formed in the recess 837b of the sprocket 837 If the gaming ball is not received through the bending passage 832b and is received by the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is received in the recess 837b of the sprocket 837 When the ball is received by the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, the weight of the subsequent game ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is the axial direction of the sprocket 837, that is, the prize ball sprocket shaft Applied as a load in the axial direction of the As the load to rotate the sprocket 837 is applied to the gaming ball received in the recess 837a of 837, the weight of the subsequent gaming ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the winning ball outer box 831 will be given, The load by the weight of the game ball is well-balanced between the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a and the ridge which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. There is a disadvantage that the fitted state breaks down, which is not preferable as the fixed position of the sprocket 837.

[3-7. Maintenance of dispensing device]
Next, maintenance of the payout device 830 will be described. The rotation degree of the gear group including the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball middle gear 841, and the detection disc 842 is confirmed, or the rotation degree of the sprocket 837 is confirmed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is drilled in the prize ball front box 831 from the front side (the front side of the prize ball front box 831) of the payout device 830. It can be inserted into one insertion hole 844 a of the prize ball sprocket gear 844 via the circular arc tool insertion long hole 831 zz and rotated along the circular arc tool insertion long hole 831 zz. As a result, it is possible to confirm that the rotation is not transmitted due to breakage of the teeth in any of the award ball motor gear 840, the award ball intermediate gear 841, and the award ball sprocket gear 844 and the bending passage 831b, If the game ball is not sent out from the prize ball passage 831c or 832c even though the detection disc 842 having the prize ball sprocket gear 844 is inserted by inserting the game ball in 832b, it is formed in the detection disc 842 It can also be confirmed that a failure has occurred in the engagement state between the joint portion 842a and the joint portion 837c formed on the sprocket 837.

  Further, when confirming the swinging state of the ball-extracting piece 836, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the operation portion 834aa of the winning ball ball-extracting lever 834 is slid upward and the ball-extracting piece 836 Curved after the tool such as a piano wire or wire is drilled from the back side (the back side of the prize ball back box 832) of the payout device 830 to the prize ball back box 832 after the By touching the side wall portion 836b of the ball removal piece 836 and the reinforcing rib 836c of the ball removal piece 836 through the tool insertion elongated hole 832zz, the ball removal piece 836 is swung by moving along the curved tool insertion elongated hole 832zz It can be done. This makes it possible to confirm that the ball-extracting piece 836 can not rock or can not rock smoothly due to, for example, cigarette dust or dust, and it is possible to repeat the piano wire or wire repeatedly. Such a state can be eliminated by moving the tool or the like along the curved tool insertion slot 832 zz.

[4. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 5 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view showing how the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 2 described above, and FIG. 56 is a front view showing a configuration example of the game board 5 shown in FIG.

  The game board 5 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112. The game board 5 further includes a frame-shaped front component 1110A and a plate-shaped game panel 1200. The front component 1110A is a game area of the game area 1100 where a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball” as a game medium; game medals in the case of a rotating game machine) are launched by the player operating the handle device 500. Define the inner circumference. On the other hand, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A to be disposed as the rear end of the game area 1100, thereby forming the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1200 includes a transparent panel plate and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown). The panel plate has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110A, and is formed smaller in outer shape than the front component 1110. On the other hand, the panel holder detachably holds the panel plate from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A.

  The front unit of the game board 5 is provided along an inner periphery of the lower left area of the gaming area 1100, and an attacker unit 2100 arranged to extend in the front view right direction from immediately above the out port at the lowermost part in the gaming area 1100. The front side unit, the gate unit 2300 disposed at a position slightly higher than the center in the vertical direction near the left end in the front view in the gaming area 1100, and the frame-shaped disposed in the approximate center of the gaming area 1100 The center character 2500, the movable decorative body 3250 provided inside the center character 2500, and various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals input from various decorative substrates of the game board 5 described later 7 segment display 18 which displays the decoration stop design which imitatively imitates the stop design of the special design which it mentions later using the so-called 7 segment indication on the basis of Lighting and blinking are performed while the special symbol is variably displayed based on various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals input from various decoration boards of the game board 5 to be described later. And repeating variation display lamps 1701, 1702, and 1703.

  Further, on the rear side of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 5, there is provided a peripheral control board box which accommodates a peripheral control board, which will be described later in detail.

  Furthermore, in the game board 5, the game area 1100 is divided roughly into right and left by the center character 2500 attached to the game panel 1200, and the outer periphery of the right side of the center character 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (inside of the front components 1110A The area between W and Z) is an area slightly wider than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the outer circumference of the left side of the center character 2500 and the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A) There is a wide area in which gaming balls can be circulated sufficiently. In the area on the left side of the center product 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the panel board in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  In the game board 5, when the game ball is fired to the right of the center character 2500, the game ball is distributed from the upstream side of the stopper of the front component 1110A by the distribution approach passage 2545 of the center character 2500. It is sent to the 2530 side. Further, this gaming ball is discharged from the discharge port after being distributed in either the left or right direction in the distribution space 2530 by the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550. Thereafter, the gaming ball is guided by the guide passage 2540 and discharged into the gaming area 1100 from the discharge opening opened on the upstream side of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. As described above, the game ball can receive the game ball with high probability through the sorting space 2530 and the large winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  In this game board 5, when the game ball is fired to the left side of the center character 2500, the game ball is guided in the direction of the gate unit 2300 and the front side unit by a plurality of implanted obstacle nails, It is discharged right above the first starting opening 2101 through the stage 2510 by entering the warp entrance 2504 at the gate portion 2301, general winning opening 2104, 2201, starting opening 2101, 2102, and winning opening 2103. It is possible to make it possible to enjoy the original game by the movement of the game ball.

  That is, in the route on the left side of the center character 2500, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball by bouncing the game ball with the obstacle nail, while in the route on the right side of the center character 2500 It is possible to distribute the game balls in the distribution space 2530 by minimizing the chance of contact, or to easily receive the game balls in the big winning opening 2103.

  The function display unit 1180 includes a display unit 1181 described later, and is provided, for example, in the lower part of the front component 1110 as a position where it can be viewed from the player side with the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 There is. The function display unit 1180 includes a game state indicator 1183, a first special symbol memory indicator 1184, a first special symbol indicator 1185, a second special symbol indicator 1186, a second special symbol memory indicator 1187, and a normal symbol memory indicator The container 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are respectively attached to the front surface of the function display substrate described later. The function display unit 1180 is provided with connection terminals for connecting the function display substrate and the main control substrate 4100.

  The display unit 1181 mentioned above is associated with the gaming state indicator 1183 (playing state display means) consisting of one LED for displaying the current gaming state, and the fact that the gaming ball has been accepted by the first starting opening 2101. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 for displaying the number of reservations and the lottery result (first special lottery result) of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol indicator 1185 including one 7-segment LED to be displayed as a symbol, and the second special symbol lottery result (second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 A second special symbol indicator 1186 including one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special symbol, and the number of reservations regarding the reception of the game ball to the second start opening 2102 A second special symbol memory indicator 1187 for Shimesuru, and a. In addition, the lottery performed with the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, unlike the general jackpot lottery, is a prerequisite for executing the jackpot game It is a lottery which determines whether or not to operate the condition device, and the expected value of the winning amount. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the player has won such a lottery, the condition device only operates, and the jackpot game mode is not immediately started with this.

  Further, the display unit 1181 is an ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of reservations accompanying the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301, and the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301. Normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying the result of the regular lottery drawn normally as a regular symbol, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "a big hit (a hit when the condition device operates) And a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 at the time of

  The game state indicator 1183 described above is provided with color LEDs capable of changing the light emission color such as red, green and orange, for example, and various game states are realized by the combination of the light emission color to be emitted and lighting or blinking. (For example, the probability fluctuation state, the time reduction state, the probability variation and the time reduction state (probability fluctuation state and time reduction state), the jackpot gaming state, and the like) are displayed.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 starts the variable display when the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 when the first special symbol can not be changed and displayed in the first special symbol display 1185. Is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol held (stored). The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on.・ Display the number of reservations by blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Display the number of reservations by blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b when the number of reservations is four Both are supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 Is displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and then stops, and the first special lottery result or the second special is determined by the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED The player is made to recognize the lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 includes red, green, orange, and color LEDs capable of changing its light emission color, and the game ball is the gate portion 2301 by the combination of the light emission color to be emitted and lighting or blinking. Display the result of the regular lottery that is executed along with the passing. The normal symbol display 1189 changes and displays the normal symbol over a predetermined variation time as in the special symbol, and then displays the stop symbol of the normal symbol in a mode corresponding to the result of the normal lottery.

  When the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol memory display 1188 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol whose start of the variable display is reserved (stored) Display the number of reservations (number of memories) of This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is provided with four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d having LEDs, and the ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d are sequentially turned on according to the number of reservations, thereby displaying the number of ordinary symbols being held. Do. In the present embodiment, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a 2 round indicator lamp, a 6 round indicator lamp (not shown), a 12 round indicator lamp (not shown), and a 16 round indicator lamp, and the jackpot game according to the lighting mode of the lamp Display the number of rounds in

[5. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, and FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic view of various detection signals that are inputted to and outputted from the game ball connection terminal board for relaying the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board and the CR unit and the frequency display board, 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 57 and a board connected thereto. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing an example of the peripheral configuration of a sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs such as a main control program for controlling the game operation and a ROM for storing various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data. Main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and driving various solenoids A main control solenoid drive circuit 4100 d and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e monitoring a sign of a power failure of a predetermined voltage or a momentary power failure state (hereinafter referred to as “instant power failure”) are mainly included. The main control program described above is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on.

  In addition to its built-in RAM (corresponding to the above-mentioned "main control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "the main control built-in ROM"), main control MPU 4100a is its A watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated. The main control built-in RAM mentioned above, as a part of its storage area, is a big hit determination random number storage area for each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area, which will be described later A storage area, random numbers 1 and 2 storage areas for variation patterns, a random number storage area for variation types, and a start storage information storage area and a transmission information storage area, which will be described later. Among these, the starting memory information storage area includes a first starting memory information storage area for a first special symbol and a second starting memory information storage area for a second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a big hit flag area capable of storing the value of the big hit flag described later. The big hit flag indicates not only whether it is lost (00H) or big hit (01H) but also small hit (02H), as described later. Therefore, if the main control MPU 4100a accesses one storage area of the big hit flag area without accessing the small hit flag area that can store the value of the small hit flag, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. It is also possible to grasp simultaneously whether it is a small hit.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can extract the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function without a reset terminal is not provided And consists of. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb has the information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  A first starting opening switch 3022 for detecting gaming balls entering the first starting opening 2101, a second starting opening switch 2109 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2102, and a general winning opening 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. In addition, a distribution detection sensor 2580, a gate switch 2301 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting gaming balls having entered the general winning opening 2201, a gaming ball in the special winning opening 2103 A detection signal from count switch 2110 for outputting a detection signal upon detection of acceptance and a detection signal from magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using a magnet are panel relay terminal boards 4161 attached to gaming board 5, and It is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100 a through the main control input circuit 4100 b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function The control signal is output from 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d through the panel relay terminal plate 4161, the start port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108A, the attacker solenoid 2108B and the distribution drive motor 2558 (see FIG. The panel relay from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca is performed by outputting the drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port or outputting the drive signal to the output terminal of the predetermined output port. First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, and ordinary symbol indicator through function board 4161 and function display substrate 1191 A drive signal is output to the normal symbol storage indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183, and the round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100 ca with reset function, the main control output with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first start opening switch 3022, the second start opening switch 2109, the gate switch 2301, and the count switch 2110. A contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and passes frequently through the gate portion 2350, so the first starting opening switch 3022, the second starting opening switch 2109, and Detection of gaming balls by the gate switch 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2301. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so the detection of the game ball by the count switch 2110 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch with a long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. The payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of pachinko gaming machine 1 from payout control board 4110 as serial data by main control input circuit 4100b, whereby the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control output with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) to that effect. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100 a is mainly configured of the main control CPU core 4100 aa, and in addition to the above-described main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100 ae or the like which is one of main control various serial I / O ports The circuit is connected via a bus 4100 ah (see FIG. 60). The main rotation serial transmission port 4100 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100 aea, a transmission buffer register 4100 aeb, and a serial management unit 4100 aec (see FIG. See 60). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main cycle serial data is started. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. The main control CPU core 4100aa sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 continuously by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting the plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb.

  Power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It describes.) It is equipped with BC0. Due to the capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 4100a stores various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is the operation signal (RAM clear) from the operation switch 952 when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power on. Signal) is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 4100a causes the main control built-in RAM to be completely Is to be erased (cleared).

[6. Disbursement control board]
Next, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 64. FIG. 58 is a block diagram of the payout control board, and FIG. 64 is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor of the payout device.

  In addition to the operation switch 952 having various functions shown in FIG. 4 and the error LED indicator 953 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. And a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to Here, the payout control unit 4110, various power supplies supplied to the payout control substrate 4110, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, the excitation method of the payout motor 839, the switching circuit of the drive voltage to the payout motor 839, power on and off The drive voltage to the payout motor 839 and the switching timing of the drive voltage to the payout motor 839 will be described.

[6-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 58, the payout control unit 4110 for performing various controls related to payout is a microprocessor including a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. And, a payout control input circuit 4110b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 4110c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., and the payout device 830 shown in FIG. CR for exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 and a CR unit (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and installed on the pachinko island facility of the game hall And a unit input / output circuit 4110 e. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 4110 a In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 4110 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 4110 b is a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC (hereinafter, referred to as “dispense control system reset IC”) which is a dedicated IC outputting a reset signal not shown is not inputted. Is configured as. That is, since the payout control input circuit 4110 b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset IC, the various signals based on the information are outputted variously It is configured as a circuit output from the terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4110 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 4110 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 4110 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 4110 cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset IC is not input. That is, based on the fact that the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset IC, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 4110 cb is based on the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal is output from its various output terminals.

  An out-of-ball switch 821 for detecting the presence or absence of a gaming ball in the two ball guiding passages formed in the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. 4, the award of the payout device 830 shown in FIGS. A detection signal from the counting switch 838 for detecting gaming balls flowing in the ball passages 831 c and 832 c is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110 a through the payout control input circuit 4110 b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 for detecting the detection notch 842b formed on the outer periphery of the detection disk 842 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. And, it is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a through the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from a main body frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2; Is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  Also, whether the inside of the full induction channel formed in the lower full ball path unit 860 shown in FIG. 4 guiding to the full tank receiving hole 528 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 16 is full with gaming balls A detection signal from a full tank switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is detected is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  The payout control MPU 4110a controls various processes related to payout from a main control board (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") for controlling the progress of the game contained in the main control board box provided on the game board 5. It receives at the input terminal of the serial input port via the payout control input circuit 4110b. When the payout control MPU 4110a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board as serial data, the payout control output circuit with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (invoice ACK signal) notifying that. By outputting to 4110ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4110ca to the main control board.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 4110cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby delivering the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4110 cb to the main control board. When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 4110 as serial data is completed, the main control substrate outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a through the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with the reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout with the reset function is performed. The control output circuit 4110ca outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, and the payout motor drive circuit 4110d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 839. The state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port By outputting a drive signal for displaying the error LED display 953 to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function, thereby outputting a drive signal from the reset control payout control output circuit 4110ca to the error LED display 953 or the like. .

  The error LED display 953 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 953 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board and the payout) Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the control board 4110, and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball out switch) Informing that there are no gaming balls in the two ball guiding passages formed in the ball guiding unit 920 based on the detection signal from 821), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846, it communicates with the bending passages 831b and 832b of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and (b) and the ball delivery space 831k and 832k. Sprockets at the entrance 37 and the game ball interlock in the vicinity of the entrance to notify that the sprocket 837 is difficult to rotate), and when the number “3” is displayed, it is a “counting switch error” (specifically, it is , And notify the counting switch 838 that there is a problem based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838, and if the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates “full” (specifically, from the full switch not shown) Based on the detection signal, it notifies that the inside of the full induction channel formed in the lower full ball path unit 860 guiding to the full tank receiving hole 528 of the door frame 3 is full of gaming balls), 7 " When it is displayed, it indicates that it is “CR not connected” (electrically connected anywhere from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit (not shown) installed on the pachinko island facility adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 Informing that the connection has been cut off, and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of gaming balls not yet paid out is predetermined) Reporting that it has reached

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc., to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and thereby the payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function. The number of balls and the like of the gaming balls actually paid out is output to an external terminal board (not shown) electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall through a resistance not shown.

  Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board to an external terminal board (not shown) electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall through a resistor (not shown). doing. The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in) and installed in the game hall via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls and the like of the game balls and various information (game information) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer. The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the hall computer Does not malfunction or break down, and it is abnormal in the main control board which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the payout control board 4110 which controls the payout and the like. A voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending button 331 of the lending ball operation unit 330 shown in FIG. 12 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 333 are adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and of the gaming hall. The input is made to a CR unit (not shown) installed on the Pachinko island facility. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of gaming balls to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted via the CR unit input / output circuit 4110e to a predetermined payout control MPU 4110a. It is designed to be input to the input port of the input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit 334 of the rental ball operation unit 330. This signal is input to the display unit 334. Further, a CR unit lamp (not shown) disposed in the vicinity of the display unit 334 emits light when supplied with a supply voltage from the CR unit.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 and the main control substrate is illustrated as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 and the main control substrate for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Capacitors are not provided. The capacitor for the payout control board 4110 enables the payout control MPU 4110a to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. In addition, a microprocessor mounted on the main control board by a capacitor for the main control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control MPU") incorporates various information in the main control MPU in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Can be stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power on, the operation signal is given via the payout control input circuit 4110 b to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 4110 a. The payout control MPU 4110a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 4110a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4110 cb without reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4110 cb without reset function to the main control board. When the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period after power-on, when the operation signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main output control MPU via the payout control board 4110, the main control The MPU determines that the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is a RAM clear signal for completely erasing, and triggered by this, the main control MPU is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. It has become.

6-2. Various power supplies supplied to the payout control board]
Next, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 4110 will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the power supply substrate 931 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 931a, a power factor improvement circuit 931b, a smoothing circuit 931c, and a power generation circuit 931d. AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 931a. The synchronous rectification circuit 931 a rectifies 24 AC (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 931 b. The power factor improvement circuit 931b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter referred to as "+37 V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 931 c. The smoothing circuit 931 c removes the supplied +37 V ripple to smooth +37 V and supplies it to the power supply generation circuit 931 d.

  The power supply generation circuit 931d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 931c to +37 V to +5 V DC (+5 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5 V"), +12 V DC (+12 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12 V"), and DC. Each +24 V (DC +24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) is created.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 931 d of the power source board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and of these three types of voltages, two types of voltages of +12 V and +24 V are It is supplied to the main control board provided on the game board 5 through the payout control board 4110. Also, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 931 d of the power source substrate 931 are peripheral control substrates provided in the game board 5 (the peripheral control substrates are based on commands from the main control substrate, It controls the progress of various effects), and is supplied to various substrates and the like provided on the door frame 3 side.

  The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is first supplied to the payout control filter circuit 951 a to remove noise. The +5 V from which the noise has been removed is supplied to a capacitor for the payout control substrate 4110 (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the payout control substrate 4110, a payout control MPU 4110a, a payout motor drive circuit It is also supplied to 4110 d and so on. The +12 V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is supplied not only to the payout control input circuit 4110 b but also to the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d and the like, and the main provided in the game board 5 via the payout control board 4110 It is supplied to the control board. The main control board included in the game board 5 is provided with a +5 V creation circuit (not shown). In this +5 V creation circuit, a power supply of +12 to +5 V supplied via the payout control board 4110 is created and a main control filter (not shown) Supply to the circuit. In this main control filter circuit, noise is removed from +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit. The +5 V from which the noise has been removed is supplied to the main control MPU and the like in addition to the main control substrate capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the main control substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the power of +5 V is supplied to each of the payout control board 4110 and the main control board included in the game board 5, the power of the power supply board 931 is dealt with the payout control board 4110. While the +5 V created by the creation circuit 931 d is supplied to the payout control MPU 4110 a and the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d via the payout control filter circuit 951 a, the main control board included in the game board 5 does not show +5 V. In the creation circuit, the power supply from +12 V to +5 V created by the power creation circuit 931 d of the power supply substrate 931 is created, and +5 V created on the main control substrate provided in the game board 5 is supplied to the main control MPU via the main control filter circuit. Power supply system.

6-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4110 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 48 will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4110 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4110da are generated by the +12 V power supply line to which the +12 V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931d of the power supply substrate 931 is supplied and by the power generation circuit 931d of the power substrate 931 A +5 V power supply line to which a +5 V DC power supply is supplied via the payout control filter circuit 951a is electrically connected, and +12 V and +5 V are respectively applied. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 4110ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da. It is supposed to be The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 4110da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 839. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 4110 da. While supplying to a terminal and a 10th terminal, it supplies to the payout motor 839. A detailed description of controlling switching between the case where +12 V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 and the case where +5 V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 will be described later.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. A payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 839. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4110ca via the resistors PR60 to PR63 of the drive ICPIC60. It is outputted to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing in each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 839, and causes the dispensing motor 839 to rotate. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted | blocked by this switching, counter electromotive force generate | occur | produces. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD60 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

6-4. Discharging Motor Excitation Method]
Next, an excitation method of the dispensing motor 839 of the dispensing device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the same small stepping motor provided for operating the various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used as the payout motor 839. The small stepping motor is an extremely small one with a cylindrical main body having an outer diameter of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. In the dispensing motor 839 which is such a small-sized stepping motor, the torque generated is extremely small when control is performed according to a one-phase excitation method in which the coils of the small-sized stepping motor can be excited one phase at a time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the drive motor and the stationary torque are generated by the discharge motor 839, the control by the two-phase excitation method can excite the coil of the discharge motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, two phases at a time. It was adopted. In this two-phase excitation method, the coils of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, can be excited by two phases, so the coils of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, are excited one phase at a time. Compared to the method, approximately twice the torque can be obtained.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing control of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, by a two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the driving torque and the stationary torque. ing.

6-5. Switching Circuit of Drive Voltage to Dispensing Motor]
Next, the switching circuit of the motor drive voltage of the dispensing motor 839 of the dispensing device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the same small stepping motor provided for operating the various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used as the payout motor 839. The small stepping motor is an extremely small one with a cylindrical main body having an outer diameter of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. With such a small stepping motor, the dispensing motor 839 is in a non-excitation state, that is, no voltage is applied to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 839 , The output shaft 839a can be rotated with extremely small torque (the output shaft 839a can be rotated every time one of the phases is rotated from the one phase to the next).

  As described above, the winning ball motor gear 840 is fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, and the rotation is achieved by the rotation of the winning ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a. , And is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 via the award ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disc 842. That is, when the dispensing motor 839 is in the non-excitation state, when the voltage is not applied to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 839 and the current does not flow, extremely small torque Thus, the output shaft 839a can be rotated. Therefore, for example, the weight of the plurality of gaming balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is loaded on the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837, and this load rotates the sprocket 837 in the direction To generate a torque, which causes the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to rotate. In order to prevent this, each phase (/ B-phase, B-phase, A-phase) of dispensing motor 839 in order to obtain a stationary torque of dispensing motor 839 even when output shaft 839a of dispensing motor 839 is not rotated. , / A phase) to flow a current.

  In order to obtain the stationary torque of the payout motor 839, it is necessary to always apply a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, the B phase and the A phase) to maintain a state in which current flows. An output shaft of the payout motor 839 although the output shaft 839a of the motor 839 is not rotated (in other words, although the player is not in the operation of paying out the gaming ball as a prize ball) Power is consumed as in the case of rotating 839a.

  Therefore, although it is possible to suppress the consumption of power if the motor drive voltage is always low (for example, +5 V), in this case, for example, the prize ball front box 831 is obtained by reducing the drive torque of the payout motor 839. The weight of the plurality of gaming balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in is applied to the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837, and this load acts in the direction to rotate the sprocket 837, thereby generating torque Since the driving torque of the payout motor 839 is lost, the sprocket 837 can not be rotated, and the payout motor 839 is out of step. On the other hand, when the motor drive voltage is always high (for example, +12 V), the drive torque of the dispensing motor 839 is increased, and the above-mentioned step-out does not occur (that is, in the example described above) Even when the weight of the plurality of gaming balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is applied to the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837, this load acts in the direction to rotate the sprocket 837 Although the drive torque of the payout motor 839 is superior to the torque generated thereby, the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor can be transmitted to the sprocket 837 and the sprocket 837 can be rotated smoothly. There is a problem that consumption can not be suppressed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a voltage switching circuit 4110 da is provided in the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d of the payout control board 4110, and the output shaft 839 a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for dispensing the gaming ball. Is controlled to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by setting the dispensing control MPU 4110 a to the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110 da. When obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the state of stopping the output shaft 839a of the motor, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. Control to supply +5 V as a drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 It has become the jar.

  As a result, when obtaining a stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, +5 V, which is extremely smaller than +12 V, is supplied to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage. This can contribute to the suppression of the consumption of power when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. In addition, the heat generation of the payout motor 839 can be suppressed to a small level, which can also contribute to preventing the temperature rise in the pachinko island facility.

6-6. Drive voltage to the dispensing motor at power on and power off]
Next, drive voltages to the payout motor 839 at power-on and power-off will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the gaming balls, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, It controls to supply + 12V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by setting it to HI) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, while it is stationary for maintaining the state that the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. When torque is to be obtained, control is performed to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by setting the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. .

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (in addition to turning on the pachinko gaming machine 1), the payout control MPU 4110a recovers power after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off due to a power failure, or pachinko gaming The power-on process, which is a payout control program, is performed on the power supply to the machine 1 including the restoration of power that is restored after the power is interrupted due to a momentary power failure. When the power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a first sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, and the voltage switching circuit 4110da Control to generate a stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. This is because, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, in a state where +12 V is supplied as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 without forcibly supplying +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, the payout motor 839 The power consumed by is extremely large. That is, in the main control board provided on the game board 5 supplied with +12 V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931 d of the power supply substrate 931, +5 V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from +12 V is +5 V Since it is created, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, in the state where +12 V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage, the power consumed by the payout motor 839 becomes extremely large and the voltage level of +12 V As a result, it becomes difficult for the main control board included in the game board 5 to create +5 V, which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU, from the +12 V by the +5 V creation circuit. Can prevent the main control MPU from becoming unable to start operation. To have.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the voltage may be unstable. Therefore, the power supply is switched on by supplying +5 V to which the low voltage is set as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. Even if +5 V becomes unstable at this time, the maximum allowable voltage that can be applied to the dispensing motor 839 is not exceeded. That is, it is also possible to prevent breakdown of the dispensing motor 839 due to unstable power supply at the time of power on.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a performs an initial setting process to the drive IC PIC 60. In this initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60, an initial value of the drive IC PIC 60 is set. Information to output a payout motor drive signal for applying a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase) in order to obtain a static torque of payout motor 839 as this initial value Are set in the internal register of the output port incorporated in the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a fixed position setting process of the sprocket 837 after performing a wait timer process of waiting until a predetermined time elapses until the power supply becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this home position setting process of the sprocket 837, it is determined whether or not the sprocket 837 is located at the home position described above. Specifically, based on the detection signal from rotation angle switch 846, payout control MPU 4110a is not in the state where sprocket 837 is positioned at the above-described fixed position when detection notch 842b is not detected. In order to switch from +5 V to +12 V as the motor drive voltage, the logic (for example, LOW to HI) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110 da. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a sets information for outputting a payout motor drive signal to rotate the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 in an internal register of an output port incorporated in the payout control MPU 4110a. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 rotates in accordance with the payout motor drive signal output from the output port. Then, when the payout control MPU 4110a detects the detection notch 842b, after rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 by a predetermined rotation angle, the payout motor drive signal is output to stop the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. Information to be output is set in an internal register of an output port incorporated in the payout control MPU 4110a. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped in accordance with the payout motor drive signal output from the output port. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI to LOW) of the voltage switching signal to switch it from +12 V to +5 V as the motor drive voltage and outputs the sprocket 837 to the fixed position by outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110 da. Keep waiting in Then, the payout control MPU 4110a is a payout control main process (process of receiving and analyzing a command from the main control board provided on the game board 5 every 2 ms, a process of setting a main operation related to game ball payout, error LED indicator A process of creating display data to 953 is repeated. Note that the payout control MPU 4110a determines that the sprocket 837 is in the above-described fixed position when the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846. The fixed position setting process of the sprocket 837 is ended as it is, and the payout control main process is repeated every 2 ms.

  At power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (in addition to the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, including the case where the power is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stop), the payout control MPU 4110a repeats every 2 ms A transition is made from the dispensing control main processing to be performed to the dispensing control power-off processing. In this payout control power-off process, logic of the voltage switching signal (in order to store various information related to payout as backup information in the payout control internal RAM and forcibly supply +5 V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839) For example, it is set to LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and control is performed to generate a stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. As described above, +5 V is also supplied to the payout control MPU 4110 a in addition to the voltage switching circuit 4110 da, so when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the drive system of the payout motor 839 and control of the payout control MPU 4110 a It is a mechanism that the system and the system go down at the same time. This is because when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the motor drive voltage +12 V is supplied to the payout motor 839 without forcibly supplying +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. The power consumed by is extremely large. That is, in the main control board provided on the game board 5 supplied with +12 V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931 d of the power supply substrate 931, +5 V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from +12 V is +5 V Since it is created, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, in the state where +12 V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage, the power consumed by the payout motor 839 becomes extremely large and the voltage level of +12 V As a result, the main control MPU performs processing when the main control power is shut off, which is one processing of the main control program, and operates before the main control built-in RAM finishes storing various information about the game. A mechanism that can prevent the main control MPU from becoming inoperable due to a sharp drop in the control voltage level. It has become.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 forcibly supplies +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. By outputting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off with respect to the control system of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 and the drive system of the payout motor 839. By supplying the same +5 V (that is, +5 V which is the operation control voltage is supplied to the control system of payout control MPU 4110a of payout control substrate 4110, and for the drive system of payout motor 839). Supply control board 4 by supplying +5 V as a motor drive voltage) And when the 10 control system that payout control MPU4110a of stops operating, a drive system that payout motor 839 is adapted to be able to match, and when to stop operating. As a result, with the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 grasping the rotational position of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shut off. That is, the payout motor 839 can be under the control of the payout control MPU 4110 a of the payout control board 4110 just before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 under the influence of the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

6-7. Switching timing of drive voltage to dispensing motor]
Next, the switching timing of the motor drive voltage of the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the gaming balls, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, It controls to supply + 12V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by setting it to HI) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, while it is stationary for maintaining the state that the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. When torque is to be obtained, control is performed to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by setting the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. .

  When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a is rotated as described above, so that the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket of the detection disc 842 are rotated. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 via the gear 844. On the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, as described above, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831, three recesses 837a in which the game balls fit are formed equally at every 120 degrees. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 is formed by equally dividing three recesses 837b into which the game balls fit. And the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are mutually offset by 60 degrees. There is. At each rotation of the sprocket 837, it is possible to send the game balls received by the three recesses 837a and 837b up to six at the downstream side.

  The game balls received by the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 are sent out to the prize ball passage 831c and detected by the count switch 838 as described above. Be done. The game balls received by the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are sent out to the prize ball passage 832c and detected by the count switch 838 as described above. Be done.

  The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to perform control to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, thereby outputting the payout motor 839 In the case where the shaft 839a is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837 and the gaming balls are dispensed, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to the sprocket 837 The game ball received in the recess 837a, 837b of the last is sent out to the prize ball passage 831c, 832c, and then the game ball sent out last is detected by the count switch 838 through the prize ball passage 831c, 832c. The required time (a preset time, for example, The output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 continues to be rotationally driven until the lapse of one hundred milliseconds, and when this time passes, the rotational driving of the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 is stopped and the dispensing motor 839 is stopped. Setting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal in order to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, for switching from HI to LOW) by stopping the output shaft 839a of By performing control to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by outputting to the switching circuit 4110da, a stationary torque is generated in the dispensing motor 839 and the state where the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 is stopped is maintained. doing.

  More specifically, for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 shown in FIG. 7, the ball launch device 680 shown in FIG. 7 causes the game ball to have a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 shown in FIG. Then, when the gaming ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the winning opening not shown, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 according to the accepted winning opening. . When a game ball is received at the start-up winning opening as a winning opening, progress of the game provided in the game board 5 with a command (a winning ball command) for paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 Is sent from the main control board (not shown) to control the payout control board 4110. The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 performs control to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by setting the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837, and the first game ball, the second game ball, and finally the third game ball are recessed one by one in the sprocket 837. After the game balls received in 837a, 837b are sent out to the prize ball passage 831c, 832c, it is necessary for the third game ball sent out last to be detected by the count switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c, 832c. While the time (a preset time, for example, several hundred milliseconds is set) elapses. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to be rotationally driven, and when this time passes, the rotational drive of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, and this causes a voltage In order to switch the logic of the switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW), the logic (for example, LOW) of this voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby +5 V as a motor drive voltage. By performing control to supply to the dispensing motor 839, a state in which a stationary torque is generated in the dispensing motor 839 and the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 is stopped is maintained.

  Further, as described above, when the rotation control position of the sprocket 837 is stopped at the fixed position, the discharge control MPU 4110a of the discharge control substrate 4110 detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846. After rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 by a predetermined rotation angle, the state in which the drive is stopped is maintained so that the sprocket 837 stands by at a fixed position. That is, when the payout control MPU 4110a detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 when the rotation position of the sprocket 837 is stopped at the fixed position, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is Although it is rotated by a defined rotation angle, this “predetermined rotation angle” is set to the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da as a motor driving voltage of +12 V Is the case where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837 by the control of supplying the payout motor 839 to the game ball, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. When driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, the The time required for the game ball sent last to be detected by the count switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831 c and 832 c after the game balls received in 837 a and 837 b are finally sent to the prize ball passages 831 c and 832 c The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to be rotationally driven until (the preset time, for example, several hundred milliseconds) elapses, and when this time passes, the payout motor The rotation angle of the sprocket 837 corresponds to the time until the rotational drive of the output shaft 839a of 839 is stopped and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control board box 950 of FIG. 4 which performs payout control by rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 839 of FIG. And a payout control board 4110 housed in the The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110 da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d of FIG. 64 and a power supply substrate 931 accommodated in the power supply substrate box 930 of FIG. 4. The voltage switching circuit 4110da stops the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, by stopping +12 V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor. It is possible to mutually switch between the voltage for maintenance and +5 V as a stop voltage whose voltage is lower than the drive voltage. The power supply substrate 931 can create +12 V as a driving voltage and +5 V as a stopping voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 can be operated by supplying +5 V as a stop voltage as an operation control voltage. The payout control board 4110 rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, to obtain a driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, and pays out +12 V as a driving voltage, which is a small motor. While outputting a voltage switching signal which is a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supplying to the motor 839, a stationary torque is obtained to maintain a state in which the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small motor is stopped. In this case, a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, can be output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply +5 V as the stopping voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. The payout control board 4110 can output a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to forcibly supply +5 V as the stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 when the power is shut off.

  Specifically, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 is the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI Control to supply +12 V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by setting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. When the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, +5 V is supplied as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. It is supposed to control. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 drives the motor when the power is shut off (in addition to the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, also when the power is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stop). In order to forcibly supply +5 V as the voltage to the payout motor 839, the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to stop the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 Control to generate a stationary torque for maintaining the

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the drive voltage is supplied by +12 V to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. While driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a motor, to obtain driving torque for paying out the game balls, and supplying +5 V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 as a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped.

  By the way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, when the control system of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 is first stopped with respect to the drive system of the payout motor 839, the payout motor 839 becomes the payout control board 4110. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 may rotate by being out of the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 controls the voltage switching circuit 4110da to forcibly supply +5 V to the payout motor 839 as the stop voltage as the motor drive voltage. By outputting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut for the control system of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 and the drive system of the payout motor 839. When the same +5 V is supplied at the same time (that is, +5 V which is the operation control voltage is supplied to the control system of payout control MPU 4110a of payout control board 4110, and the drive system of payout motor 839). Is supplied with +5 V as a stop voltage as a motor drive voltage. It By), the control system of the payout control MPU4110a payout control board 4110 when to stop operating, a drive system that payout motor 839 is adapted to be able to match, and when to stop operating. As a result, with the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 grasping the rotational position of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shut off. That is, the payout motor 839 can be under the control of the payout control MPU 4110 a of the payout control board 4110 just before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 under the influence of the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operation position is operated by a motor (for example, JP-A-2010-119670).

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, by providing a plurality of movable bodies in a game board, each movable body is operated to provide the player with powerful effects by the movable bodies. Therefore, in recent game machines, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body on the game board, and a small stepping motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board does not increase. The cost is reduced by unifying the stepping motors of the same type.

  In addition to the game board, for example, a payout device for paying out gaming balls is also provided with a payout motor. The payout motor is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted to the sprocket that pays out the gaming balls to the player as a winning ball, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means).

  If a small stepping motor is adopted as the payout motor, the output shaft of the small stepping motor can be rotated with an extremely small torque when no voltage is applied to the small stepping motor, so the game ball The load on the sprocket due to its own weight causes the output shaft of the small stepping motor to rotate. In order to prevent this, even when the output shaft of the small stepping motor is not rotating, in order to obtain the stationary torque of the small stepping motor, it is necessary to apply a voltage to the small stepping motor to flow current. is there.

  However, although it is possible to reduce the consumption of power if the voltage applied to the small stepping motor is low, the driving torque of the small stepping motor is reduced in this case. The load acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket, and the driving torque of the small stepping motor loses the torque generated thereby, so that the sprocket can not be rotated, while applying to the small stepping motor. Assuming that the voltage is high, the drive torque of the small payout motor is increased, and even if the load on the sprocket by the weight of the game ball acts in the direction to rotate the sprocket, the torque generated by this causes a small stepping motor. Compact because the driving torque of Although rotation of the output shaft of the stepping motor can be transmitted to the sprocket and the sprocket can be rotated, power consumption can not be reduced with this, and it is extremely difficult to adopt a small stepping motor as a payout motor. there were.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is made in view of such a situation, and the purpose of the embodiment is that a small stepping motor can be adopted as a dispensing motor.

  Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control is performed by the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 839 of FIG. 48, which is a small stepping motor that dispenses game balls. A payout control substrate 4110 housed in the fourth payout control substrate box 950 is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d of FIG. The voltage switching circuit 4110da stops the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, +12 V as a driving voltage for driving the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor. It is possible to mutually switch between +5 V as a stopping voltage which is a voltage for maintaining the state and whose voltage is lower than the driving voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 is a small stepping motor with +12 V as a driving voltage when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the gaming balls. In order to supply a given dispensing motor 839 to a voltage switching circuit 4110da, a control signal is output as a control signal, and a control by a two-phase excitation system in which the coil of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is excited by two phases On the other hand, to obtain the stationary torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is stopped, +5 V as a stopping voltage to the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor The voltage switching circuit 4110da is a control signal to supply voltage. Outputs a signal, and performs the control by 2-phase excitation method for exciting the coil of the dispensing motor 839 is a small stepping motor by two phases.

  Specifically, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain the driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 4110a is set to the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. While controlling to supply +12 V as a motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by outputting to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the control by the two-phase excitation method of exciting the coil of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor by two phases On the other hand, when obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, the payout control MPU 4110a is set to the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and the voltage switching circuit 4110da Control to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by outputting Moni, and performs the control by 2-phase excitation mode to excite the coil of the dispensing motor 839 is a small stepping motor by two phases.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, +12 V is supplied as the driving voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor. The output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, can be rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for dispensing the gaming balls, and +5 V as a stopping voltage to the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor By supplying the torque, it is possible to obtain a stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, is stopped. Then, by supplying +12 V as a drive voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor, the output torque 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is rotationally driven to drive the game ball out. And to provide the stopping torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is stopped by supplying +5 V as a stopping voltage to the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor. Even in the case of obtaining a small stepping motor, for example, the small stepping motor can be controlled by controlling the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor by a two-phase excitation method of exciting the coils of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor. Of the dispensing motor 839 Compared with one-phase excitation mode that excites the Le one phase, since it is possible to increase the torque payout motor 839 is a small stepping motor generates, it is possible to increase the driving torque and the static torque.

  This can contribute to increasing the drive torque by controlling the dispensing motor 839 which is a small stepping motor by the two-phase excitation method. For example, a prize ball shown in FIG. 53 (a) can be used. The load of the plurality of gaming balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the front box 831 is loaded on the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837, and this load is rotated by the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. Even if it works in the direction of rotation opposite to the direction of rotation, the drive torque of the payout motor 839 is superior to the torque generated by this, so the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor is transmitted to the sprocket 837 and the sprocket 837 It can be rotated smoothly. Then, by controlling the payout motor 839 which is a small-sized stepping motor by the two-phase excitation method, it can contribute to increasing the stationary torque, so, for example, a prize ball table shown in FIG. 53 (a) The self weight of the plurality of gaming balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the box 831 is applied to the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837 so that the load works in the direction to rotate the sprocket 837. Since the stationary torque of the payout motor 839 is equal to the torque which is output, it is possible to maintain the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor is stopped and to maintain the state in which the sprocket 837 is stopped. Therefore, a small stepping motor can be employed as the dispensing motor 839. In addition, the adoption of the same type of small stepping motor for operating the movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 839 can also contribute to suppressing the cost of the gaming machine.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operation position is operated by a motor (for example, JP-A-2010-119670).

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, by providing a plurality of movable bodies in a game board, each movable body is operated to provide the player with powerful effects by the movable bodies. For this reason, in a recent game machine, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body on the game board, and a small motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board does not increase. The cost is reduced by unifying the motors into the same type.

  In addition to the game board, for example, a payout device for paying out gaming balls is also provided with a payout motor. The payout motor is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted to the sprocket that pays out the gaming balls to the player as a winning ball, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means).

  When a small motor is employed as the payout motor, the output shaft of the small motor can be rotated with extremely small torque when no voltage is applied to the small motor. The load on the sprocket causes the output shaft of the small motor to rotate. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to apply a voltage to the small motor to flow a current to obtain a stationary torque of the small motor even when the output shaft of the small motor is not rotated.

  However, although it is possible to reduce power consumption if the voltage applied to the small motor is low, this reduces the driving torque of the small motor and thus the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the gaming ball is reduced. The drive torque of the small motor loses the torque generated by working in the direction of rotating the sprocket, so that the sprocket can not be rotated. On the other hand, a high voltage is applied to the small motor. Then, even if the load on the sprocket due to its own weight acts on the sprocket to rotate the sprocket due to the increase in the drive torque of the small payout motor, the drive torque of the small motor is superior to the torque generated thereby Therefore, the rotation of the output shaft of a small motor is transmitted to the sprocket to Although it is possible to rotate, which in becomes impossible to suppress the power consumption, it is extremely difficult to adopt a small motor as payout motor.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is made in view of such a situation, and the purpose is to be able to adopt a small motor as a dispensing motor.

  Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control is performed by the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 839 of FIG. A payout control board 4110 housed in the payout control board box 950 of FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a count switch 838 in FIG. 48 and a voltage switching circuit 4110 da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d in FIG. The counting switch 838 can detect the game balls paid out by rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. The voltage switching circuit 4110da stops the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, by stopping +12 V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor. It is possible to mutually switch between the voltage for maintenance and +5 V as a stop voltage whose voltage is lower than the drive voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, to obtain a driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, and pays out +12 V as a driving voltage, which is a small motor. While outputting a voltage switching signal which is a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supplying to the motor 839, a stationary torque is obtained to maintain a state where the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small motor is stopped. In this case, a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply +5 V as the stopping voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor.

  Specifically, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain the driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 4110a is set to the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. When controlling the supply of +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by outputting to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, while obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 is stopped The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby performing control to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839.

  Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110 da to supply +12 V as a driving voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor and outputs the output shaft 839 a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. When the game ball is being dispensed by rotating and driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is rotationally driven. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, continues to rotate until the time taken for the detection of the game ball paid out last time by the count switch 838 elapses, and when this time passes, it is triggered by this Outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to change the driving voltage from +12 V to the stopping voltage Switch to Bruno + 5V and supplies to the dispensing motor 839 is a small motor.

  Specifically, the payout control MPU 4110a performs control to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by setting the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. In the case where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837 and the gaming balls are paid out, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated. After the game balls driven and received in the concave portions 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837 are finally sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c (for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 shown in FIG. According to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 by the ball launcher 680 shown The game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 shown in Fig. 7 by the strength, and is accepted when the game ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the winning opening not shown. In accordance with the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the payout device 830. When the gaming balls are received in the start winning opening as the winning opening, only three balls of the gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. A command (a prize ball command) for paying out to the upper plate 201 by 830 is transmitted from the main control board (not shown) for controlling the progress of the game provided on the game board 5 to the payout control board 4110. Payout control of the payout control board 4110 The MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. By rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to rotate the sprocket 837, the first game ball, the second game ball, and finally the third game ball one ball at a time After sending out the game balls received in the concave portions 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837 to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c), and finally sending out the game balls sent out in this example (in the above example, only 3 balls are paid out as game balls) The time it takes for the game ball sent out last to be detected by the count switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c (the time set in advance, for example, The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to be rotationally driven until the lapse of one hundred milliseconds, and when this time passes, the output of the payout motor 839 In order to stop the rotational drive of the shaft 839a and stop the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 and to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal triggered by this (for example, to switch from HI to LOW), this voltage switching signal Control (for example, LOW) is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839, thereby generating a stationary torque in the dispensing motor 839 to dispense the dispensing motor. The state in which the output shaft 839a of 839 is stopped is maintained.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the drive voltage is supplied by +12 V to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. While driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a motor, to obtain driving torque for paying out the game balls, and supplying +5 V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 as a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped. Then, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to voltage switching circuit 4110da, and +12 V is supplied as driving voltage to dispensing motor 839 which is a small motor, and the dispensing motor is a small motor. In the case where the output shaft 839a of 839 is rotationally driven to pay out the game ball, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor Continues to rotationally drive the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, until the time required for the counting switch 838 to elapse is detected until the gaming ball that has finally been dispensed is rotationally driven. In response to this, the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. As the dynamic voltage from + 12V to switch to + 5V as a stop voltage and supplies to the dispensing motor 839 is a small motor. Therefore, a small motor can be employed as the dispensing motor 839. In addition, the adoption of the same type of small motor for operating the movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 839 can also contribute to suppressing the cost of the gaming machine.

  Further, specifically explaining, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control is performed by the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 839 of FIG. A payout control substrate 4110 housed in the payout control substrate box 950 of FIG. 4 is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d of FIG. The voltage switching circuit 4110da stops the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 as the small motor and +12 V as a driving voltage for driving the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 as the small motor. Can be switched mutually between +5 V as a stopping voltage which is lower than the driving voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, to obtain a driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, and pays out +12 V as a driving voltage, which is a small motor. While outputting a voltage switching signal which is a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supplying to the motor 839, a stationary torque is obtained to maintain a state where the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 which is a small motor is stopped. In this case, a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply +5 V as the stopping voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor.

  Specifically, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain the driving torque for paying out the gaming balls, the payout control MPU 4110a is set to the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. When controlling the supply of +12 V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by outputting to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, while obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 is stopped The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby performing control to supply +5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the drive voltage is supplied by +12 V to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. While driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a motor, to obtain driving torque for paying out the game balls, and supplying +5 V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 as a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped. Therefore, a small motor can be employed as the dispensing motor 839. In addition, the adoption of the same type of small motor for operating the movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 839 can also contribute to suppressing the cost of the gaming machine.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operation position is operated by a motor (for example, JP-A-2010-119670).

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, by providing a plurality of movable bodies in a game board, each movable body is operated to provide the player with powerful effects by the movable bodies. For this reason, in a recent game machine, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body on the game board, and a small motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board does not increase. The cost is reduced by unifying the motors into the same type.

  In addition to the game board, for example, a payout device for paying out gaming balls is also provided with a payout motor. The payout motor is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted to the sprocket that pays out the gaming balls to the player as a winning ball, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means). In a state where control to stop the rotation of the sprocket is being performed by the payout control board (payout control means), a load due to the weight of the gaming ball is imparted to the sprocket by connecting the succeeding gaming ball to the gaming ball received by the sprocket. State will be maintained.

  However, when a small motor is adopted as the payout motor, the stationary torque of the small motor is extremely small, so even if the control to stop the rotation of the sprocket is being performed by the payout control board (the payout control means) When the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the ball exceeds the stationary torque of the small motor, the sprocket may rotate due to the load on the weight of the game ball. For this reason, conventionally, in a gaming machine, it has been necessary to adopt a large motor having a large static torque as a payout motor, and it has been extremely difficult to adopt a small motor.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is made in view of such a situation, and the purpose is to be able to adopt a small motor as a dispensing motor.

  Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control board box 950 of FIG. 4 is used to perform payout control of the payout device 830 of FIG. A payout control board 4110 is provided. The dispensing device 830 includes a bending passage 831b forming a ball passage by a pair of bending passage walls 831a of FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b) as a ball passage formed forward, and a ball passage formed rearward. A pair of bending passage walls 832a shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) form bending passages 832b that constitute ball passages, and are configured in two lines that can pay out game balls passing respectively.

  The dispensing device 830 includes at least a dispensing motor 839 of FIG. 48, which is a small motor, and a sprocket 837 of FIG. The payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is an electric drive source, and the sprocket 837 is capable of transmitting rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, to be rotated.

  In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, one game ball passing through a bending passage 831b constituting a ball passage is received by a pair of bending passage walls 831a of FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b) as a ball passage formed forward. The game ball passes through a flexing passage 832b which constitutes a ball passage by a pair of flexing passage walls 832a of FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) as a ball passage provided with a predetermined number of front recesses which can There are a fixed number of back recesses that can receive one ball.

  Specifically, a sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed in a ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831. On the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three recesses 837a in which the game balls fit are formed equally at every 120 degrees. In addition, a ball delivery space 832k is also formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. Also in this ball delivery space 832k, the sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three recesses 837b in which the game balls fit are formed equally by every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 are ball delivery spaces 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. Are disposed on the front side of the three recesses 837 b of the sprocket 837 disposed in Also, three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and three sprockets 837 disposed in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 The concave portions 837b are disposed so as to be displaced by 60 degrees from each other.

  In a state in which the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, is stop-controlled by the dispensing control substrate 4110, a ball passage shown in FIG. 51 (a) is formed on the ridge line which is the boundary between the sprocket 837 and the front recess. And (b) by holding the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 831b constituting the ball passage by the pair of bending passage walls 831a, the weight of the gaming ball is loaded on the sprocket 837 in one rotation direction. The ball passage is constituted by a pair of bent passage walls 832a of FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) as a ball passage formed on the ridge line which is a boundary portion between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the rear recess. By receiving the game ball passing through the bending passage 832b, the weight of the game ball is directed to the sprocket 837 in the direction opposite to the one rotation direction. That is adapted to be loaded into the other direction of rotation.

  Specifically, in the state where the sprocket 837 is stopped at the fixed position, the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 as shown in FIG. 53 (a). In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, as shown in FIG. 53 (see FIG. 53), the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received As shown in b), the payout control board is set to be in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 It is controlled by 4110. Thus, the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a shown in FIG. 53 (a). In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, the prize ball back box 832 is formed on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b shown in FIG. In the state where the sprocket 837 is maintained at the fixed position by receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b, the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is the sprocket The sprocket 837 is viewed clockwise with respect to the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer periphery of 837 and the recess 837a, viewed from the front side of the dispensing device 830. While the load can be applied in the direction of rolling (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 53A), the weight of the gaming ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is The sprocket 837 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front side with respect to the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b (clockwise in FIG. 53 (b) Direction) can be applied.

  As described above, when the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped by the dispensing control substrate 4110, it is formed forward on the ridgeline that is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a as the front recess. The game ball's own weight is set by the sprocket 837 by receiving the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b constituting the ball passage by the pair of bending passage walls 831a of FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b) as the ball passage. While being loaded in the direction of rotation (the direction in which the dispensing device 830 is viewed clockwise from the front side and is rotated clockwise), along the ridgeline that is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b as the rear recess. A flex passage 8 comprising a sphere passage by a pair of flex passage walls 832a of FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) as a ball passage formed in the By setting the game ball passing through 2b to receive the game ball, the other weight of the game ball is opposite to the rotation direction of the sprocket 837 (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side) It is loaded in a rotational direction (a direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front side). Thereby, the sprocket 837 is loaded in one rotation direction (direction to rotate the payout device 830 clockwise as viewed from the front side) by the weight of the gaming ball, and the one rotation direction (the payout device 830). By being loaded in the other rotation direction (the direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front side) opposite to the direction rotating clockwise as viewed from the front side, Since rotation in the rotational direction can cancel each other out, even if a small motor having a very small static torque as compared to the static torque of a large motor is adopted as the payout motor 839, the payout control In the state where the dispensing motor 839 is stop-controlled by the substrate 4110, the state in which the sprocket 837 is stopped can be maintained. Therefore, a small motor can be employed as the dispensing motor 839. Further, by adopting the same kind of small motor as the small size motor for operating the movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 839, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the embodiment described above, the payout control MPU 4110a controls the voltage switching circuit 4110a and the drive ICPIC 60 included in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d shown in FIG. 64, and the payout motor is a small motor (small stepping motor). Although the control for generating the driving torque and the stationary torque of 839 was performed, such a circuit and control should be applied to a small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5 Can.

[7. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral control board 4140 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, while the peripheral control unit 4150 performs detection control of the touch state of the touch panel 246, and the game board side liquid crystal While performing drawing control of the display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) holds a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 on which a sound source built-in VDP 4160 a is mounted and calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour, minute, and seconds. ) The speaker housed in the control unit 4165 and the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 It includes a et flowing music and sound effects and the like volume control volume 4140a adjusted by the knob portion of the rotating operation volume (first volume control means), a. The peripheral control unit 4150 and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 may be separate units as shown, or may be integrated. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 can be substituted for the liquid crystal built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 or vice versa.

7-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at the time of power on, and also after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub control programs that are executed and controls rendering operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining the screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, emission of various LEDs, etc.) inherited across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal is input Manage schedule data, etc. that define aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c storing various information (eg, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state), information for managing a special effect flag, etc. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the backup power is supplied by a large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 851. As a result, the stored content is held for about 50 hours. When the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 by providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate 851, the backup control power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d has stored contents You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is out of control, and when this timer is tie mapped, hardware reset is performed. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period of time (until the timer performs tie mapping), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it does not reset.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 5 based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 serial for motor drive boards It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric -Side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to specific drive sources from frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 The door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5 or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 via It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the operation unit 400 and a pressure detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 The detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, frame It is input to the operation unit detecting serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 4150e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

7-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, peripheral control MPU 4150a has peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It comprises an / O port 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac via the internal bus 4150 ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae and WDT 4150 af Various data are read / written to / from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 4150ag and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, and WDT 4150 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 4150 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 4150 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150 b, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad and external bus 4150 h are used for storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150 b, peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150 ad and the peripheral bus 4150 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control. Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae are serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control, and if this timer is tie mapped, it is reset by hardware It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a predetermined period (until the timer performs tie mapping). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 4150 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Output a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the movable body detection data from the game board serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for motor drive board of peripheral control MPU 4150a, or the upper decoration in the door frame 5 It outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the unit 280. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and when the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a is turned, the resistance value is changed, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob portion The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) so as to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 Music and sound effects are made to flow from the provided speakers. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5 by sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or injustice against the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents related to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be rendered more powerful, or it may be notified that the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state, or the like. Notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are for adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is configured to flow without depending at all, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source described later) by the program. To adjust to your. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even if the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 4 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers provided in the frame 5 is reduced, a large volume is generated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or the player is cheating (this embodiment Then, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a failure or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to produce the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as more powerful or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

7-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150 b includes various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, etc., various data, various control data, various schedule data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter (Prescribed individual information) is stored in advance (effect control storage unit). Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. It is done. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers are specified for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, but they may be copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 4150b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 4150c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150 b is used to correct the luminance of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type. Acquires the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, current date, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM which is built in the RTC control unit 4165 described later and receives power backup also at power failure. Then, the acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. The brightness setting information is, as will be described later, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 being set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance is 85% which is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and lighted.

7-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 61, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. Management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc for exclusive storage of copied various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and peripheral control ROM 4150b The various control program copy area 4150 cd, which exclusively stores the copied various control programs, and the various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b A control data copy area 4150ce that stores the copied data for exclusive use, and a backup non-management target that stores only the information that is not the backup target among the various information updated by the execution of the control program A work area 4150 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged object work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb, and backup second area 4150cc, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the main control board 4100 (power on The power-on command (see FIG. 69) output by the command output means instructs the RAM clear effect start and respective state effect start (for example, in FIG. 57 within a predetermined period from the time of power on). It also instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 952 shown is operated. In is) sometimes cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150 ca is various information that is updated in peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input. Bank0 (1fr), which exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs It consists of Bank 0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following 0 means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 4150 cb to backup second area 4 150 cc to be described later are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when “(1fr)” outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 as described later, the peripheral control MPU 4150a The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that it is ready to accept the screen data from V. Therefore, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). “(1 ms)” is, as will be described later, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, etc., since peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed whenever And “Bank 4” respectively (The same applies to effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab, a reception command storage area 4150 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150 cae Etc. are provided. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa has game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 It is a storage area to be set, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for output is set, and reception command storage area 4150 cac receives various commands transmitted from main control board 4100 and various received commands are set. It is a storage area, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad is the RTC control unit 4165 (the RTC of the RTC 41654 a described later). The schedule data storage area 4150 cae is a storage area in which various information acquired from the stored RAM 4165 aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is based on the command received from (the main control MPU 4100 a) of the main control board 4100. It is a storage area in which schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b to various control data copy areas 4150 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms), frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, and history information A storage area 4150 caj and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is set The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is a game board for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. In the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5 is set. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai is a rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400, and operation history information of pressing operation unit 405) Etc.) is a storage area to be set. On the other hand, in the history information storage area 4150 caj, an operation history storage area is formed in addition to a display history storage area to be described later. In the operation history storage area, information relating to “a defined handwriting” is stored in advance as an example of a defined contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (effect control storage means). The information related to the prescribed handwriting includes, for example, information on at least one of a change in thickness and a change in drawing speed, which is a straight line or a curve and is accompanied by an increase or decrease in writing pressure during drawing.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED, and the transmission data storage area 4150caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1 ms). The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. The door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage region 4150 cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf are opened on the door side. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 4150 cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the processing is advanced based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc will be described, which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 ca. In the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and to be stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is operated to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, backup 1st area 4150cb manages Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) as one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 4150 cc, Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) form one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) form one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The data is copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 cb has a total of two pairs of the Bank 1 (1 fr) and the Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair and the Bank 1 (1 ms) and the Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 4150cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the first backup area 4150 cb and the second backup area 4150 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 4150 cb and backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

7-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a includes a backup management target work area 4150 da for exclusive storage of information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 4150 db and a second backup area 4150 dc are provided, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The content stored in peripheral control SRAM 4150 d is a power on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 69) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure). RAM clear effect start and each state effect start are instructed (for example, the start of effect when the operation switch 952 shown in FIG. 57 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on or Not even zero clear). This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state etc.) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150 c are not displayed at all, and can not be cleared in the setting mode, while they can be cleared. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150 da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following 0 means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 4150 db to backup second area 4 150 dc described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” And “Bank 4” respectively (the same applies to the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later).

  Next, a backup first area 4150 db and a backup second area 4150 dc will be described, which exclusively stores the copy of effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 4150 dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of the page is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and a backup second area An area 4150 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the head and the end of each page, that is, at the head and the end of the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc.

7-2. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control Unit]
Speakers provided in the speaker box 920 provided on the main unit frame 4 and drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 and sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers provided on the door frame 5 A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs control has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in sound source") for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"). A sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 4160a for performing drawing control of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, a display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 Various character data (or sprite data with a sprite number) as display content to be displayed in the second display area (second display area) Liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b (rendering control storage means) for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 And an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmitting data.

  Furthermore, in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-like display (annular display) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or image described later, and display of an operation menu background image described later Operation menu background image data used for display, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later In addition to the sound volume setting icon image data and the like used for displaying the main body frame rear side image data and service mode screen used for displaying the main body frame rear side image 740C from which the position of each part on the rear side of the main body frame 4 can be seen To display the service mode screen image data used to display the break timer setting screen Break timer setting screen image data are, and, rest the screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160 b is used not only for the indication display object image data used for displaying the indication display object described later for prompting the user to operate the display button displayed on the display area of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 470, The touch prompt display object data used to display the touch prompt display object to be described later displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 470 to urge the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) to touch the operation surface is stored (data storage means).

  Furthermore, the display size of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b is changed to the display area (first display area) of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area (second display area) of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. The size conversion image data used to display each common image is stored beforehand (effect control storage means).

  In peripheral control unit 4150, peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, it is set to 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The next screen data following the top screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later after being output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4150a starts the sound command data of the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. The sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and extracted in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c is extracted with the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is recorded in response to the V blank signal being input. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150 ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150 c Output to the built-in VDP4160a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives the V blank signal as the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

7-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) is provided with a built-in RAM capable of temporarily storing data, in addition to the above-described built-in sound source. As a part of such a built-in RAM, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is provided with a material image RAM capable of temporarily storing material image data such as sprite data and repeatedly overwriting many material image data.

  Further, when the screen data included in the screen generation schedule data is input from peripheral control MPU 4150a as part of such an internal RAM, sound source built-in VDP 4160a is shown in FIG. 62 based on the input screen data. As described above, the game board side character data and the upper dish side character data are extracted from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, respectively, and the game board side sprite data and the upper dish side sprite data (hereinafter simply referred to as "sprite data") are created While storing the drawing data of one screen (one frame) generated to be displayed on the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, one screen portion (1 frame) for image processing is further stored. VRAM for storing the drawing data of the It described as ".). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 among the drawing data generated on (the frame buffer of the built in VRAM) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and By outputting image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2 to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, synchronization between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is achieved. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 (one frame (one frame) Of the drawing data, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 among the generated drawing data is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper dish side liquid crystal The image data for the display 244 is from the channel CH2 to the upper side And outputs it to the crystal display device 244. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is a built-in VRAM for drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. It is the data to generate above. In the following description, extracting (reading) character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160 b and creating sprite data is also abbreviated as “reading out sprite data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160 b”.

  Further, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is from When output to the plate side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later in response to the input of the V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Also, in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer is output to the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. In the present embodiment, a so-called double buffer method is adopted.

  In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 62, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b or By extracting sound data such as sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and output used according to the output channel number A channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from a speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and a speaker provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, the sound data of the notification sound for notifying the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated to adjust the Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as a sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is shifted to a setting mode to be described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and adjusted.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of output sound sources in the built-in sound source Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is Actually, it amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and amplifies the amplified effect sound as audio data as audio data The data transmission IC 4160 c is designed to output the data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the speaker volume 920 provided on the main body frame 4 is amplified by amplifying to the master volume value. It is set so that the volume which flows from the speaker accommodated in and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 may turn into an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjusting volume 4140a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually provided to the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 4 It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker provided and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, serializes this amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c for the notification sound. Adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated into the used track and the volume of the notification incorporated into the used track It does not depend on the volume adjustment at all based on the turning operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub volume value to be combined, and the maximum volume is synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually the main body It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and amplifies the amplified alarm sound into audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data. Output.

  Here, when the effect sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraud on the pachinko gaming machine 1 A brief explanation will be given of the control for sending an alarm sound to inform store clerks in a hall of actions, etc. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this effect sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this synthesis is performed. The volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually from the speakers provided in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5 Amplified to a master volume value as a sound volume, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in serialized audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data.

  That is, in fact, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows as the sound flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the effect sound is the above-mentioned schedule for sound generation Progress according to the data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and the predetermined time When it has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute so far is adjusted as the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is turned and controlled. The value is set again (in this case, when it is shifted to the setting mode and operated by operating the display button, it is set to the subvolume value of the adjusted effect sound), and provided in the main body frame 4 It flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

  As described above, when the effect sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the generation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 920 in which the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the main body frame 4 when the notification sound flows in order to notify the store clerk of the hall of fraudulent activity Since the effect sound that has become muffled although it flows from the speaker proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation, the speaker and door housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 after the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period When the speaker provided in the frame 5 does not flow, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

7-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound ROM]
As shown in FIG. 62, the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b is for drawing on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper tray character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits it to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160 c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 into one left audio data, even if the negative signal is affected by noise, Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 60, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds, is mainly configured with an RTC 4165a. In the RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa (time-keeping storage unit) in which calendar information and time information are stored is built in (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply (second power supply) of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, the RTC 4165a updates and holds calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b. Battery 4165b supplies power (second power) in response to reception of a power failure notification signal described later, separately from the main power supply (first power) for supplying power (first power). The supply of power (second power) may be stopped upon the start of supply of power from the main power supply, and in such a power supply configuration, the RTC 4165a may be a main power supply or a battery 4165b. Power is supplied from

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Based on the above, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 can be used to create effects. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a screen on which a Christmas tree or reindeer appears is unfolded by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. And the like. The screen for executing the countdown to receive the message may be expanded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment. Although details will be described later in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, the peripheral control board 4140 starts peripheral operation when it receives a power failure detection signal output as a power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (first time). Information on the time until the control board 4140 receives the power on command output from the main control board 4100 (second time point), that is, information on the power failure time is stored.

  On the other hand, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type in addition to the calendar information and time information, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. ing. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% in steps of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper-dish-side liquid crystal display device 244 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 are mounted on a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs switching control of ON / OFF of the backlight or ON. It is supposed to be

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as display tests of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date and time information is inputted in the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on. It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted on the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, input date information, etc. , And stores and holds information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information etc. stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright in the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the mode is shifted to the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight is adjusted to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of waiting for a customer and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is being performed, a setting mode is performed. A screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side liquid crystal when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information for identifying the date. Acquire the time information that specifies minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range in which the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on from the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first powered on and the current date, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% to the correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 41 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 0b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

7-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140 a rotates the knob such as the volume of music and sound effects flowing from the speakers contained in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5. Adjust by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak has the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 4 by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (the sound source built-in VDP 4160a) so as to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 Music and sound effects are flowing from the speakers.

  In this manner, the speaker (sound output unit) housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion and the music (music output unit) provided in the door frame 5 Sound effects are flowing. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sound for notifying the store clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent action against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Informing the contents about the game effect etc. (For example, the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be rendered more powerful, or the possibility of transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player is high. The notification sound for notifying etc.) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are rotation operation of the knob portion It is a mechanism that flows without being totally dependent on the volume adjustment based on the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (with sound source built-in ) Control to be adjusted.

  The volume adjusted by this program (corresponding to the effect control program to be described later) differs from the substrate volume divided into the above-described seven levels, and smoothes from mute to maximum volume as shown in FIGS. 79 to 84 described later. It can be changed and set. Thus, for example, when the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker (sound output unit) housed in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 4 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker (sound output unit) provided in the door frame 5 is reduced, when a problem occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is performing a fraudulent act The notification sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, for example, the maximum volume set by software) can be made to flow regardless of the turning operation of the knob portion. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a failure or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound and to add to music and sound effects to create a more powerful screen developed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, which is advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, for example, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the mode is shifted to the setting mode to adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of waiting for a customer and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is being performed, a setting mode is performed. A screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume is increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, and the rendering sound Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 or the pressure operation unit 405 There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is established, and a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and this screen is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted by the store clerk and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, The volume can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted in the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the operation unit 400 A desired volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a state where a game is not performed is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer, the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly operating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player adjusting the volume so small that it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, this time on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and the last time a user sits down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the player who was playing a game feels loudly and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game controls the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400 this time It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

7-5. Touch panel module and its periphery]
FIG. 65 shows an example of signal exchange between the touch panel module 246a and its periphery.
In addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 470, a touch panel 246 described later is connected to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a detection signal according to the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 and receives the detection signal, the peripheral control substrate 4140 grasps the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 according to contact information based on the detection signal. be able to.

  The touch panel module 246a (control means) is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 connected to the main control board 4100, and controls the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). The touch panel module 246a includes the touch sensor 482 and a touch panel controller 481 having the following control register 481a. That is, the control register 481a can store the contact determination threshold as the threshold of the capacitance when the touch surface of the touch panel 246 is in the non-contact state (determination threshold storage means).

  The touch sensor 482 measures capacitances before and after the change in response to detection of a change in capacitance at any position on the contact surface, while representing the coordinates of the position and the electrostatics. A detection signal is output as a signal representing a capacity (contact detection means). When the touch panel controller 481 receives the detection signal, the touch panel controller 481 acquires coordinate values (hereinafter referred to as “detection coordinate values”) representing the position or the range thereof, while the capacitance indicated by the detection signal (hereinafter A determination is made as to whether or not the “capacity” is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a. As a result of such comparison, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it determines that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, while the detected capacitance If it is determined that the contact determination threshold value or more, it is determined that the contact surface is in the contact state (contact state determination means).

  When the touch panel controller 481 determines that the touch surface is in the touch state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs touch detection information including detection coordinate values on the touch surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  By the way, as a detection device which can be installed in a pachinko gaming machine, generally, adjustment of sensitivity is carried out as an initial process at the time of power-on, and then many operate at the sensitivity (for example, JP 2005-192783 A, It is called "the first reference"). As described above, even if the adjustment of the touch sensitivity is performed in the initial processing, it may be considered that the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate depending on the game environment after that. Here, for example, in the capacitance type touch panel, although the durability is excellent compared to the low-hardness type touch panel, the peak point of the change in capacitance is recognized as a touch point, so that the variation in sensitivity in the manufacturing process In addition, it is necessary to adjust the contact sensitivity, which changes in response to environmental changes, uniformly and constantly.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the touch panel module 246a receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the outside (for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control substrate 4140), the touch sensitivity on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 is adjusted. Do. That is, in the touch panel module 246a, when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the touch panel is updated by updating the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a based on the threshold setting command. Adjust the touch sensitivity by 246. Specifically, the touch panel controller 481 acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482 in response to the reception of the threshold setting command, and uses the capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold.

  Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detection capacitance acquired each time a contact state is detected as described above, When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, and when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  Similarly to the above, when it is determined that the touch surface is in the touch state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs, to the peripheral control substrate 4140, touch detection information including detection coordinate values on the touch surface. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  In the above manner, the touch determination threshold value for determining the touch sensitivity of touch panel 246 is updated at a desired timing triggered by touch panel controller 481 receiving a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) from the outside. Therefore, if the output timing of the threshold setting command is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing (calibration). Therefore, if the threshold setting command arrives by removing the output timing that may affect the game played by the player, it is always appropriate to detect the touch state on the touch panel 246 without affecting the game. It can be in an operating mode.

  As the timing at which the touch panel controller 481 should receive the threshold setting command, for example, a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the end of the variation display of the special symbol, and the player has stopped playing The timing at which the possibility of contact with the operation surface of the touch panel 246 is low can be illustrated. That is, such adjustment of the touch sensitivity is performed as much as possible during the fluctuation display of the special symbol that may perform the presentation using the touch panel 246, and is performed in accordance with the end of the fluctuation display. There is.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of the capacitance type and is provided on the upper tray 301 capable of storing a large number of gaming balls and easily generating static electricity, but is also necessary after the power is turned Accordingly, the sensitivity adjustment is carried out at a predetermined timing, so it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and not by the operation of the player. It becomes difficult to do.

[8. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 69 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 69 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[8-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch 3020, the first starting opening switch 3022, the second starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When it is input, based on these detection signals, it transmits to the payout control board a winning ball command for paying out a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls as a winning ball. The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the upper tray 301 which is a storage tray by driving the payout motor 839 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) by communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out the game ball as a rental ball) (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a "CR machine"). In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared, and in the command 10H, one prize ball is In the command 11H, two prize balls are designated. In the command 1EH, fifteen prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 839 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device for paying out game balls directly as a storage ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game arcade (hole). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the game is dispensed from the main control board 4100. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the control board 4110, one prize ball is designated in the command 20H, two prize balls are designated in the command 21H,. In 2EH, 15 winning balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 839 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  As shown in FIG. 68C, a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is specified in this command 30H. The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input, when the ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[8-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. As shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, various commands are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit relation, power on, spread figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is divided into display, test related, and others. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) and, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status (type of command). STTS value) and a mode (MODE value) having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and showing variations of effects.

  For the status (STTS value) and the mode (MODE value), values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter also referred to as "RWM") secured in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM are used. That is, among the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). Thus, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 can decompose this command in bit units to grasp the status and the mode.

[8-2-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 57, and in that section, as shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command is a command for instructing the special figure tuning effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, etc. Is the command of The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is a command for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is a command for instructing transition to at least one of the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, the special symbol 1 specification command is sent immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 The tuning effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process described later (command transmission means).

8-2-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 57, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 69, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1186 is composed of commands called special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end. For these various commands, "B * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 2 tuning effect end indicates the special figure 2 tuning effect end.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 69, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening start, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is starting during the big winning opening 1 opening of the first to sixteenth round (, the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 During the opening of the Nth round, or the opening start) is indicated, the special winning opening 1 closing indication command is started during the opening of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (between the rounds of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 It indicates that the closing or start of closing), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the count 0 to 10 has been counted (a large opening 2103 detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 57). It is to convey the ball number of the entered game ball, and the big hit ending command instructs the big hit ending start A shall, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command is started during the small hit open (while opening the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2110 at the time of the small hit or open) The small hit count display command is a small hit middle large winning opening winning combination (in the case of small hit, when the game ball entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large for attacker unit 2100 Sent at the opening of the Nth round of the winning opening 2103), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing of the special winning opening 1 (when closing the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100), The winning opening 1 count display command is when the special winning opening 1 is open and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the gaming ball entered in the special winning opening 2103 counts When the jackpot is detected by the switch 2110, the jackpot ending command starts jackpot ending Is sent to the big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is sent at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is sent at the small hit open (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), small The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entering the large opening 2103 in the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), the small hitting ending command is Sent at the start of small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-4. Power on]
The division of power on includes various commands named power on as shown in FIG. In this power on command, “D * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs start of RAM clear effect start and respective state effect start (for example, commands start of effect when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on Is).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at the time other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated, processing on the main control side power on described later Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The general-purpose tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 shown in FIG. 57, and in that section, as shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of common figure tuning production start, common design designation, common figure tuning production completion, and fluctuation state specification regarding vessel 1189. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related relates to a pair of movable pieces 2105 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting opening solenoid 2105, and the divisions thereof include an opening per common drawing, a common power open indication, and It consists of a command named Ending per common drawing. These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start the opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2105 State or when it is expanded), and the ending command per common figure indicates the start of ending per common figure.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2105 is driven by the starting port solenoid 2105 (When expanding in the left and right direction), the ending command per common drawing is transmitted at the beginning of the ending per common drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the notification display category is composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when it enters the big winning 2103 slot other than the big hit (during operating condition device) (not even in the big hit) When the count switch 2110 detects a ball, it instructs the start of the winning prize notification. The connection abnormality display command instructs, for example, the start of the connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the route between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality The display command is, for example, disconnection or short circuit when electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and any of the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, etc. occurs. The command to start the abnormality display is given, and the magnetic detection switch error display command is to instruct the start of the magnetic detection switch error notification when the magnetic detection switch 3024 has a failure.

  Further, the door frame open command is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 inputted through the payout control substrate 4110. If there is a door opening notification, the door frame closing command is a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this case, it instructs the end of the door open notification. On the other hand, with the main body frame open command, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame open switch 619 inputted through the payout control board 4110. When there is a main body frame open notification, the main body frame closing command is in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619 When there is an instruction, the main body frame open notification end is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormal display command is outputted from the main control board 4100 as a payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port switch 3022, second start port switch 2109, count switch 2110, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door frame open command is transmitted when the door open is detected (when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), the main body The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the status display section is composed of a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and a command named frame status 2 command There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and the detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 70, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the above, it is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and the frame status 2 command is at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 70, the test-related section is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number And is determined in advance by the contents of specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, and instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 4140. As such test commands, for example, various substrates such as the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 shown in FIG. The command to do the inspection can be mentioned.

  The main control board 4100 assigns ports for test commands one by one on the convenience of the hardware side. Instead of the aspect in which management on the hardware side is difficult to manage, in order to facilitate management on the software side, it is used for test commands. As ports, those that can be managed by software timers are allocated to predetermined ones of a plurality of ports, while those that can be managed by flags are allocated to specific ports.

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated, processing on the main control side power on described later Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

8-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 70, starting opening winning, variation shortening operation termination designation, high probability termination designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect includes the command of the name. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The starting opening winning combination command is for instructing the starting opening starting winning effect start, and the starting of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022 The instruction to start the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109 is designated, and the variation shortening operation end designation command changes The state transition from the shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state is instructed, and the high probability end designation command is from the high probability state (corresponding to the probability fluctuation state described later) to the low probability state (normal gaming state described later) Command a special symbol 1 memory command (special symbol memory command), the special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (play to the first start opening 2101) The ball enters the ball and conveys the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display substrate 1191, and the special symbol 2 memory command (special) The symbol memory command) is still used for variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 with 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102) The number of balls not held (number of reservations) is transmitted, and the normal symbol memory command is a normal symbol 1 0 to 4 (with the game ball passing through the gate 2350 and the normal symbol indicator 1189 of the function display board 1191) In the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command (preceding judgment instruction command), special symbol 1 hold is a function display basis Prior to being used for the variable display of special symbols in the first special symbol display 1185 of 1191, it is pre-read to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 suspension. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) is to be instructed before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. The pre-reading effect start is instructed to pre-read and to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 suspension. In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command and the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command are collectively referred to as "memory prefetching effect command".

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning time (when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022, When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 2 The variation shortening operation end specification command is sent to notify that by voice mainly from the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown, and the variation shortening operation termination designation command is at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is determined which has settled the variation shortening of the specified number The high probability end specification command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is determined (the failure stop period has passed) after the high probability number of times of “high probability N times” is transmitted. The special symbol 1 memory command is the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 and the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 In the state where there is the number of reservations not used yet, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 further and the number of reservations increases, the number of special symbols in the first special symbol indicator 1185 from the number of reservations The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reservations is reduced by using the variable display) and the special symbol 2 operation hold ball number change (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102 and the function display When the number of game balls enters the second starting opening 2102 and the number of reservations increases, while there is a number of reservations not yet used to display special symbols at the second special symbol display 1186 of the substrate 1191. , Its pending number Is sent to the second special symbol display 1186 when it is used for the variable display of the special symbol and the number of reservations is decreased), and the normal symbol memory command is normal when the number of operation symbol spheres change (gate part 2350) In the state where the game ball passes and the number of reservations not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed by the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, the game ball further passes the gate part 2350 and the number of reservations increases Or when it is used to display the variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 from the number of reservations, and the number of reservations is reduced), the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is the special symbol 1 operation holding ball It is transmitted when the number increases (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 and the number of reservations increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is the special symbol 2 operation pending ball number increase (second start It is transmitted when the game ball enters the mouth 2102 and the number of reservations increases. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022, the starting opening winning command is the second starting opening When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the switch 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 mainly Although it is transmitted to notify of that by voice, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 60 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specification of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to voice notification from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, It is a thing of the specification that it uses also. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the speaker provided in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 merely by the peripheral control board 4140 simply receiving the starting opening winning command. There is also a thing of the specification which does not notify by voice from.

[8-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are composed of a frame status 1, an error release navigation and a command named frame status 2, and the frame status 1, error release navigation, and so on. The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In the bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 1 command, the value 1 is set to B5, the value 0 is set to B6, and the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the error cancellation navi command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), a ball is found, and a counting switch error and a retry error are prepared. If the ball is set to bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set. The value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) in a retry error. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 838 has occurred. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. In the error cancellation navi command bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7), B0 is the value 0, B1 is the value, B5 is the value, B5 is the value, B6 is the value 1, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the frame state 2 command, the ball removal is prepared, and during the ball removal, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). The bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command has the value 0 for B1, 0 for B2, 0 for B3, 0 for B4, 0 for B4, 1 for B5 and 1 for B6. The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, change of the frame state, and error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at error release navigation, frame state 2 command Is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 72, and FIG. 74 is an example of the main control timer interrupt process Is a flowchart showing First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

9-1. Various random numbers]
A big hit determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state as various random numbers used for game control, and a big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit determination random number A random number for determining initial value for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used to decide whether or not reach is generated when the big hit gaming state is not generated, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second A random number for a variable display pattern for use in determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol display 1186 and a first special symbol display 1185 and a second special symbol display when generating a big hit gaming state The big hit symbol random number used to determine the big hit symbol displayed and derived by the display unit 1186 and the big hit used to determine the initial value of this big hit symbol random number The initial value determination random number or the like are prepared for pattern. In addition, when the small hit symbol random number mentioned above generates a small hit gaming state, a small hit symbol used for determination of a small hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 It is also used as a random number. On the other hand, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol initial value determination random number is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small hit symbol random number. Also, in addition to these random numbers, an ordinary symbol determination random number for use in determining whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and an initial value for this ordinary symbol determination random number for determination A random number for determining an initial value per normal symbol determination, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining a variation display pattern of a normal symbol variably displayed on a regular symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware incorporated in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value 0 as the minimum value) The maximum value is updated within the value 32767, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. The counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number determination for big hit determination. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The jackpot determination initial value determination random number is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol determination and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number described above are also updated by the same method as the above-described update method of the big hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the jackpot judging random number is counted up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot judging random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for the jackpot judgment The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process, but when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power on, or in the process at the time of main control power on described later. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value is the main control side power off process (during power off) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the stored checksum value (sum value) The main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code The derivation process is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, for the jackpot determination initial value determination random number, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated by the execution of the initial value derivation process. Thus, the value set for the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is derived using the ID code, and the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a uses the ID of the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, with the first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if an external device is stored if the code is stored. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value, and the two-step security measure by preventing it from being analyzed.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the big hit judgment. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that acquires fraudulently and updates the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value, the unique code for identifying the individual is given to the ID code. The ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in the other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board, that is, another pachinko gaming machine, and thus the predetermined code obtained by being disassembled and analyzed. Even when aiming for a start winning game where a momentary stop is generated at intervals and the gaming ball is made to enter the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 at predetermined intervals, the big hit gaming state can not be generated. .

9-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
When the initial value update type counter clears the whole area of the main control internal RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from its built-in nonvolatile RAM, and based on the taken out ID code An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value in the first cycle, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot judgment random number, it draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the jackpot judgment random number as a jackpot judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) with low probability and are read from the normal determination table, while value 31768 with the high probability 32767 is set, and it is read from the probability variation judgment table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured to update a predetermined fixed numerical value range ranging from the value 0 to the value 32767 as the minimum value. In other words, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range from the middle value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), the value 10 to the value 209 is set in the low probability and the value 10 to 339 is set in the high probability. That is, in the low probability, the number of the random number (big hit determination random number) which is the big hit is 200, and in the high probability, the number of random number (big hit determination random number) which is the big hit is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent synchronization between the plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated, the number of other random number values to be acquired simultaneously is 200 except when acquisition times of random number values are different. For example, prime numbers are used. That is, in the present embodiment, if the random number for the big hit judgment is different from the acquisition time of the random number (for example, the value of the random number for the big hit game mode determination obtained when the game ball passes to the gate 2575 described later) , The number of random value that will be the jackpot can not be a prime number. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, the number (50) of big hit judgment random numbers for the number obtained by dividing the number (200) of the big hit symbols with low probability by 4.

  When considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) of In such a case, a period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the timing when the first value 10 in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely low in the former period compared to the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The former range is the latter range compared to the range following the last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to maximum value (value 32767). The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the gaming ball is illegally obtained by somehow acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter reaches the value 0 and irradiating the radio waves toward the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 If cheating as if entering the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is any of the ranges of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), It can be said that the probability of becoming a value of is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (the big hit determination range) is an intermediate value (value 16384) of the minimum value and the maximum value. When the value is set in the range close to the maximum value side, the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 is before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) In comparison with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is extremely high in the former period compared to the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) Comparing the range over to the range from the first value (the value 32668 for the low probability, the value 31768 for the high probability) to the maximum (the value 32767), the former range is more comparable to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) Among them, one of the values will be the value selected by the initial value lottery process and will be set to the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for the big hit determination. It counts up and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , It will count up toward the maximum value from the value obtained by lottery.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, in any of the low probability and the high probability, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is the median value (value 16384) from the minimum value to the maximum value to the maximum value side If the value is set in a range close to 0, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is low (low The period over which the probability is 32667 and the probability is 31767) is irregular and random. Thereby, for example, the game ball is illegally acquired by any method when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, and the radio waves are emitted toward the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 Even if the cheating as if entering the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) It can be said that the probability of becoming any value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) to the minimum value (first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) by the counter in the second cycle The required time is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (the first value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1 and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from time T1 to the fourth cycle is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the initial value update type counter, the fluctuation is given to the time when the updated counter is the minimum value (the first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) (periodicity The player is not aware of this by leaving the

[10. Main control side power on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control program described above performs processing at the time of main control side power on as shown in FIG. 72 and FIG. Do. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets the initial address in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S10, the main control program starts output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 25 (step S11). The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, with its logic being LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a Be done. Thereby, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Following step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure notice voltage and become stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. In the determination of step S14, it is determined whether the power failure advance signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC22 as a power failure advance signal.

  If there is no input of a power failure notice signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilized after power on in step S14, the main control program causes a power failure at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of D type flip flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input to As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D type flip flop MIC22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program enables execution of the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from the time of power on (when the game side power is on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 4100a, an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110. It does depending on whether it is done or not. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not to be instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 952 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time after power-on State (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer process 2 (step S22). In this weight timer process 2, a system for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 246 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting for boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time (boot timer) until boot.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0, the power recovery information is read out from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where power has been turned on after the power has been shut off, as well as the state where power has been restored since a power failure or a momentary power failure, and detection of high frequency irradiation being detected. Also includes the state of recovery after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs power-on command generation processing (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) at step S24, that is, when deleting the game information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match at step S28. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) at step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, the main control program The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program is executing the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is performed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 instructs the RAM clear when deleting the game information, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the sum values do not match, or when the main control power is turned off. When not terminated normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and based on the taken out ID code, the big hit judgment random number is always updated from the fixed numerical range of the counter An initial value derivation process for deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the jackpot determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the above-described jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S36, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power on command divided into the power on shown in FIG. 35 for clearing the main control built-in RAM and reporting that initialization has been performed is created and peripheral The test commands classified into the test relation shown in FIG. 36 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Following step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the main control program generates an error cancel navigation command It will regulate execution of game control side RAM clear processing which is triggered by receipt (normal time operation control expedient). As described above, according to the concept of time sharing, the main control program uses the error cancellation navi command for a predetermined time from the time of power on as described above, for the detection signal input following the operation of the operation switch 952. The RAM clear process is executed triggered by the input (game control side power on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error cancellation unit), which was originally used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization of the RAM, or after the lapse of the predetermined time It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S48 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S48, the main control program performs non-coincidence random number update processing (step S50). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the random number regardless of the collision judgment (big hit judgment) is updated. In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-falling random number updating process.

  After step S50, the process returns to step S46, and the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and determines in step S48 whether or not there is an input of a power failure notification signal. If there is no signal input, the non-coincidence random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The process of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt disable setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

  Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program is the start port solenoid 2105, the attachment solenoids 2108A, 2108B, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, and the upper special symbol memory display shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the lower special symbol storage indicator 1187, the normal symbol indicator 1189, the normal symbol storage indicator 1188, the game status indicator 1183, the round indicator 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as described above.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not set to be cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs this main control side power-on process again. The process of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or when it is momentarily stopped, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

[11. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS. 72 and 73.

  When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 74 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. (Step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

  Following step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program detects, for example, gaming balls having entered the general winning opening 2104, 2201. Each detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020, 3020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls having entered a ball 2103, a detection signal from a first starting aperture switch 3022 for detecting a gaming ball having entered a first starting opening 2101, and a second starting opening 2102 A detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109 for detecting a gaming ball that has flashed, a detection signal from a gate switch 2352 for detecting a gaming ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, and a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet Payment that indicates that the payout control board 4110 has normally received a detection signal from the game or a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later Reading 払主 ACK signal from the control board 4110, respectively, it is stored in the input information storage area as the input information. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022 which detects the game ball which entered the first starting opening 2101 and the detection signal which detects the gaming ball which entered the second starting opening 2102 from the second starting opening switch 2109 When each of the signals is read, the start-up winning command divided into the other parts shown in FIG. 36 corresponding to this is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109 The start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In this embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2103. Detection signal from the first start opening 2101, a detection signal from the first start opening switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the second start opening, and a second start opening switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the second start opening 2102 A detection signal from the gate and a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, and a predetermined time (eg, 10 μs) After the lapse, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. We treat the same result and the one that there is no game ball entering.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program detects the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the first starting opening switch 3022, the second starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 The effect of chattering, noise, etc. is achieved by performing two readings in total: two readings comparing the first to third times and two readings comparing the second to fourth times. Since false detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the first starting opening switch 3022, the second starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are selected. Reliability can be improved.

  Following step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are lighted in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process Payout control board 4110 various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the customer ACK signal that indicates the normal reception is received is determined, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S78). In this success random number update process, the above-described random number for big hit determination, the random number for big hit symbol, and the random number for small hit symbol are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-falling random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter is only executed each time this hit random number update processing is performed. Count up.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter, and a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value) The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by one. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for big hit determination to the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number determination for big hit determination. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this false random number updating process. The jackpot determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the jackpot determination random number. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing. The normal symbol determination random number is the same as the above-described method for updating the jackpot determination random number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 73 (main control shown in FIG. 73) is a random number for determining the big hit determination initial value, a big hit random number determination random number, and a small hit symbol initial value determination random number. The main process is updated in step S50 of the non-incidence random number update process in step S50 and in the main control side timer interrupt process of step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, but this routine is updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of times of execution of the non random random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time from the occurrence of unevenness in the processing time of the next to the generation of the next interrupt timer. Step S50: A random number for determining the initial value for the big hit, a random number for determining the initial value for the large hit symbol, and a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and creates a prize ball command shown in FIG. 66 for paying out the game balls based on the input information, The self check command shown in FIG. 66 for confirming the connection between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110 is created. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self check command as the main pay serial data to the payout control board 4110.

  Furthermore, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes the prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 upon receipt of the gaming ball in the big winning opening 2103, for example. In response to the detection information based on the detected signal being written in the corresponding defined bit area defined continuously by 1 bit over several minutes of the special winning opening 2103, for example, 15 balls as a prize ball A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that it should be dispensed, and is sent to the payout control board 4110 (disbursement control means).

  In the present embodiment, since two large winning openings 2103 are provided as the large winning openings, the main control program is configured of the plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit areas. From among them, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, they will be referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in order. In the case of a gaming board in which the number of large winning openings is one, for example, one definition bit area is used. The definition bit area used is, for example, 1 bit, and is an area adjacent to each other. When the game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area, which is the fourth bit, for example, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes a definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted, for example, by writing "0", and prepares for reception of the next game ball.

  Here, the main control program also determines which state of the defined bit area is to be confirmed. For example, assuming that the main control program defines the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the special winning opening 2103 as the fourth bit, the main control program of the pachinko gaming machine in which only one special winning opening is provided as in this embodiment. In the case, the main control program acquires information of the fourth definition bit area.

  Furthermore, the main control program executes mask processing for the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with the prize ball effective range of the special winning opening 2102 described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not output to the dispensing control board 4110 should be avoided. If it is determined that this award ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program is forced to, for example, mask each defined bit area to which detection information based on the detection signal from count switch 2110 described above is written. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”) to prevent the award ball command from being written to the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, in the first special game state, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from count switch 2110 indicates that one game ball has been accepted in large winning opening 2103 in the main control program. In response to being written in the above definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball, and the transmission information storage area described above Write to At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 and transmits it to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Output a sound that sounds like

  On the other hand, in the main control program, in the first special game state, detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the big winning opening 2103 is the big winning opening 2103 If the corresponding definition bit area is not written, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball. Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control means). The game ball payout operation is not performed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103 and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 so that payout of the game ball is permitted. Do.

  At this time, when the main control program pays out the game balls for the specified payout number or more which can be paid out in response to the reception of the game balls to the big winning opening 2103, the prize overrun abnormal command (not shown in FIG. 36) Is written to the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in a command transmission process (step SS92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

  In this way, since the illegal game balls will not be paid out substantially, damage to the game arcade (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, when the acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2103 is detected instead, the main control program immediately writes a prize excessive abnormality command in the transmission information storage area, and controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a. , May be notified to the speaker.

  Thereafter, the main control program reads out the award ball command from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (dispensing control means).

  As described above, when the game ball is received for the special winning opening 2103, it can be confirmed by hearing whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

  On the other hand, the main control program is configured such that the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 do not receive a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 4110 has completed reception of the winning ball command normally within a predetermined time. A self check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S82). On the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) divided into the status display shown in FIG. 37 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 4110 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reshapes the command normally received as the sender serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 36 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Here, the frame status 1 command corresponds to a first error generation command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S84). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning opening 2103 by the count switch 2110 when not in the big hit gaming state, the main control program A prize failure display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 36 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric combination product control processing, the main control program updates the above-mentioned big hit judgment random number by +1 each by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 That is, triggered by the start winning combination (starting condition satisfied), the value of the counter mentioned above is taken out and set as a jackpot random number value for each starting memory information for which the starting condition is met, and this jackpot random number value It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as a "special lottery". The main control program determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is to be generated based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (a predetermined winning condition is established) ) In the case, the game mode is shifted from the normal game state to the big hit game state. The jackpot gaming state corresponds to a special gaming state, a first special gaming state, and a second special gaming state, which will be described later, and indicates a gaming state that collectively refers to these.

  The main control program determines, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time, as data for defining the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (see FIG. 103) described later when deciding the jackpot game mode. A definition is a part of the main control built-in RAM designated by an address offset according to the number of large winning openings with definition data (table) representing the opening time and the winning number limit count number of gaming balls Reading from the data area (not shown).

  By the way, in general, a subroutine which is a program module configured by a set of program code is generally called after the CALL instruction included in the main routine is called and the program code group included in this program module is executed, Return instruction to the main routine (see the first reference above). In this case, it seems that it is difficult to reduce the program capacity at first glance, because an instruction for calling back is required.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes successive subroutines, for example, after the main routine calls and executes the first subroutine with the CALL instruction, instead of calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction in succession. Alternatively, the return instruction may not be placed at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine as it is. With a program module of such a configuration, the overall capacity of the program can be reduced.

  In the above-described special symbol and special motorized symbol control process, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the probability variation determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches the judgment value per probability variation (probability variation transition condition is satisfied) If so, then it shifts to a probability variation state, but if the jackpot random number value does not match the probability variation hit determination value (the condition is not satisfied after probability variation), it shifts to a gaming status other than the probability variation ( Winning probability control means). Here, the “probability fluctuation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Furthermore, in this special symbol and special electric combination control process, the main control program is shown in FIG. 35 when the above-described lottery result is triggered by the reception of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101. In the case where various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created while the lottery result is triggered by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect Create The main control program stores the command thus created in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  At the same time, the main control program determines the start pending display mode with reference to the preceding determination table (not shown) based on various random number values acquired in response to the start winning combination, and displays the variation after this starting winning combination. A command used to execute a process (hereinafter referred to as “preceding determination process”) that causes the lottery result of a special lottery to be implied in advance before disclosing the stop symbol of the special symbol If a command “is listed” is to be made and this precedent determination processing is to be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program includes the information on the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the jackpot game as described later instead of the random number value of the special lottery itself in this holding ball number change command It is like that. Details of this advance determination process will be described later.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the first special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the start winning prize according to the type of special symbol, or the second special symbol display The output of the lighting signal is set to light the unit 1186, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area. Also, when the main control program, for example, to shift to the big hit gaming state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closed) which is divided into big hit related shown in Create a display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command), store it as sending information in the sending information storage area, or open or close the opening / closing member 2107 The output of the drive signal to the solenoid 2108 B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Also, the main control program performs two rounds to light a two-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two (round). Set the output of the lighting signal to the display lamp and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is six times, turn on the 6 round display lamp (not shown) of the round display 1190 The output of the lighting signal to the 6-round display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 12 times, the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on Set the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp to be stored, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence or absence of the transition to the probability fluctuation state in a predetermined color, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, triggered by the start winning of the game ball, the special symbol is then started to change display and a big hit lottery is executed, and a predetermined winning condition is established and a certain probability transition is made. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability change lamp as the gaming state indicator is changed, and the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state. In this probability fluctuation state, the probability of the big hit lottery mentioned above is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and it becomes a big hit (the first mentioned) See the bibliography of In this way, as a gaming machine that may shift to the probability fluctuation state after the probability fluctuation state ends, the probability fluctuation state continues mainly until the next big hit if the jackpot game is looped That behave like (hereinafter referred to as "loop machine"), and continue probability fluctuation state until the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the big hit game is over (hereinafter "ST (special time) machine ") Exists. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines of different types of continuation of the probability fluctuation state, the control of the above-mentioned gaming state indicator is different, and in the development stage, the control of the gaming state indicator is designed one by one for each type It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is established thereafter, and the winning condition is established. If the player is transitioning from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, and the winning condition is satisfied and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is the normal gaming state. While shifting to the probability fluctuation state set relatively higher than that, the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 is set to the lighting state. After that, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the definite change transition condition is satisfied thereafter, the main control program causes the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 to be displayed in a specific interrupt cycle while the probability fluctuation state is continued. After the light-off state is temporarily switched off from the light-off state, the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 changes from the light-off state to the light-off state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  Specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is established after the game ball is received by the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 as a trigger. If it is determined that the winning condition is established, the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, while if the winning condition is established and the probability change transition condition is established, this is determined. The probability changing state is shifted to a probability changing state in which the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state (gaming state control means). The main control program turns on the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 while the probability fluctuation state continues, and displays the gaming state indicator 1183 when shifting to the gaming state other than the probability fluctuation state. The mode is turned off (lighting mode control means). The main control program turns on the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 triggered by the transition to the probability fluctuation state described above, and thereafter the win condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After changing the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 from the lighted state to the extinguished state temporarily in a certain interrupt cycle while the probability fluctuation state is continued, the game is played in the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the off state to the on state again (lighting state continuation control means). Although the player wants to make the player visually recognize that the probability fluctuation state continues, the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 can be changed as described above for a very short time. It can appear that the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 has not changed visually on the player.

  In this way, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the light has been turned off once on the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 so that the light is visually recognized as if the light is being continued. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability fluctuation state continues continuously, the probability fluctuation state continues until the special symbol turns to the specified number of fluctuations after the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again after the winning condition is satisfied within the prescribed fluctuation number, a program code for controlling the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 between different models. Can be shared. This makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of different types of pachinko gaming machines.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric character control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state when the winning condition is established as described above, Furthermore, when the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is established, the status is also shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state (gaming state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state, substantially without paying out the gaming balls substantially in the big hit gaming state. In addition, as this specific game state, the time-shortening operation condition as another example of the transition condition may be satisfied and the time-shortening function may be in a state, or both of them may be simultaneously performed together with the above-mentioned probability variation game state It may be a gaming state. This main control program manages the remaining number of times of the variation display number of the special symbol in the period from transitioning from one gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits the gaming state information representing the managed gaming state By writing in the transmission information storage area as information, it is then transmitted in a command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interrupt cycle (playing state notification means).

  Specifically, when the above-mentioned probability change transition condition is satisfied in this main control program, the special symbol is variably displayed until the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability change game state, for example, the normal game state Information on the number of remaining times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number information”) is included in any command that is transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, a change pattern command corresponding to a change pattern. By writing in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, transmission is subsequently performed in a command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interrupt cycle (remaining fluctuation number notification means). The main control program may include the remaining number information described above in other commands or may transmit the information to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs the normal symbol and normal motorized product control process (step S88). In the ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and performs gate winning processing based on the input information. In this gate winning process, the main control program determines from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the judgment result, the main control program extracts the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol judgment and uses the main control built-in RAM as gate information Store in the gate information storage area of

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads out the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol from the read gate information, and performs main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as a "normal lottery"). The main control program determines whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the determination result (lottery result by normal lottery). When the main control program causes the open / close operation based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 is in the open state, and the game ball can be accepted into the second start opening 2102 and the game state becomes advantageous to the player Transition to the state. Furthermore, the main control program determines the variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above-described determination based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and is classified into the common drawing synchronization effect related shown in FIG. Command is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the lighting signal is output to the ordinary symbol display 1189 so that the ordinary symbol display 1189 is illuminated according to the determined variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol. Are set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. In addition, the main control program, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the common electric symbol production shown in FIG. Various related commands are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and the output described above as output information Store in the information storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random symbol determination random number per symbol that has been taken out does not match the standard symbol per time determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined on the basis of the above, and various commands classified into the general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 35 are prepared and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set to light the normal symbol display 1189 in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs an ACK signal to the payout control substrate 4110 when various commands from the payout control substrate 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. And a drive signal to attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B that perform opening and closing operations of the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when in the big hit gaming state, and a starting opening solenoid that performs opening and closing operations of the pair of movable pieces 2106 In addition to outputting the drive signal to 2105, 2 round big hit information output signal, 6 round big hit information output signal, 12 round big hit information output signal, 16 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out transmission information such as a command or data from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits this transmission information as the main cycle serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 (command Transmission means). In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown in FIG. 35 created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronous effect related Commands, various commands classified into big hit related (for example, when the game ball entered the big winning opening 2103 is detected, the winning opening 1 count corresponding to the big winning opening counting command based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 Display commands), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general drawing tuning effect related, various commands classified as ordinary electric wave director related, various types classified as notification display shown in FIG. 36 Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit And the frame state 1 command (second error generation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 An error release navi command (second error release command) is transmitted to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navi command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an error release navi command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame open command having the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame open command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame open command (first door frame open command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( The door frame open command (second door frame open command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means, second specific frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) Section) sends a door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, whereby the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general purpose register on the stack in a hardware manner and saves it. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the main control side main processing. At step S96, the contents stored in the stack and read out are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[12. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on, and FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on shown in FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 80 is a sprocket FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of fixed position determination skip processing, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of ball look determination processing, and FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of award ball stock number addition processing for award balls 83 is a flow chart showing an example of a winning ball stock number addition process for a rental ball, and FIG. 84 shows an example of a stock monitoring process. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process, FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 87 is an example of the ball look-up operation setting process. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing, FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of inconsistency counter reset determination processing, and FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of error release operation determination processing FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing the signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending and the input signal confirmation processing (b) from the CR unit.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball coverage determination processing, prize Ball prize ball stock number addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, withdrawal ball look operation judgment setting processing, payout setting processing, ball look operation setting processing, retry operation monitor processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball sight determination processing, prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball viewing operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Performed as processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball look determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock ball number Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, and the processing for setting out the movement of the balls to be judged Priority in turn has been set.

12-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control program in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIGS. Perform processing at the time of input. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 4110a to set an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 4110a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (input / output setting of I / O) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, settings and the like of various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4110a are performed.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs weight timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A notice signal (delivery blackout notice signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from power-on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether the operation switch 952 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, it is judged that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear and the operation switch It is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated when it is determined that it is instructed to perform the RAM clear when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW while it is determined that the 952 is not operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 952 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4110a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. State (the discharge control side power on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 4110a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The number of ball stock numbers PBS, the number of real ball counts PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the logic of the PRDY signal logic stored in the CR communication information storage area This flag is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the state is set, and is set to 1 when the payout information is erased and to 0 when the payout information is not erased. Be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Following step S518, the payout control program sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (described at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is ended normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not ended normally.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is ended normally, the payout control program sets the working area of the payout control internal RAM as the power recovery time. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read out from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 4110a (hereinafter referred to as the “dispense control internal ROM”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control internal RAM. Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes the state where power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or the checksum values do not match in step S526 When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally, the payout control program executes the entire region of the payout control internal RAM It clears (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear processing in response to the detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (payout control side power on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control program sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut down or when a power failure or momentary stop occurs, the power failure notification signal (the payout failure notification signal) is sent to the main control board as the power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e of 4100. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S540, the payout control program determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. It is set.

  If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, if 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the blackout notice signal (payout blackout notice signal) is input. Determine

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544).

  Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 4110a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that the various commands (the prize ball command and the self check command shown in FIG. 66) related to the delivery from the main control board 4100 are normally received, the payout motor 839 There are stored various information such as drive information for performing drive control, winning ball number information of the number of balls for which the payout motor 839 actually paid out gaming balls, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 953. When various commands related to the payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a based on the output information, a payout ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor The driving signal is output to 839, or the number of balls for which the payout motor 839 has actually paid out the game balls is used to receive the number of balls information information. (In this embodiment, the payout ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784 every time the payout motor 839 actually pays out 10 game balls) or an error. A display signal is output to the LED display 953.

  Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 4110a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 952, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847, a detection signal from the counting switch 838, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal A main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 4100 for notifying that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process to be described later is read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Following step S550, the payout control program performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update processing, when it is determined whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, Time is set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 3 are discharged, and the skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. When it is determined whether or not the holding space for the ball cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full, it is determined whether the ball is full or not. As a determination condition, it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply path of the winning ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the time-out switch 821. Besides performing time management such as the ball out determination time which has been determined, etc., the number of balls of the gaming balls which are received by being paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls actually detected by the count switch Inconsistencies that are set as the criteria for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the inconsistencies is repeated. Manage time of counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball judging time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so every time this timer update processing is performed, the ball judging time is reduced by 2 ms and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball is accurately measuring the judgment time.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full determination time is 504 ms, the ball out determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (approximately 2 hours). Each time the timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are each reduced by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0. The extraction determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above Determine The payout control MPU 4110 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure. As a result, even when the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation can not be continued due to a momentary stop or power failure, the payout operation is continued at the time of power recovery. The game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, while the payout control MPU 4110a is exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU 4110a causes a momentary stop or power failure while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game balls can not be continued, the number of ball stock PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. by being restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as payout backup information. , And immediately before a momentary stop or power failure, the exchange of various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6 And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, even if instantaneous communication is interrupted or stopped, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power interruption or suspension. The various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the momentary stop or stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6.

  In addition, as described above, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power returns, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 4110a. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH based on and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation operates abnormally. It is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the winning ball device 740 is abnormal, that is, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1, and the payout ball is subjected to the operation judgment setting processing. As an output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when not in communication with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a. Output to CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, since the state is restored at the time of the power recovery, it is extremely after the power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, which informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. It can be informed that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  Also, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko gaming When the machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball connection device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is paid out. When the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI to output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic is LOW, That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are the gaming ball lending devices, etc. When not electrically connected via the connection terminal plate 869, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW to indicate that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental ball is impossible, and the predetermined state of the dispensing control MPU 4110a Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the output port of The state of the logic of the EXS signal which indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is used together with the dispensing control board 4110. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored as CR connection information in the state information storage area.

  Following step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-balls check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the storage space of the above-described far cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full switch 550 based on this input information. It is determined whether the game ball is full or not, or the number of balls of the game ball taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 as described above by the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 821 becomes a predetermined number or more It is determined whether or not the For example, the determination as to whether or not the accommodation space of the far cover unit 540 is full with stored gaming balls uses a timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check that the current full tank and full ball check process are full. When the detection signal from 550 is ON and the detection signal from full switch 550 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and full ball check process, that is, the detection signal from full switch 550 is from OFF to ON If it is determined that the time has passed, counting of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process Determine if In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the state information storage described above indicates the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the far cover unit 540 is full with the gaming balls stored therein. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, full game information is stored in the state information storage area to indicate that the storage space of the far cover unit 540 is not full with gaming balls stored.

  It is also determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms in the current tank full / ball out check process. When the detection signal from the disconnection switch is ON, and the detection signal from the disconnection switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball disconnection check processing, that is, the detection signal from the disconnection switch 821 is turned on When it is transitioned to the timing of the ball out determination time (119 ms) described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started. When the ball out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time has come, whether or not the detection signal from the out of ball switch 821 is ON in this full tank and out of ball check process. Determine if In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 821 is ON, the out-of-ball information notifying that the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is a predetermined number or more While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 821 is OFF, the out-of-range ball informs that the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to the payout from the main control board 4100 (a prize ball command and a self check command shown in FIG. 66) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is transmitted that indicates that the connection between the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control substrate 4110 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lent balls, ball removal and ball sighting are performed, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. Do.

  Following step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 of the payout control board 4110 is created and is output information storage area described above as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on this ball out information, the corresponding display data (In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1") is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame divided into the state display shown in FIG. Create the release command, body frame closing command, frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), error cancellation navi command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command), and then the main control board Send to 4100 For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, when the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on the out-of-ball information, It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 or the like. In addition, in this command transmission process, the payout control program is, for example, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error in the game ball payout operation occurring, the information on the portion where the error occurs in the payout operation A frame state 1 command (first error cancellation command) including “error occurrence position information” is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the above-described error occurs when the payout control program determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is the value 1, that is, when the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 952 is detected. A cancellation navi command (first error cancellation command) is output (command transmission means). The payout control program transmits a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) when the main body frame open detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619 is input (main body frame command sending means, Main body frame command sending means (1), first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) when the main frame closing detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619 is input (main frame command sending means, Main unit frame command sending means 1). Further, the payout control program transmits a door frame open command (first door frame open command) when the door frame open detection signal from the door frame open switch 618 is input (a door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input (a door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). In addition, the payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the above-mentioned status information storage area in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S566), and sets machine number information for identifying itself with other pachinko gaming machines. And an error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When the hall computer receives the error information signal, the hall clerk provides the machine number information and the error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk is pachinko gaming machine of the machine number based on the machine number information. In the device, it is possible to recognize that an error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the payout control program returns to step S539 again, sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and in step S540 determines whether or not the power failure notification signal (delivery power failure notification signal) is input. If it is determined that there is no input of the power failure notice signal (disbursed power failure notice signal), it is determined whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 in step S542, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 If it is, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, the value 2 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. Port input processing in step S550, and in step S552 The image update process is performed, the CR communication process is performed in step S554, the full tank and ball out check process is performed in step S556, the command reception process is performed in step S558, the command analysis process is performed in step S560, and the main process is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4110a changes. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4110a preferentially outputs, to the main control substrate 4100, a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payment from the main control substrate 4100 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a secures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when there is an input of the power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs setting for clearing the watchdog timer (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs setting to prohibit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S 582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 4110a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4110a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, whether or not the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit has been normally completed. Is examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

12-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 78 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Then, switching (saving) of the register is performed (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Following step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S594, the payout control program sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

12-3. Rotation angle switch history creation processing]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 847 shown in FIG. 17 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S610). The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 847 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read out from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the input information, the payout control program detects the light of the rotation angle switch 847 for detecting the rotational position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. It is determined that the axis is in a transition state from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  If it is determined in step S612 that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, the payout control program performs shift processing of rotation angle switch detection history information (step S614). In the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2 , B 2 B B 1, B 1 ビ ッ ト least significant bit B 0, etc., shift from the least significant bit B 0 to the most significant bit B 7 by one bit at a time.

  Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S618) . In the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the payout control program performs the same process as the shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. B7 B B6, B6 B B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 最 下 位 B1, B1 最 下 位 least significant bit B0, etc. Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  As described above, every time the rotation angle switch history creation processing is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or 1 according to a state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 847 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or a detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 847 can be created.

12-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip process]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. In the sprocket fixed position determination skipping process, the determination as to whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted is at the regular position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the winning ball device 740 is finished. As a result, the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 can be reliably started in a state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 is controlled by the payout control MPU 4110a and as shown in FIG. It is determined whether FLG is the value 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and the value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping) The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when not skipping).

  When it is determined in step S630 that the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (does not skip), that is, when performing home position determination of the payout rotating body, the payout control program determines the rotation angle switch history information of the payout control internal RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the home position determination value (step S634). The home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and a lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 described above continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. It means that it is the state which changed to the non-blocking state from the blocking state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 839 shown in FIG. 17 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 839 is the rotation of the payout rotary body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the discharge rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 839. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position of the payout rotary body is determined, the rotation angle switch 847 is used. History of detection signal, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 79, and lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, ie This is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 by the generation of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. Thus, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 839 rotates four steps, so it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash. Can. Therefore, since the erroneous detection of the fixed position of the dispensing rotating body due to the backlash can be prevented, the rotational position of the dispensing rotating body can be properly managed by the rotational position of the dispensing motor 839. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S632 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S636). Thereby, it can be set so as not to perform fixed position determination of the payout rotating body (skip). The payout control MPU 4110a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body at step S636 to a fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of concave portions of the dispensing rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the dispensing motor 839 is the rotation of the dispensing rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the dispensing motor 839.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 839 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit causes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 to transition from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as "edge detection state"); The state in which the optical axis of the switch 847 transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position determined state”), and (3) the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state It manages in three states of the state ("fixed position determination skip state"), and. The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 839, and the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the rotation of four steps of the payout motor 839, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3) In this case, the rotation position corresponds to the rotation of 13 steps of the payout motor 839, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating member, is managed by a total of 18 steps.

  In the fixed position determination skip state (3), the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  Since the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, subtraction of the skip determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4110a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes a value 0.

  On the other hand, when the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . The home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  The gaming balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the gaming balls are charged against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is under the influence of noise and is in the file environment. A rotation angle switch 847 is provided on the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3, and a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the gaming ball. Cheap. In addition, the wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control board 4110 and the in-prize ball case inner board 754 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Cheap.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the unblocked state to the blocked state In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the dispensing rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is enhanced. In addition, since the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

12-5. Ball sight judging process]
Next, the ball look determination process will be described. In this ball sight judging process, it is judged whether or not the state of the ball sight by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted is generated.

  When the ball judging process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 is, as shown in FIG. 81, a rotation angle from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 847 (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program This routine is ended assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating and the ball is not seen. Do.

  On the other hand, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S642 The value 1 is set to the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, and when the payout motor 839 is performing a blind movement, the value 1 and the ball are The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball sighting determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. By making this ball look determination time effective, subtraction of the ball look determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 77. .

12-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing and rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, and the prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing is from the main control board 4100. The processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out on the basis of the winning ball command described later, the processing for adding the number of balls for winning ball stock number for the rental ball is a processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out is there. First, a winning ball stock number adding process for winning balls will be described, and then, a winning ball stock number adding process for rental balls will be described. In the present embodiment, it is set that the winning ball stock number adding process for the winning balls is preferentially performed, and the winning ball stock number adding process is performed according to the winning ball stock number adding process. After the gaming balls have been paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set to carry out the processing for adding the number of balls for the number of balls for the ball for rental.

12-6. Prize Ball Stock Ball Addition Number Processing]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 is controlled by the payout ball program as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S 560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads out the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not the winning ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while if the received command information is the winning ball command in step S650, the payout control program changes the winning ball command to this winning ball command. The corresponding winning ball number PBV is read out from the winning ball number information table (step S652). Although this prize ball number information table will be described in detail later, the prize ball number information table is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. As a result, the winning ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the winning ball stock number PBS is read out from the winning ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the winning ball number PBV read in step S652 to the winning ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read out in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

12-6. Prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls]
Next, a winning ball stock number addition process for a rental ball will be described. When the winning ball stock number addition process for the rental balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 requests a rental ball as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the lent ball request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the rental ball request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads out the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a rental ball request signal.

  When there is no rental ball request signal at step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, but when there is a rental ball request signal at step S660, the payout control program receives the winning ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the storage area (step S662), and the number of balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of balls to be lent RBV is a fixed value, and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of balls to be lent RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the rental ball request signal read out in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning balls are prioritized (the winning balls and the lent balls are managed separately), the lent ball request signal is held even when there is a lent ball request signal. , Pay out the rental balls with the completion of the delivery of the winning balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning balls stock number PBS is set to 0 and the payout of the rental balls is performed.

12-7. Stock surveillance process]
Next, stock monitoring processing will be described. In this stock monitoring process, it is monitored whether the game is not continued in a state (stocked state) in which the storage space of the far cover unit 540 shown in FIG. Processing.

  When stock monitoring processing is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, and as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the dispensing built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold value TH.

  If it is determined in step S672 that the winning ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 1 (step S674), and terminates this routine. In this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the gaming balls in the accommodation space of the far cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid gaming balls (the number of prize balls stocked above) becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold TH It is a flag indicating that it has reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or more, and a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or more.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 0 (step S676), and ends this routine.

  If the game state is a big hit and the player is relaxed and looks forward to the effects developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246 shown in FIG. 19, the player is carelessly During the first round, the gaming balls paid out as winning balls may not be pulled out from the lower tray 302 by operating the lower tray pulling out button 354 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower tray 302 is filled with gaming balls, and the gaming balls accumulate in the accommodation space of the far cover unit 540. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with gaming balls, as described above, the value of the winning ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold TH, and provided in the door frame 5 as a caution effect Several LEDs of various decoration boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to tell the store clerk in the hall that the player's game is to be watched. Thus, the store clerk in the hall can notify the player that the game ball should be removed from the lower plate 302, and the player fills the lower plate 302 (the housing space of the far cover unit 540) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the continuation of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the caution threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 which can be represented by one byte (8 bits). This makes it possible to notify the store clerk in the hall to warn the player of the game at the earliest possible stage.

12-8. Disbursement ball look operation judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball look-up operation determination setting process, the game ball is paid out by the payout motor 839 to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. It is the processing which sets up whether it does not carry out or discharge etc.

  When the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

  Following step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 shown in FIG. 17 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S 680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value match, the payout control program It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described below is operating abnormally, value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry) When the operation is operating normally), the values are respectively set to 0.

  If, in step S682, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, or in step S684. If the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), that is, the retry operation is not in an abnormal operation, the payout control program determines whether the ball watching flag PBE-FLG is the value 1 or not. It is determined (step S686). The flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. A value of 1 is set when the operation is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the ball is not looking down.

  When the flag PEB-FLG is not 1 in step S686 (ie, the value 0), that is, when the ball is not moving, the payout control program determines whether or not the prize ball information storage of the above-mentioned payout control internal RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the payout of the game ball by the payout motor 839.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there are unpaid ball numbers, the payout control program determines whether the storage space of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the reserved game balls. It is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the fullness information stored in the fullness and step-out check processing of step S556 in the payout control portion power-on process (disbursement control portion main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the storage space of the far cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full of the stored gaming balls, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of paying out the gaming balls to the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored gaming balls, the payout control program ends this routine. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 839 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the far cover unit 540 is filled with the reserved gaming balls. If a winning ball is generated while the payout motor 839 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 839 is increased, and the number of balls stock PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not larger than 0 (is the value 0) at step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. Thus, the game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, in step S686, when the ball is in-flag flag PBE-FLG is the value 1, that is, the ball is moving, the payout control program performs the ball setting operation processing described later (step S700) Finish. In this ball facing operation setting process, a ball facing operation is performed to eliminate the state of the ball by the payout rotating body of the winning ball device 740.

  On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is in an abnormal operation, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 839. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S702, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not in communication with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball rental can not be made at present (CR unit 6 The logic of PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, held down, when the logic of BRDY from is held low (in other words, falling and held), the logic state of PRDY signal is set to PRDY signal output setting information And store it in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and CR. Output to unit 6 On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal Is set as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, in the CR control process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 77, the EXS signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. . Note that, “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and held) the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI If at all (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain its logic HI.

12-8. Disbursement setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 839 is driven to set to pay out the game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program controls the number of drive commands DRV from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 86 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Read out (step S710). The drive command number DRV is used to command the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839, and is equal to the number of balls stock PBS. The number of drive commands DRV is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. At step S710, the number DRV of drive instructions is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is a value 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive instruction number DRV whether the number of gaming balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839 remains.

  When the number of drive commands DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S714, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 839. Although this count will be described in detail later, the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 77 is performed from the count switch 838 shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. At step S 718, the real ball count PB is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read out in step S718 from the winning ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 in the award ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720) The real ball count PB is set to the value 0 (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are the value 0, at step S722, the value of the award ball stock number PBS read out at step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive instruction number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is the number of game balls to be dispensed by the payout motor 839, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts (decrement, step S726) the drive command number DRV by 1 and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S 728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the count switch 838.

  When there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program adds (increment) the real ball count PB by the value 1 (step S730), and ends this routine. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is the case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, and there is no detection signal from the count switch 838 in the determination of step S728. When the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball can not be paid out because the game ball is not received in the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. to decide. Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the winning ball stock number PBS in the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. Thus, when there is no detection signal from the count switch 838 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real sphere count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one sphere to be paid out may be included in the prize sphere stock number PBS. Yes, in other words, since the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, it is possible to perform a retry operation to again pay out the one ball to be paid out. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game balls will not be paid out to the player, and the disadvantage of the player due to the non-payment of the game balls can be prevented.

12-8. Ball clasp movement setting process]
Next, the ball look-up operation setting process will be described. In this ball facing operation setting process, setting is performed to eliminate the state of the ball from the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 of the winning ball device 740 is transmitted.

  When the ball setting operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been (step S750). This determination is performed based on the sphere determination time which is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball judging time is stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the determination time.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the ball determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads out the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 847 (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 are. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value 1. In step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value do not match, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 839 is set so that the ball can be turned on (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S754, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following the step S758, the payout control program sets the ball watching flag PBE-FLG to the value 0 as the ball watching operation ends (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, and when the payout motor 839 is performing a blind movement, the value 1 and the ball are The value is set to 0 when the operation is not being performed (the end of the ball leaning operation).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S750 that the ball has been judged, the payout control program sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S762, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, when the payout control MPU 4110a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball rental can not be made at present (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, ie, held down, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area Do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and CR. Output to unit 6 On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal Is set as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, in the CR control process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 77, the EXS signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. . As described above, “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” maintains the logic LOW of the EXS signal when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of H is HI (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain that logic HI.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets the ball watching flag PBE-FLG to the value 0 as the end of the ball watching operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[12-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the gaming ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, and as shown in FIG. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 847 (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this home position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4 Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program The mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 (increment, step S774). This misalignment counter INCC is received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, and the number of balls of the gaming balls dispensed and the number of balls detected by the count switch 838; The number of balls of the gaming balls that are normally received by the depressions of the payout rotating body and paid out is the same as the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. , The value 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 86, the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the count switch actually It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls that are inconsistent due to the incoincidence detected at step 838 are not repeated due to inconsistency. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of rotational angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S776). This determination is performed based on a detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 or not.

  When there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts the value 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, step S778) .

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the count switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unintended gaming ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about a few millionths, and in this embodiment, the mismatch threshold The value 5 is set as INCTH.

  In the processing for setting the working area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530 in the processing at power on of the payout control unit of FIG. 77, as described above, it is the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM at power recovery. Information to be used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to a value such as the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. It can be done. Thereby, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue monitoring of the payout operation (retry operation) of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740, which has been performed immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, when the value of the incompatibility counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, for example, immediately before the instantaneous interruption or power failure, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally. It can be determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the device 740 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, the payout operation of the gaming ball by the prize ball device 740 is in the normal status by the determination of step S780. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S780 that the value of the incompatibility counter INCC is not smaller than the incompatibility threshold INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is in abnormal operation, that is, the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is abnormal. It is determined that the game is in the state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the winning ball device 740 is in the abnormal state in the determination of step S780.

  If it is determined in step S780 that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program The payout control built-in RAM described above is configured to set retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED display 953 which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110 to notify that It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that it is "in prize ball stock", the payout control program sets the prize ball in-progress information for displaying the number "9" on the error LED display 953 and incorporates the above-mentioned payout control. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S 782).

  Following step S782, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of mismatch counter INCC is greater than mismatch threshold INCTH, step S784 is performed. It is designed to be initialized upon the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the mismatch counter INCC is initialized in response to the occurrence of the external factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal corresponding to the operation is input as the RAM clear signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above under the control of the main control MPU 4100a, and the RAM clear notification command is displayed on the peripheral control board shown in FIG. Output to 4140. Thus, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Subsequently to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine is ended. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally, value 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (the retry operation is It is respectively set to the value 0 when operating normally.

  The payout control program shows retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. In the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout controller main process), a retry error status command is created and sent to the main control board 4100, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the same process In the processing, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and in the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output processing of step S548 in the same processing. Output a drive signal to the error LED indicator 953 based on this To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 953. In the main control board 4100 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 causes the door frame side lighting blink command to output a lighting signal to cause the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). The light is output to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 shown in FIG. The store clerk or the like in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs, as described above, opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the numeral “on the error LED display 953 mounted on the payout control board 4110 It can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred by visually observing that “5” is displayed. In this way, the store clerk or the like in the hall checks the malfunction of the count switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 4110 from the count switch 838, contact failure of various connectors, etc. in order to investigate the cause. As compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 953 are not notified, it can be performed extremely quickly.

  In addition, by intentionally putting the counting switch 838 in a non-operating state, it has been described that it is difficult to detect the game balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. If the value of the above-mentioned inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, even if a fraudulent action is made to forcibly generate a retry operation and illegally acquire the gaming ball paid out by this retry operation. Since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a clerk or the like in a hall rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. Even if the value of the inconsistence counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired by the player who cheats is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls As a result, it is possible to minimize the damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the count switch 838.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is designed to be initialized upon the occurrence of an internal factor that has become an issue. Thus, the mismatch counter INCC is not initialized, for example, in response to the occurrence of an external factor such as operating the operation switch 952 to clear the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 952 or the like is altered illegally and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4110a, the incoincidence counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an unauthorized action. Absent.

12-10. Mismatched counter reset judgment processing]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this misalignment counter reset process, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 838 It is a process which determines whether the inconsistency counter INCC which calculates the difference of, is reset.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination processing is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program determines the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 89 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S 790, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S790 that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program ends this routine. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to the initial value 7000 s (about 2 hours).

  Subsequent to step S 792, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the above-mentioned award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S 794). Finish. As described above, the misalignment counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 838 and the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. This is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls of the gaming balls normally received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the count switch 838 Because it does, it becomes the value 0. The payout control program performs the retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 86 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, and the ball of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by the retry operation. It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls which are inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the count switch 838 are repeatedly being reproduced. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about one in several million.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made up of the game board 5 and a frame body such as the main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted, and by exchanging the game board 5 (new base replacement) Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the winning ball device 740, the drive power source for the winning ball device 740, and the power source board 851 for generating the control power for the payout control board 4110 are common. It is equipped on the frame side as a function. Under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 monitors whether the retry operation is repeated by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC as described above. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control section power-off process in the payout control section power-on process shown in FIG. 77, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the shut-off is stored when the power is shut off. In the processing of step S530 (setting at power recovery of the RAM work area) in the processing at power-on of the dispensing control unit shown at 76, processing is restarted from the stored mismatch counter INCC at power-on.

  Then, when the game board 5 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off and the game board 5 'of another game specification different from the game board 5 is replaced to turn on the power, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4110 a of the payout control unit 4110 on the substrate 4110 restarts processing from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the gaming board 5 'is mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the gaming board 5 before replacement is mounted is directly inherited. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the game board 5 'is mounted, and the ball count of inconsistent game balls is generated with an probability of one in a million by chance, and the inconsistency counter INCC Is increased and the incoincidence counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the incoincidence value INCTH mentioned above, it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 4110a in a short period by exchanging from the game board 5 to the game board 5 '. There is a risk of That is, during a short time after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ', the malfunction of the count switch 838, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the count switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, etc. There is a possibility that the abnormal operation of the retry operation may be determined suddenly even though

  As described above, when it is determined that the game board 5 is changed to the game board 5 'and the abnormal operation of the retry operation is made in a short period, the exchanged game board 5' has an impression that it is easily broken even though it is new. It may be given to the player. The probability of a few millionth that one game ball will be paid out due to a retry action is one when pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall and it is continuously operated during the business hours of the hall for one week Since the probability that a ball that is inconsistent due to a retry operation is paid out is the same as the probability that a one-millionth probability from the mismatch counter INCC in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In this state, only the value 1 is not drawn. Then, in one week, the mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 1; in 2 weeks, the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 2. In week, mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and mismatch counter INCC becomes 3, and in 4 weeks, mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and mismatch counter INCC is 4, and in 5 weeks When the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1, the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 5, which matches the above-mentioned mismatch threshold INCTH. That is, when five weeks have passed, the payout control program proceeds to step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a in order for the mismatch counter INCC to coincide with the mismatch threshold INCTH. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838, causing a failure of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 4110 from the counting switch 838, contact failure of various connectors, etc. It is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110 in order to notify that it is a "retry error" in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Retry error to display the number “5” on the error LED display 953 Set the broadcast becomes possible to set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4110a determines that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this mismatch counter reset determination processing, that is, it repeatedly performs the mismatch counter reset every 7000s (about 2 hours). In the process of step S 794 in the determination process, the value 0 is forcibly set to the mismatch counter INCC, that is, the reset is performed forcibly, thereby incrementing the mismatch counter INCC generated with the probability of a few millions of parts described above. It is invalidated. As a result, although there is no malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the discharge control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc., an error occurs in the retry operation. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Incidentally, by intentionally putting the counting switch 838 in a non-operating state, the above-mentioned game balls received and paid out received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted are described as detection difficult. Even in the case where the retry operation is forcibly generated and the fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the gaming ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, the above-described is the case where the counting switch 838 is intentionally deactivated repeatedly for a short time. Thus, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so a store clerk or the like in the hall takes the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It will rush to confirm. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. On the other hand, in the case where the counting switch 838 is intentionally and repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is generated every 7000s (about 2 hours). During this time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who has made a fraudulent action, though being reset, is, as described above, the incoincidence counter INCC up to the incoincidence threshold INCTH, and the counting switch 838 is intentionally set. Even if the game player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, it is possible to extremely reduce the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent acts.

[12-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 952 shown in FIG. 17 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 causes the operation switch 952 to release the error as shown in FIG. 90 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 952 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, determines that it does not instruct to perform error release. Control switch 952 is not operated, while when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, the operation switch 952 is operated judging that it is instructed to perform error release. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 952 is operated in step S800, the payout control program checks an error flag state confirmation process. Perform (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the winning ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is operating abnormally is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normal). Since it is set, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 0 or the value 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Following step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is The payout control built-in RAM is set (stored) in the state information storage area. Thus, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout controller main process) shown in FIG. Based on the information, a state command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormal operation is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal operation, it is indicated that an error occurs in the retry operation. If retry error information to be communicated is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payment control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  When the main control board 4100 receives the retry error information, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 4140, the sub control program performs retry operation error notification processing to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Please check the winning ball unit.” And “Please check the harness of the payout control board.” Twice) It is notified to the store clerk etc. of the hall by flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 repeatedly and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is supposed to be. The store clerk or the like in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of the retry operation breaks the counting switch 838 shown in FIG. 17, breaks the various harnesses extending to the payout control board 4110 from the counting switch 838, makes contact failures of various connectors, As compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, it is possible to confirm extremely quickly. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, the plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

  Following step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is handled. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forced to stop the content displayed by the error LED indicator 953 which is a segment indicator that is already mounted on the payout control board 4110 or that it is ready to lend a ball. In order to transmit to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held HI, that is, held up, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 Output to the CR unit 6 via For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormal operation is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal operation, it is displayed by the error LED display 953 already. The retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the numeral “5” notifying that it is “retry error” It forcibly overwrites the information on which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed. Also, in order to tell the CR unit 6 that it is ready to lend a ball, the logic of the PRDY signal is held HI, that is, it stands up, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of payout control MPU 4110a. And the like to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and the routine ends. In this error flag initialization process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is maintained at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device connection plate 869. .

  Thus, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or larger than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the process of step S786 in the same process, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 while the operation switch 952 is operated, causing this external factor to trigger. The value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in response to the occurrence, and the initialization is performed. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated when the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 952 is operated to clear RAM to cancel the error. As in the case where the switch 952 is operated, it is initialized upon the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the main control side main processing from the time the power is turned on when the operation switch 952 (operation switch), which was originally to be used for canceling the error that occurred in relation to the payout operation Operation for causing the RAM clear function to start initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until it is It functions as a department. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the operation switch 952 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the payout operation of the game ball after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the store clerk is not accustomed to operating the pachinko gaming machine, if even the position of the operating switch 952 on the back of the gaming machine is remembered, according to the timing of operating the operating switch 952, If it has passed a predetermined time since the power was turned on, the function to release the error generated in connection with the payout operation of the gaming ball is exhibited, while according to the timing when the operation switch 952 is operated, it is Within a predetermined time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error and can cope appropriately without losing the switch operation, so the game is interrupted. It is possible to resume the game before the player who has lost the game loses the will to play.

12-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of a dispensing operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently, an input signal confirmation process from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of gaming balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen is performed twice as the amount of money) is the number of lent balls, The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 read out the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and are stored in the read input information, and the CR communication processing is performed. , From the input information, confirms the logic state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal every 2 ms which is an interrupt timer period.

12-12. Signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball rental]
The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the rental ball. 91D is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation of the second is possible, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, as shown in FIG. 91 (d). In order to communicate the logic of the PRDY signal as HI, that is, start up and hold and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110, and as the PRDY, a game ball connection device connection terminal The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player operates the rental ball button 361 of the rental ball unit 360 shown in FIG. 2 by the player, the ball rental switch 365b is turned on (turned on). An operation signal is input from the frequency display plate 365 to the CR unit 6 through the game ball connection device connection terminal plate 869 as TDS shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the CR unit 6 to which this TDS has been input pays out the number of gaming balls worth 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4110a) through the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . The BRDY signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a as a BRDY signal.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the payout control MPU 4110a, to which the BRDY signal is input, receives the loan request monitoring time HA (from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in this embodiment) from the timing H1, as shown in FIG. The predetermined number of lent balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 until the elapsing. ) It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single request for starting dispensing operation to pay out 100 yen as the amount of money, rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the ball number of the gaming ball for 100 yen to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as the rental ball number among the ball number of the gaming ball for 200 yen as an amount, FIG. 91 (b As shown in), until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal thereof Start up and hold (timing H2). The BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 4110a causes the BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in this embodiment, In order to indicate that one dispensing operation has been started until 20 ms ± 1 ms has elapsed, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the activated state is held and the dispensing control MPU 4110a Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as EXS (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS has been input starts from timing H3 until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (which is set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) elapses. The BRQ that has been raised and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the payout control MPU 4110a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses from timing H4. It goes and pays out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as the number of balls for the predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of gaming balls for 100 yen. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from timing H3 is held low with its logic, that is, held in the lowered state, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a. , EXS are output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the ball number of the game ball for the remaining 100 yen out of the ball number of the game ball for 200 yen as the amount to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the rental ball number, as shown in FIG. ) Until the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, it is set to 268 ms at maximum) from the timing H5, the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board from the CR unit 6 The signal is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4110a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  As shown in FIG. 91C, the payout control MPU 4110a similarly pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of gaming balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls using the above-described method. The EXS signal which has been raised and held is held with its logic as LOW, that is, in a lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and as EXS, a game ball connection device connection terminal The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the CR unit 6 stands from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The BRDY raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4110a) through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H8).

  The above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acceptance ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, delivery monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF is the delivery control shown in FIG. It is clocked by the timer update process of step S 552 in the processing at the time of turning on the division power supply (delivery control unit main processing).

  The payout control MPU 4110a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 when there is a ball out, a ball is out, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (BRDY logic from the CR unit 6) Is low (in other words, when it is falling and held), as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the PRDY signal which is raised and held from timing H1 is set to the state where It holds and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game apparatus connection terminal board 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the state of the logic of the EXS signal is maintained, though not shown, It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 4110a, and outputs it as the EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( When the EXS signal is rising and held) is to maintain its logic HI.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4110a sets the number of balls of the gaming ball for 200 yen as the amount and 100 as the amount. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls with a 50-ball number of the lent balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. When a store clerk or the like in the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, for example, the upper plate 301 or the number of gaming balls for 100 yen as the amount of money When it is set to pay out to the lower tray 302, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money once, and the number of gaming balls of 500 yen as the amount of money as the lent ball number. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4110a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as an amount five times, and the ball number of gaming balls for 1,000 yen as an amount When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of balls to be lent, the payout control MPU 4110a will perform the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

12-12. Confirmation process of input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 can make the CR unit 6 perform BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even if the lending request monitoring time HA described above has elapsed. CR unit 6 connects BRDY from CR unit 6 to a game ball lending device even if the signal is not output to payout control board 4110 and the signal for the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even if the signal is not output via the terminal plate 869 and is not output to the payout control board 4110 and the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. The signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is not activated or Even if the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and lowers the signal. If not, the above-mentioned PRDY and EXS are used to confirm whether BRQ and BRDY are normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91 (e) and 91 (f), when the payout control MPU 4110a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), a predetermined period JA from this timing J0 (in this embodiment) , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, held down and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110. Output as a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, held down, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a To the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device board 869 as an EXS. To force (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the PRDY signal, which is dropped from timing J1 and held, to a logic of HI after a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) elapses from timing J1. That is, it holds in the activated state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a raises the logic of the PRDY signal raised from timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J2, and sets its logic to LOW. That is, it holds in the lowered state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the PRDY signal, which is dropped from timing J3 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from timing J3. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a raises the logic of the PRDY signal raised from timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from timing J4, and sets its logic to LOW. That is, it holds in the lowered state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J5 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JF (set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J5. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs it to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6 ).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (dispense control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[13. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 94 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

13-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[13-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and initializes the peripheral control MPU 4150a in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters the state where the interrupt permission is set, for example, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, which is output from the main control board 4100 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko game machine 1, etc. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the built-in VDP 4160a to write, for example, "0" in the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, with regard to the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20, effect backup information (1 fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) in the backup first area 4150 cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the effect backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) ms) are compared, and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 4150 c. And a cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db is compared. At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents are identical, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 4150 d (see FIG. 20) ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 4150 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150 cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c (see FIG. 20) and cleared to zero. Then, after performing the initialization setting processing, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 19) so that peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control unit power-on process, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 in response to the start of the supply of power by the power control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment means ). Specifically, first, in the control register 481 a of the touch panel controller 481, a contact determination threshold as an electrostatic capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state is stored. The touch panel controller 481 is triggered by the start of the supply of power by the power supply control unit, and is an initial value of the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a as a predetermined threshold for contact determination (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact Also referred to as “judgment threshold”.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is controlled to have the LED brightness included in the obtained brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 ranging from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 which is set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the use time of the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 described above is It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Also, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is to be performed, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. When serial transmission of serial I / O ports for lamp driving substrates is started, the game board 5 is stored in lamp driving substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caa of peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. A state in which game board-side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process described later It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored at the top address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. Thus, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Start sending data one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for a lamp drive substrate serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port). The 1 byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that 1 byte data is empty in the transmission buffer register and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus If not, through the external bus 4150 h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the peripheral bus 4150 ai, the remaining game board-side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caa is byte by byte. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register for writing, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, in synchronization with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150 cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 5 is created by lamp data creation processing described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 4150 cab is serialized to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and peripheral bus 4150 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that there is no data in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port There is.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, dial operation unit 401 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7. Information (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400) (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 (rotation direction)) ) Is set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20, based on the history information and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c The presence or absence of the operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 or Appropriately determined whether to reflect the state of operation of the pressure operation unit 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process to be described later from the channels CH1, 2 shown in FIG. It is outputted to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 246. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed exceeding the drawing capability of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is used for the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal The output to the display device 246 is canceled. Although this can prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 by the lamp data output process of step S1012 and The speaker contained in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 by the effect by the plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later It becomes a mechanism which can give priority to synchronization with the effect by the music, the sound effect, etc. according to various effects from the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later. In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 4160 c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. The audio data transmission IC 4160 c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a, and directs the right side audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system which makes it a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, in addition to the stereo reproduction of music and sound effects tailored to various effects from the speakers provided in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, the notification sound and the notification sound are also It is played back in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that make up the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, what number light emission data from the top light emission data of the various light emission data The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound, arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in schedule data storage area 4150 cae Among the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the sound command data at the top is to be output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of start opening winning effect, number of reserved normal symbols (0 to 4 ) A game symbol is accepted in the special winning opening 2103. A symbol memory command for identifying a symbol, a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command which is output when the number of start pending changes, Large winning a prize opening 1 count display command (large winning a prize opening counting command) which is output every time, or frame status 1 command which shows the contents of full shown in Figure 36 (second error occurrence command, full error occurrence command) It is analyzed whether or not it is (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently. Also, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door frame open command or the door frame Analyze whether it is a closing command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 35 are various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified into special figure 2 synchronous effect related, various commands classified into big hit relation, and power ON The various commands that are classified, the various commands that are classified into the general drawing tuning effect related, the various commands that are classified into the regular electric connection effect related, the various commands that are classified into the notification display shown in FIG. , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands which are classified, various commands which are classified as test related, and various commands which are classified as others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program further includes various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 36 in the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above, various kinds of commands are performed. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set to the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, of the peripheral control unit 4150 It extracts from various control data copy area 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c, and sets 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into the state display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error cancellation navi command (second error cancellation command), the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game Using a panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 (rendering device), an upper dish liquid crystal display device 470 (rendering device), and a lamp (rendering device) to visually warn the outside or using a pair of side speakers (rendering device) Aurally warn the outside (error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 despite the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, cheating against the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following the above-described step S1024, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information acquisition processing (step S1025), and then performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, and day which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer of the effect control program is indicated among the light emission data arranged in time series, the pointer being updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data Control the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data While being extracted and created from various control data copy area 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c, it is set in lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa of peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. A plurality of various decorative substrates provided in 5 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal to the ED, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150 ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. It is created and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data generation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, so that the effect control program is data constituting the screen generation schedule data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and is arranged in time series. Among the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150 ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and from the extracted at least one character data Sprite data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is generated on a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is intended to make it difficult for the player's interest to be exhausted by displaying a video composed of a large number of material images superimposed on the background image in each frame according to the progress of the game. Although it is required to execute display control so that more material images are included in each frame in order to display more various images (see the above first reference), a large number of material images are added to each frame. At first glance, inclusion seems to place a heavy burden on display control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying display control of frames including a large number of material images and reducing processing load, the effect control program displays each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing correspondence relationship information in which correspondence relationships with a plurality of material images that can be represented are previously defined, when trying to display a predetermined frame of each frame, the correspondence relationship information is referred to and the predetermined At least one predetermined material image to be represented included in the frame of the frame is specified, and the drawing data is included without including the other material image excluding the predetermined material image in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and including the predetermined material image The predetermined frame is generated based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer) and stored in the built-in VRAM. Being displayed on the side the liquid crystal display device 1900 (display unit). The details will be described below.

  First, in the present embodiment, among a large number of background image data used to display a large number of background images constituting each frame, at least part of the background image data (hereinafter also referred to as “specific background image data”) is At a position where the material image such as at least one sprite (hereinafter also referred to as “specific sprite”) should be originally arranged on the background image based on the specific background image data (hereinafter referred to as “original arrangement position”), It is managed as follows so that it may be represented by the display mode which can not be visually recognized (hereinafter referred to as "hidden state").

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence relationship tying table (corresponding relationship information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, etc. Refer to the table. In this correspondence relationship tying table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups) Correspondence information defined in advance is managed together with a concealment cancellation command (secrecy cancellation instruction) for canceling the visual concealment state of the at least one sprite. In this correspondence relation tying table, each sprite (and each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and as a part of the correspondence information, coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame The value is managed.

  In this correspondence relation linking table, as such correspondence relation information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, The correspondence with the concealment cancellation command for canceling the visual concealment state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as a "desired sprite".

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on scheduler data (drawing management means). When the effect control program tries to display a predetermined frame according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery executed triggered by the establishment of the start condition, the correspondence relationship of the correspondence relationship tying table is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Information is referenced to specify a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame and represented (source image identification means).

  Further, when the desired sprite is to be represented in the predetermined frame according to the schedule data, the effect control program specifies the concealment cancel command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence relationship information of the correspondence relationship tying table, The specified concealment cancellation command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a (consent cancellation instruction means). The concealment release command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as a “desired sprite number”) which can identify a desired sprite to be released from the concealed state in the predetermined frame. By the output of such a concealment cancellation command, the display state flag of the name tag information is updated to one that was initially off. The name tag information and the display state flag thereof are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source executes drawing processing.

  Here, when it is attempted to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the effect control program operates the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) as follows. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a does not receive the concealment release command, the display mode with the desired sprite kept in the concealed state can be included in the predetermined frame based on the correspondence relationship information of the correspondence relationship tying table. Generate drawing data for frame processing in the frame buffer. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a mode in which the desired sprite can not be visually recognized, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  On the other hand, when the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a receives the concealment release command, it receives that the concealment release command and the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in this is updated to on. As a trigger, the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation tying table is referred to and a desired sprite corresponding to the concealment release command is specified. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data for releasing the concealed state of the specified desired sprite to provide a display mode capable of visually recognizing the desired sprite in the frame buffer. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame of a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  In this way, the effect control program does not have to finely manage which sprite group can be represented in each frame when displaying a frame group of a certain scene due to the presence of the correspondence relation linking table. On the other hand, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source causes the VDP 4160a with a sound source to draw a frame representing each desired sprite by a very simple control as compared to the conventional display control whether to make the peripheral control MPU 4150a output a concealment cancel command Can draw a frame that does not represent a sprite. As a result, display control of a frame including a large number of sprites can be simplified to reduce the processing load.

  Moreover, since the correspondence relation linking table manages the correspondence by linking the sprite group including the desired sprite and the effect control program (the secrecy cancellation command group issued by the group). The sprite data creation work and the presentation control program design work can be made independent and completely separated, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device which can be installed in a pachinko gaming machine, generally, adjustment of sensitivity is carried out as an initial process at the time of power-on, and then there are many that operate with the sensitivity (the first reference reference). As described above, even if the adjustment of the touch sensitivity is performed in the initial processing, it may be considered that the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate depending on the game environment after that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the display data creation process, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a so that the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 246 (second display means) includes the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). A function of outputting the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command) for executing the display operation of a mode for prompting a touch on the operation surface, and adjusting the touch sensitivity of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for making (contact sensitivity adjustment means) effective is output (command output means). That is, the effect control program causes the upper tray side liquid crystal display 246 to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command) (to the operation surface of the contact type input means Command to execute the display operation of (a mode for prompting contact) is written in the transmission information storage area, and thereafter output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command means). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, (the display control program by the control of) the presentation control program controls the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact input means) with a finger based on the command. The screen of the mode prompting the user to touch is displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display 246.

  Next, subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel process, the effect control program mainly detects the touch state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the touch detection signal as a detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, the effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detection unit) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, and specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means) Operation information including this initial position is acquired. The effect control program may not only acquire such coordinate values but also acquire the range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as the contact range).

  In this touch panel process, as a countermeasure to the above-mentioned concern, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a separately from the effect command (effect execution command) described above, and thereafter in the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written to the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) shown in FIG. Yes (sensitivity adjustment command means).

  Specifically, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) has passed from the main control MPU 4100a as the above-described predetermined timing, the effect control program executes a special figure 1 tuning effect end command (see FIG. 35). ) When the predetermined time (for example 1 minute) has passed since the last reception, or when the variation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has passed, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command (figure The threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of (see 35).

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 receives a touch on the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the outside, as a touch on the touch panel 246. Adjust the touch sensitivity on the surface. In other words, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a to receive the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and determines the contact determination stored in the control register 481a based on the threshold setting command. The touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold value. Specifically, the touch panel controller 481 acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482 in response to the reception of the threshold setting command, and uses the capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold.

  Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detection capacitance acquired each time a contact state is detected as described above, When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, and when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  Similarly to the above, when it is determined that the touch surface is in the touch state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs, to the peripheral control substrate 4140, touch detection information including detection coordinate values on the touch surface. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  In the above manner, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is set to a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the contact determination threshold to be determined is updated, if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. (Calibration). Therefore, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command by removing the output timing that may affect the game played by the player, thereby always affecting the game on the touch panel 246 without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be made into an appropriate operation mode.

  The timing at which this effect control program should output a threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, output when the special symbol variation display ends, as described above. It is possible that a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed since the command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command is received, and the player is in contact with the operation surface of the touch panel 246 because the game is stopped. Low timing can be illustrated. That is, such adjustment of the touch sensitivity is performed as much as possible during the fluctuation display of the special symbol that may perform the presentation using the touch panel 246, and is performed in accordance with the end of the fluctuation display. There is.

  As timing at which a threshold setting command should be output, in addition, the effect control program receives from the main control MPU 4100a a command at the time of the end of the common figure tuning effect end (see FIG. 35) transmitted when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. It may be timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed since then.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of the capacitance type and is provided on the upper tray 301 capable of storing a large number of gaming balls and easily generating static electricity, but is also necessary after the power is turned Accordingly, the sensitivity adjustment is carried out at a predetermined timing, so it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and not by the operation of the player. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, and controls the built-in sound source, While incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects in accordance with the track numbers defined in the above, an output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 20 is activated each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is generated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 4140a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, muffled at substrate volume 0, and set to maximum volume at substrate volume 6, and substrate volume 0 to substrate The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the program. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even when the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume small, the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 4 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker is reduced, the loudness (when the player is performing an illegal activity) or a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be flowed. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a failure or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound, to add to music and sound effects, and to render the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246 as more powerful or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 20 are stored in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The contents are respectively copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached are copied and backed up respectively to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 20, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab, the reception command storage area 4150 cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad, and included in Bank 0 (1 fr) As the effect backup information (1fr), the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. 20 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified as request factors for A controller 4150ac, and copying to Bank 2 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb is specified, and Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr), Bank 0 (1 fr) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All copies are sequentially copied in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the copy of backup second area 4150cc to Bank 4 (1fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  In the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150 da shown in FIG. 20, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac performs high-speed operation on Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 4150db as presentation information (SRAM), which is contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), as presentation backup information (SRAM) And the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150 dc.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area 4150db to Bank1 (SRAM), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the stored contents are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db sequentially by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is specified as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the copy to Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150db is specified, and the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150 db successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 dc to Bank 3 (SRAM), Bank 0 (SRAM From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa stores the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac, to Bank 4 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150 dc. To the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) and the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), each second predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in the second area 4150 dc. Copy all from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in order.

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af and the peripheral control external WDT 4 150 e so that the peripheral control MPU 4 150 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1006 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value of 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value of 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed at first in step S1009, and the effect control program sets 1 ms in step S1010. Interrupt timer activation processing is performed, and each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed and the value in the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 Setting will complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150 a can be received is input from the VDP 4160 a with built-in sound source. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later, the value 1 is set. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[13-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150 a of peripheral control unit 4150 can be received shown in FIG. 19 is inputted from VDP 4160 a with built-in sound source of liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be executed triggered by the event will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0, as shown in FIG. 93 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 92 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady process processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being performed, this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed as peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. In order to prevent the forced execution of peripheral control unit steady processing from the beginning by forcibly canceling the process, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 92 is powered on. The peripheral control unit V blank signal which is this routine indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value SP to 1 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in logic (peripheral control unit steady processing) In addition to notifying interrupt processing, peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 at the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine. It is determined whether there is any, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power on processing of FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

[13-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 92 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19, the effect control program is executed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a, as shown in FIG. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is as it is Finish. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid driving processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. 20 are arranged in time series. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program displays the electrical drive source such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid driving processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program performs serial I / O port continuous transmission for frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a Among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, drive signals to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting the data is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150 ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. Frame decoration of It is set to send a dynamic amplifier board-side motor data storage area 4150Caf. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 4150 caf is sent via the external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and peripheral bus 4150 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The transmission of one byte of data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that there is no data in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf for 1 byte, external bus 4150 h, peripheral control bus controller Via 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive substrate 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 4150 cae of peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150 a is configured. Drive to motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral shown in FIG. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board motor drive data SM-DAT that has been sent via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai, the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for motor drive board Transfer to register and write. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The 1 byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that 1 byte data is empty in the transmission buffer register and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150 h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the peripheral bus 4150 ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information , And movable position history information etc. are set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input (for example, dial operation unit The rotation (rotational direction) history information of the 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai.

  Following the step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and a main prize ball number information output process (S1112), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. 20 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, to back up At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 4150 a are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is this routine is executed whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150 ca shown in FIG. 20 for the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, the motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up each time , And effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, as Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1) of the backup first area 4150 cb as effect backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in s) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 4150 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of backup first area 4150 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa performs peripheral control D The contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) are specified as request factors for A controller 4150 ac, and copying to Bank 2 (1 ms) of backup first area 4150 cb is specified, and Bank 0 (1 ms) from the contents stored at the top address of Bank 0 The contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are all copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and designates copying of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 3 (1 ms), and Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored in the start address of) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 4150 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) All copies are sequentially copied in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and copy of backup second area 4150 cc to Bank 4 (1 ms) The Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 92, various processing relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effect is executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[13-1-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, and is triggered thereby to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 95 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which one byte (8 bits) of information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 4100, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port built in the control MPU 4150a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value which is the byte number is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 4100 Therefore, it should be consistent with the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise It is under the environment of accepting files. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 4100? It is judged whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the 1st byte and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main cycle serial data are shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command storage area 4150 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received in the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 4100 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[13-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing will be described. The peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the blackout notification signal It is determined whether a signal is input (step S1302). If the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246 are turned off, the excitation of motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, the various LEDs are turned off, etc. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of pachinko gaming machine 1 by this, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even if the power of pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and reception command storage area 4150cac of peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 20 (peripheral control unit reception The received command is stored in the ring buffer).

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 20 are stored in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac copies to the Bank 2 (1 fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac copies to the Bank 2 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac will be briefly described. Peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa of peripheral control MPU 4150 a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy the backup first area 4150cb to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) Content stored in the start address of reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr), and the end address of reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied sequentially from the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 4150cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The content stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored in the start address of receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150 aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4 150 ac in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc. The copy to the received command storage area is specified, and the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of backup second area 4150 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The content stored in the receive command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac by the PU core 4150aa is included in the receive command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Designating copying to the contents from the content stored in the start address of received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All data are sequentially copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If it is determined in this determination that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notification signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e. If it is determined in step S1312 that a power failure notice signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, “0” is written into the above-mentioned storage area of the built-in VRAM as an example for initialization, and the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 92 is restarted from the beginning. The Rukoto.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so clear signals to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e. The output is supposed to be interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and released in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by resetting automatically.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The main control board 4100 is a first start opening 2101 or the first start area 2101 which is a start area provided with the game ball 1100 in the game area 1100 and having a game ball fired by the ball striking device 650 toward the game area 1100 partitioned on the game board 5 A main control MPU 4100a as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game triggered by being received by the second start port 2102 is implemented. The payout control board 4110 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of the game balls by the winning ball device 740 based on the winning ball command of FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b) which is a payout command from the main control board 4100 The payout control MPU 4110 a is mounted as

  The main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a. The main control built-in RAM can store information on the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 4110a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4110a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on the payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 952 of FIG. The operation switch 952 erases the information on the game stored in the main control built-in RAM when it is operated within the period when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 72 is performed from the time of power on. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 24 for outputting is outputted from the main control MPU 4100a which is a game control microprocessor, and the operation during the determination processing of step S512 in the processing when the payout control unit of FIG. When this is done, the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4110a which is the payout control microprocessor as the RAM clear signal for erasing the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM Steps in the main control side power-on process of Figure 72 from the moment If it is operated after the period in which the determination process of S16 is performed (or the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit of FIG. The error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for canceling an error that has occurred, and outputting it to the payout control MPU 4110a, which is a payout control microprocessor, It is also something to be prepared.

  As described above, when the operation switch 952 is operated within a period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 72 is performed from the time of power on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM The RAM clear signal of FIG. 24 for erasing information related to the game is output to the main control MPU 4100a which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination processing of step S512 in the payout control portion power on processing of FIG. When it is operated within the specified period, the RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4110a which is the payout control microprocessor as the RAM clear signal for erasing the information on the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Functions and processing when the main control side of Fig. 72 is turned on from the time of power on If it is operated after a period in which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or a period in which the determination process of step S512 in the process of power on of the payout control unit of FIG. The error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to 740, Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be provided with two different functions of the RAM clear function and the error release function by the operation of the single operation switch 952, respectively. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[14. Control processing on main control board]
FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the first and second starting opening winning process shown in FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of an example of the process during variation shown in FIG.

  Further, FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation processing shown in FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process, which is one of the jackpot game preparation processing shown in FIG. FIG. 104 is an example of a table used for jackpot game mode determination processing when the jackpot flag is ON. The main control program executes timer interrupt processing, for example, every 4 ms.

[Special symbol and special electric role control processing]
In the special symbol and special motorized product control process, the main control program first executes the first and second starting opening winning process (step S6110). In the first and second starting opening winning processes, the main control program determines whether the first starting opening switch 3022 detects the gaming ball and the first starting opening 2101 receives the gaming ball, or The game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 2109, and it is determined whether the game ball is accepted in the second start opening 2102.

  Next, the main control program first determines whether the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and when the processing flag is 0, the variation control process is executed (step S6130). Note that, for example, the processing flag being 0 indicates that the start condition is satisfied for the start storage information that has already been stored in the start storage information storage area described above. In this variation start process, the main control program performs setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not a predetermined winning condition is established as a lottery for winning a big hit, etc. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to 1.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 1 (step S6140). If the process flag is 1, the main control program executes a variation pattern setting process (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, a mode is defined in which the main control program variably displays the first special symbol (special symbol) using the first special symbol display 1185 each time the start condition is satisfied. The second pattern is defined in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means) or the second special symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed using the second special symbol indicator 1186 The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means), and then the processing flag is updated to 2. In addition, this fluctuation pattern represents the fluctuation time etc. from the start of fluctuation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) in either the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 until the stop display. ing.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 2 (step S6170). If the process flag is 2, the following process during variation is executed (step S6180). In this fluctuation processing, the main control program monitors the fluctuation time already set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S6150) by the timer, and when it times out, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1185 The variation display of the special symbol using the special symbol display 1186 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the main control program determines that the jackpot condition of the jackpot game is satisfied in the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation start process (step S6130) described above and is elected, the processing flag is updated to 3. If the main control program determines that the winning condition of the small hit game is satisfied in the jackpot lottery in the variation start process (step S6130) described above and the winning is performed, the processing flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main control program has not won any jackpot conditions in the jackpot lottery, the processing flag is updated to zero. In this case, the main control program is re-executed from the fluctuation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 3 (step S6190). If the processing flag is 3, the main control program executes jackpot game preparation processing (step S6200). In this jackpot game preparation processing, the main control program operates the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, and performs processing to determine the mode of the jackpot game, and this decided jackpot game Set the mode (for example, the number of rounds), and operate the character continuous operating device to update the processing flag to 4.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 4 (S6210). If the processing flag is 4, the following jackpot game processing is executed (step S6220). In this jackpot game processing, the main control program is one of the number of rounds as the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S6607), the number of times of opening, the opening time and the number of game balls limited in number. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to zero. Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as a set jackpot game, and in the first special game, the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A While executing and restricting the opening operation of the other opening / closing member 2106B, in the second special game, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member 2106B is executed and the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A is restricted.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether the process flag is 5 (S6230). If the processing flag is 5, the following small hit establishment process is executed (S6240). In the small hitting establishment process, the main control program sets the number of times of opening and the opening time to control the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B as a small hitting game mode. After that, the main control program sets one open / close member 2106A or the other open / close member 2106B only once for a very short time, for example, as a small hitting game mode based on the set open frequency and open time. It controls to make it a closing state later, and updates a processing flag to 0 after that. In this case, in the next timer interrupt process, the variation start process (step S6130) is performed again. This small hit game is not a game involving the operation of the condition device like a big hit game, but it is a kind of a big hit game and one open / close member 2106A or the other open / close member 2106B is opened for a very short time The game of the aspect very similar to the game (so-called short opening jackpot game) to be said.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control program performs the small hitting establishment process S6240 depending on whether the processing flag is set to 5 in the special symbol and special motorized symbol control process shown in FIG. It is possible to choose one. That is, when the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 5, the main control program can be made to have gaming characteristics including small hitting games, but when the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 4, small hitting games are not included. It can be playable. As such, since the special symbol and the special electric combination product control process includes a program code for the small hitting game which can be executed according to the value of the processing flag as in the small hitting establishment process S6240, It is considered not to be unused program code. That is, even when the small hit establishment process S6240 is not executed, the main control program executes another branch process provided in parallel instead. With such a program configuration, the program code can be made common even between models having different gameplay of whether or not the small hitting game is included, and, for example, different models depending on whether or not the small hitting game is included. There is no need to develop each program code in between.

  As described above, the main control program selectively executes one of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the processing flag described above, and thereafter, , This special symbol and special motorized prize control processing ends.

[First and second starting opening winning process]
FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting hole winning processing (step S6110) shown in FIG. The first and second starting hole winning process (step S6110) is a process related to the determination as to whether or not the game ball has been received in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, and that the acceptance has been made. The process concerning the update of the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is included on the condition that is determined.

[Entering the game ball to the second opening]
First, the main control program determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 2109 (step S6201), and when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 2109, the second start port It is determined that the gaming ball has been accepted in 2102 (hereinafter, also referred to as "start winning") (the starting condition of the second special symbol is established), and the following step S6202 is executed. In step S6202, the main control program acquires various random number values (such as a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number) for the second special symbol lottery, triggered by the start winning.

  It is to be noted that this main control program is combined with a jackpot determination random number etc. triggered by the start winning, instead of acquiring a jackpot game mode determination random number value (for example, a round number determination random number value), that is, a special winning opening 2103 Before deciding on the release mode, first determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the stop symbol, and advance the game. Although the details will be described later, this main control program detects that the game ball has passed the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. The random number value for the jackpot game mode determination is acquired with the opportunity.

  At the same time, the main control program determines whether the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes a second start hold storage process and a hold history update process described later.

  First, in the second start reserve storage process, the main control program is acquired when the game ball is received by the second start opening 2102 as a start storage information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot symbol, etc. ) Are stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in a second start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, while being associated with the special symbol type and the order of suspension (step S6203). That is, the main control program relates to the second special symbol, at least one start memory information indicating that although the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied yet, the start condition is satisfied for each type of special symbol A predetermined number is stored in the second start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, second start storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in such a manner that the order can be specified. Therefore, when the gaming ball is newly accepted by the second starting opening 2102, that is, when the starting condition is satisfied (at the time of starting winning), the main control program has one or more second starting stored information as the second starting stored information. If not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately established, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a starting opening winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the second starting opening 2102 in the transmission information storage area, and the starting opening in the command transmission process described above The winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Furthermore, the main control program triggers that new second starting memory information is stored in the above-mentioned second starting memory information storage area (that is, the number of second starting memory information of the second special symbol increases). It is determined whether or not the following advance determination condition is satisfied (advance condition determination lottery means). As the precedent determination condition, any of the above-described jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area or any of them It can be illustrated that the random number value stored in the combination is read out and the read random number value matches the second special symbol pre-reading judgment value stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter referred to as It is called "preceding judgment lottery").

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the second special symbol pre-reading judgment value, while the read random number value is the second special symbol If it does not match the pre-read determination value, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute a command for sending a command for preceding determination, which will be described later, when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, whereas the following command sending processing for a preceding determination is performed when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Run.

  In this advance determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command for instructing the start of the advance determination effect for the second special symbol in the transmission information storage area In the command transmission process, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following pre-reading information in the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is, for example, a special symbol 2 type prefetching command, a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern prefetching command, a special symbol 2 fluctuation type prefetching command, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation distribution table information prefetching command Or any one of these, or any combination thereof, is a command that collectively refers to, and includes prefetch information described later. The pre-reading information includes the symbol type of the second special symbol, the variation pattern number, the information on the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  The special symbol 2 type pre-reading command includes information on the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol type referred to here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a small hit, a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is lost It is information which shows whether it is any of. The special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern look-ahead command includes information on the fluctuation pattern number of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command includes information on the variation type number of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 variation distribution table information prefetch command includes variation distribution table information of the second special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, as described later, the effect control program that receives the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command described above uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command to determine the advance described later A presentation can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding” The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition is satisfied is suppressed (preceding determination suppressing means) over the determination suppression range. That is, in the main control program, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the advance determination suppression range after the gaming state is shifted from the probability fluctuation state to the normal gaming state in this manner. It restricts the writing of (preceding determination instruction command). Thereby, in the command transmission process (see FIG. 74) described above, transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command to peripheral control board 4140 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the holding history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second holding number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Furthermore, in the pending history update process, the main control program causes the lower special symbol storage display 1187 to have a start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the first or second start storage information storage area. Hold display mode (eg, lighting, etc.) on the upper special symbol memory display 1184 or the lower special symbol memory display 1187 in such a manner that the at least one first or second starting memory information can be specified over the time until establishment (Blinking or extinguishing), and thereafter, the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized among the at least one first or second start storage information stored by the first or second start storage information storage means Stop the derivation of the pending display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized, and the first or second start From 憶 information storage area erasing start memory information to be the first (pending digestion control means).

[Entering the game ball to the first opening]
On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port switch 2109 in step S6201 or when the value of the second hold number counter is 4 as the upper limit value in the process of step S202, the main control program Determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening switch 3022 (step S6205). When the detection signal is output from the first starting opening switch 3022, the main control program determines that the gaming ball has been accepted in the first starting opening 2101 (hereinafter, also referred to as "start winning") (first special symbol) The following step S6206 is executed. In step S6206, the main control program acquires various random number values for the first special symbol lottery (random number for big hit determination, random number for big hit symbol, etc.) triggered by the start winning, and the above-mentioned start memory information storage area The value of the number of first start storage information (corresponding to the above-mentioned various random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area among them (hereinafter also referred to as the “first hold count counter”) is less than 4 which is the upper limit Determine if there is any. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

  In this first start reserve storage process, the main control program specifically acquires start storage information (such as a jackpot determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random number value) acquired by the game ball being received by the first starting opening 2101. It is stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in the first start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, while being associated with the type of symbol and the order of suspension (step S6207). That is, the main control program relates to the first special symbol, at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol Are stored in the first start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, first start storage information storage means) up to a predetermined number in a manner that can be specified. Therefore, when the gaming ball is newly accepted by the first starting opening 2101, that is, when the starting condition is satisfied (at the time of starting winning), the main control program has no first starting memory information but also the first starting memory information. If not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately established, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a starting opening winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the first starting opening 2101 in the transmission information storage area, and starts starting opening winning in the command transmission processing described above The command is sent to the peripheral control unit 4140. In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, it is possible to execute an advance determination effect, which will be described later, using the starting opening winning command.

  Furthermore, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first starting memory information is stored in the above-mentioned first starting memory information storage area (that is, the number of first starting memory information of the first special symbol has increased). It is determined whether or not the following advance determination condition is satisfied. For example, any of the above-described jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area It can be mentioned that the random number value stored in any combination is read out and the read random number value matches the first special symbol pre-reading judgment value stored in the main control ROM described above ( Hereinafter referred to as "preceding judgment lottery").

  By the way, as the preceding determination process described above, the main control program executes the preceding determination lottery based on the game information determined based on any predetermined random number as described above, and the lottery result is displayed. It is configured to be able to transmit to the peripheral control board 4140 as an advance determination instruction command (any one of a special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command and a special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command) (prefetching first step determination).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the first special symbol pre-reading judgment value, while the read random number value is the first special symbol If it does not match the pre-read determination value, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute a command for sending a command for preceding determination, which will be described later, when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, while transmitting the preceding determination command as follows when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Execute the process

  In this advance determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command for instructing the start of the advance determination effect for the first special symbol in the transmission information storage area, and has already been described. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following pre-reading information in the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command is, for example, a special symbol 1 type prefetching command, a special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern prefetching command, a special symbol 1 fluctuation type prefetching command, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation sorting table information prefetching command Or any one of these, or any combination thereof, is a command that collectively refers to, and includes prefetch information described later. The pre-reading information has a symbol type of the first special symbol, a variation pattern number, a variation type number, and variation distribution table information.

  The special symbol 1 type pre-reading command includes information on the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol type referred to here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a small hit, a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is lost It is information which shows whether it is any of. The special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern look-ahead command includes information on the fluctuation pattern number of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command includes information on the variation type number of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes fluctuation distribution table information of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, as described later, the effect control program that receives the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command described above uses the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command to determine the advance determination described later. A presentation can be performed.

  In the peripheral control board 4140, the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command indicates whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the prefetch display effect based on the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command or not, an expectation of a big hit Whether to execute or not is determined according to the ratio. Although the pre-reading effect is the effect continuously across a plurality of changes, whether or not to perform this pre-reading effect is determined based on the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command transmitted at the time of starting opening winning combination, and at that timing At the same time as determining which display mode to use from a plurality of display modes of effects performed continuously, a display mode that changes across multiple changes is also determined (a scenario is determined in advance).

  As the display mode, based on the result of the preceding determination process, the effect is immediately started based on the result of the preceding determination process, and based on the result of the preceding determination process, in the case of the change, the effect is kept waiting to be executed. It can be exemplified that the continuous effect is started with the start. Furthermore, even when it is determined that such a continuous effect is to be started, the display mode includes a mode that does not change in any way to the state before starting the continuous effect (for example, a normal display mode , Normal display mode, red specific display mode, gold special display mode). In addition, although such continuous rendition changes in stages, the expectation for the big hit with the display mode to be displayed next to the previous display mode may be the same, or in the raised display mode It may be. Furthermore, the display mode in which the jackpot expectation level is lowered may be executed. In such a case, the expectation of the big hit may actually be higher than that of the display mode in which the degree of expectation gradually increases (that is, it corresponds to "the breaking of the law"). In addition, as a final form of continuous advance notice, a mode in which the player can distinguish information represented by the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command, for example, a big hit decision, a definite variation decision (transition decision to probability fluctuation state), and a ball out It may be an aspect such as confirmation.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability fluctuation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period from this transition time point (hereinafter The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition is satisfied is suppressed (preceding determination suppressing means) over the preceding determination suppression range. That is, the main control program causes the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the advance determination suppression range after the gaming state shifts from the probability fluctuation state to the normal gaming state in this manner. By suppressing the writing and setting of (preceding determination instruction command), transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is suppressed in the above-described command transmission process (see FIG. 74). Here, "suppression" indicates not only reducing the frequency but also regulating.

  On the other hand, in the holding history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the start storage information storage area) (step S6208). Furthermore, in this hold history update process, the main control program continues until the start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is established in the upper special symbol storage display 1184 And the at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area, the hold display mode (for example, lighting, blinking or extinguishing) being derived in such a manner that the at least one start storage information can be specified. When the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized among them is satisfied, the derivation of the pending display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the priority to be prioritized from the start storage information storage area Clears the start memory information (hold and digest control means).

  On the other hand, the main control program reaches 4 when the gaming ball is not accepted to the first starting opening 2101 in step S6205 above, or the counter value of the first hold number counter reaches the upper limit value in the processing of step S6206 If yes, the first and second starting opening winning process is ended.

[Change start process]
FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation start process shown in FIG.
In this variation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two pending number counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301) . Here, the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of first start storage information (random number value) stored in the first start storage information storage area of the above-mentioned start storage information storage area The value of the pending number counter of the second special symbol indicates the number of second starting memory information (random number value) stored in the second starting memory information storage area among the starting memory information storing area described above . If the main control program determines in step S301 mentioned above that the value of the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is both 0, then the starting conditions for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both. After judging that the variation start process is ended and the special symbol and special electric combination product control process is ended, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above. The fluctuation start process may be the same as the precedent determination process, and the same result may be obtained as the determination result at the fluctuation start time and the precedent determination time, so that the result may be a prefetch effect command.

  On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6301 that the value of the number of held counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not 0 at all, the start condition is at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is assumed that the start condition is not satisfied but the so-called start suspension state is established. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the holding number counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of pieces of second start storage information is 0 (step S6302).

  If it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start storage information is not zero, the main control program acquires second start storage information (second special symbol random number value) (step S6303), and then the second start described above A predetermined number of pieces of second start storage information stored in the storage information storage area are shifted and stored (step S6304). Specifically, second start storage information (random number value) stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas obtained by dividing the second start storage information storage area into a plurality of main control programs. Are stored in the (n-1) -th storage area. As a result, at least the storage area is freed, and it is possible to store new starting storage information of the second special symbol in the storage area where the free space is generated. At the same time, the main control program sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" (step S6305) and subtracts one from the value of the second special symbol hold number counter, that is, the number of second starting memory information (step S6306). At the same time, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the lower special symbol storage indicator 1187 so as to indicate the number of second starting storage information after the subtraction (the number of reserved second special symbols). In addition, about the special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way, after the said fluctuation | variation start process is complete | finished, for example, when a processing flag is updated to 0, it is reset.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start storage information is zero, the main control program acquires the first start storage information (first special symbol random number value) (step S6307) before the above A predetermined number of pieces of first start storage information stored in the first start storage information storage area are respectively shifted and stored (step S6308). Specifically, four storage areas (first to fourth sections) are provided in the first startup storage information storage area and the second startup storage information storage area, respectively. In each of these storage areas, a jackpot determination random number storage area in which a jackpot determination random number value is stored, a jackpot symbol random number storage area in which a jackpot symbol random number value is stored, and a reach determination random number value A random number storage area for reach determination to be stored, and variable pattern random numbers 1 and 2 storage areas in which variable display pattern random number values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored are provided.

  The main control program divides the first start storage information storage area into a plurality of n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) second start storage information (random number value) stored in the storage area Shift and store in the storage area of As a result, at least the storage area is freed, and new start storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the free space is generated. At the same time, the main control program sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag (step S6309), and subtracts "1" from the value of the number of pending counters of the first special symbol, that is, the number of second starting memory information. (Step S6310). In addition, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the upper special symbol storage display 1184 so as to indicate the number of first start storage information after the subtraction (the number of pending first special symbols). The special symbol variation flag thus set to "2" is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0" after the variation start process is completed.

  In the above manner, although the same determination processing as prefetching is performed for determination at the start of fluctuation, the information determined by prefetching is the same again without using all or part of the information. By repeating and executing the process, it is possible to obtain the same result as in the pre-reading determination. It should be noted that even if the same process is executed at the start winning game and the change start to determine the game information, the pre-read command (special symbol storage pre-reading effect command) and the command at the start of the change are information of each other In order to be distinguishable from each other, the same command value is not used.

  Next, the main control program confirms the contents of the jackpot flag, and determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state (step S6312). If the gaming state is not the probability fluctuation state, the main control program selects the probability fluctuation function non-operation jackpot determination table set with a low probability of becoming a jackpot (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability fluctuation state, the main control program selects the probability fluctuation function activation determination table which is set to have a high probability of becoming a big hit (step S6314).

  Next, the main control program determines whether the first special symbol random number value or the second special symbol random number value (hereinafter, also referred to as "big hit determination random number value") acquired in step S6303 or step S6307 based on the selected table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the value (random number value corresponding to the jackpot) matches (step S6315). That is, the main control program determines whether a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the establishment of the start condition (lottery means). When it matches the jackpot value, the main control program is a jackpot type of the jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number value, that is, a jackpot type (state type relating to the gaming state) to operate at least one of the probability variation function and the time saving function. Whether or not is judged (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the determined jackpot type to ON (step S6317). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination random number value acquired in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described later. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process.
First, the main control program determines which jackpot flag is ON (step S6401). If it is determined that one of the jackpot flags is ON, the main control program executes jackpot variation pattern table setting processing (step S6402). In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern table (big hit variation pattern table as winning variation pattern table) for making a big hit is set, and a variation for making a big hit if the winning condition is satisfied. A pattern (wining variation pattern) is determined (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6401 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means, and has already been stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control internal RAM and the start condition is satisfied. A reach condition as a condition to execute an effect (reach effect) that implies that a predetermined winning condition may be established for stored information, that is, that a special lottery may have been won, or this reach It is determined whether the specific reach condition is satisfied among conditions (step S6403). It should be noted that the reach condition referred to here is a reach effect in the normal mode in which the player is relatively weak and unlikely to expect the player to be elected to the special lottery because the possibility that the winning condition is established is relatively low. An example of a normal reach as an example of the reach effect of a specific aspect that is relatively likely to hold a player relatively strongly an expectation that a winning condition has been established relatively high and a special lottery has been won. It is a condition for any one of the example super reach to be implemented. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such determination is also referred to as "reach lottery".

  By the way, the main control program stores the probability of winning such a reach lottery, that is, the probability that the reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as "the probability of winning a reach lottery") in the start storage information storage area of the main control internal RAM. It is controlled to change gradually according to the number of finished start-up memory information. Specifically, if the main control program is, for example, 1/15 if it is 0, it is 1 according to the number of start memory information (so-called number of reservations) in which the winning probability of the reach lottery is stored. Is controlled to 1/14 in the case of two, 1/13 in the case of two, 1/10 in the case of three, and 1/10 in the case of four.

  Furthermore, the main control program writes a reach lottery result command including the result of the reach lottery described above in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above, and transmits it in the command transmission processing described above (random number range information control means ). That is, the main control program corresponds to each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM instead of transmitting the determination reach random number itself to the peripheral control board 4140. And send a reach lottery result command regarding the result of the reach lottery. In addition, this reach lottery result command corresponds to the first special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the start memory information on the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the start memory information on the second special symbol Is a command name that generically

  If it is determined that the above-described reach condition is satisfied, that is, if it is determined that reach effect is to be performed, the main control program executes reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting processing (step S6404). In the reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a fluctuation pattern table (reach loss fluctuation pattern table) for executing reach effect and losing.

  At this time, the main control program determines whether the time saving function is operating. If the main control program determines that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is operating (time saving), the variation for executing the above-mentioned reach effect and causing a loss A variation pattern table (a short time reach loss variation pattern table as a short time non-winning variation pattern table) including a pattern (short time non-winning variation pattern) is set (variation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is not operating (in the non-time saving mode), the above-described reach effect is executed and A fluctuation pattern table (non-short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table as a non-time short non-election fluctuation pattern table) including fluctuation patterns (non-time short non-election fluctuation patterns) for setting is set (variation pattern setting means). In the following description, the short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table and the non short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table will be collectively referred to as a "reach loss fluctuation pattern table". In the present embodiment, the main control program is not only "big hit", "small hit" and "loss" as the lottery result of the lottery, but also "time loss" function is activated on the variation pattern of the special symbol. It is separately controlled whether it is "non-short time loss" as "loss" in the state where it has not been done and "time loss" in the state where the time saving function is operating.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not established, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed, the main control program executes non-reach losing variation pattern table setting processing (step S6405). In the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (non-reach loss variation pattern table) in which a loss effect is not performed. A plurality of types of non-reach loss variation pattern tables are prepared in association with each other according to a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, a table in which shortening variation is easily performed when the number of reservations is a predetermined value or more It has become.

  Thus, when it is determined that the reach condition is not established, the main control program similarly determines whether the time reduction function is operating, and whether the time reduction function is operating as described above. The variation pattern table to be set may be changed in accordance with. That is, when it is determined that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is operating (time saving), the main control program does not execute the above-described reach effect but does A fluctuation pattern table (time shortening non-reach losing fluctuation pattern table as a time shortening non-election fluctuation pattern table) including fluctuation patterns (time shortening non-election fluctuation patterns) for setting is set (a fluctuation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not established as described above, and the time saving function is not operating (in the non-time saving mode), the above-described reach effect is not performed and the loss is made A fluctuation pattern table (non-time short non-reach non-reach lost fluctuation pattern table as non-time short non-election fluctuation pattern table) including fluctuation patterns (non-time short non-election fluctuation pattern) for setting is set (variation pattern setting means).

  The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), and the pattern command of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol thus determined and the winning information A command is written and set in the transmission information storage area (step S6411). Hereinafter, the pattern command and the winning information command are collectively referred to as "variation pattern command". The pattern command of the variation pattern includes information on the variation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes a hit result on the jackpot.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets, in the timer, a value of fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the fluctuation pattern table set as described above (step S6412). That is, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, the main control program changes the jackpot fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern table. Set to timer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the small hitting fluctuation pattern table, the main control program performs the small hitting according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the small hitting fluctuation pattern table. Set the fluctuation time for the timer.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table, the main control program corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the short time reach loss fluctuation pattern table, Set the fluctuation time for short time reach in the timer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the non-short reach-loss fluctuation pattern table, the main control program responds to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the non-short-time reach loss fluctuation pattern table Set the fluctuation time for non-time short reach in the timer. As described above, even when the lottery result of the special lottery is "loss", the variation time of the special symbol is made to differ depending on whether or not the time saving function is activated.

  Here, the main control program manages the basic fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time as data of 2 bytes each as the fluctuation time of such special symbol, and the maximum fluctuation time which is the total value of these times is managed It is set as 262.144s (65536x4ms) x 2 = 524. 288s, and the variation time of the special symbol of twice the length is realized than before when those times were managed by 1 byte respectively.

  When the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, next, the main control program sets the special view LED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When the special view LED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is identified based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above, triggered by the establishment of the start condition. At least one of the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) starts the variable display consisting of the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs according to the determined fluctuation pattern (Symbol variation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 2 (step S6414), and ends the variation pattern setting processing as described above.

  As described above, when set in the variation pattern setting process, the main control program causes the pattern command and the winning information command to be written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. It is read out and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

[Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart of an example of the process during variation shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the timer in step S6412 (see FIG. 100) described above has timed out (step S6501), and the fluctuation time set in the timer is timed. If it is not up, the process is finished.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time set in the timer has timed up, the main control program sets the special view LED operation flag set to ON in step S413 described above to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program causes the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display) in accordance with the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above. Means to stop variation display (variation of special symbol) consisting of variation pattern of lighting, extinguishing or blinking of 7-segment LED using at least one of the means), and according to the above-mentioned established condition, the said variation The stop symbol consisting of is displayed (symbol variation control means). That is, the main control program starts the variation display of the special symbol triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition after the satisfaction of the start condition, and determines the winning condition triggered by the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern thereafter. A stop symbol according to the result is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program writes and sets a decision stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended and the predetermined stop symbol has been fixed. The main control program reads the decision stop command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140 in command transmission processing included in timer interrupt processing executed every 4 ms. Thus, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variably displayed has been determined.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S6504). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 3 (step S505), and ends the fluctuation processing.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when the game ball is accepted by the start opening and the start condition is satisfied, the start memory information (hereinafter also referred to as a hold ball) whose start condition is already satisfied is not present. The variation display of the special symbol is started, and the stop symbol is displayed when the predetermined variation time has elapsed. In addition, in such a general gaming machine, after establishment of the start condition, a special lottery is executed thereafter, and when it is won in this special lottery, transition is made from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state (already existing See the first reference mentioned)). In this way, when the gaming state has shifted, for example, the game content associated with the stored holding ball before the transition of the gaming state may be executed after the transition of the gaming state. It also seems likely that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the processing flag is updated to 3 as described above (that is, triggered by, for example, transitioning the gaming state), it is determined that the main control program is shifted next. After writing a command (hereinafter referred to as a "transition destination command") representing a playing state into the transmission information storage area, the main control program then executes this transition destination command to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92) Send to As will be described later, the main control program maintains the gaming state as the normal gaming state when the winning condition is not established, but when the winning condition is established, the main controlling program responds to the established winning condition from the normal gaming state. It shifts to an advantageous gaming state, and then shifts to a normal gaming state (gaming state control means). Therefore, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 a transition destination command indicating that the game state has been shifted to the peripheral control board 4140 in response to the transition of the game state (transition state gaming state notification means) . On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, based on the transition destination command received from the main control board 4100, in consideration of the transitioned gaming state, the player is less likely to feel discomfort due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition. Control the rendering operation.

  Usually, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a normally causes the main control board 4100 to execute the rendering operation without receiving any special restriction when the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied.

  As a first example to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a transition destination command from the main control board 4100, the fact that the gaming state has shifted based on the transition destination command is Since it can be grasped with certainty, the main control board 4100 side controls the execution of rendering operations such as the preceding determination rendering effect and the reach rendering described above under the control of the main control board 4100. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the rendering operation to give a sense of discomfort to the player due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition.

  On the other hand, as a second example for making it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a of the peripheral control board 4140 is based on, for example, the start condition based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 4100. If the game state at the first point of time when the start condition is met is different from the game state at the second point of time when the start condition is met for the start memory information for which the is satisfied, the rendering operation is performed in consideration of the transferred game state. It may be controlled.

  In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140 that receives the transition destination command later, when the gaming state is shifted, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can immediately grasp that the gaming state is shifted, so the transition is made. It is possible to control the rendering operation so that the game content interlocked with the gaming state does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 4100, and for example, when it is determined that the next gaming state is the probability change and the time saving state, predetermined winning conditions for the stored start storage information. In the case where it is not a winning class that activates the probability fluctuation function (in the case of a so-called normal jackpot), the above-mentioned prior determination effect is generated for the next and subsequent start memory information stored subsequent to the previous start memory information. It may be regulated not to execute.

  By the way, the state in which the processing flag is 3 indicates that the variation display of the special symbol is in the processing stage where it is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won. Although not shown in the flowchart, along with the processing of updating the processing flag of step S6505 to 3, 0 is set as an initial value in a status identification flag for identifying a gaming state in the jackpot game preparation processing described later.

  The main control program was established using the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) according to the special symbol that was variably displayed as described above A stop symbol corresponding to the winning condition will be displayed (stop symbol control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6504 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 0 (step S6508), and ends the fluctuation processing. In this case, since the main control program does not involve the transition of the gaming state, the main control program regulates the writing of the transition destination command to the transmission information storage area. Note that the fact that this processing flag is 0 indicates that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which fluctuation is stopped so that it is indicated that the jackpot has not been won.

[Big hit game preparation processing]
FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation processing shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether the situation identification flag is 0 (step S6621). As described above, when the processing flag is updated to 3, the value of the situation identification flag is set to 0 in the situation identification flag.

  As described above, this situation identification flag is a flag for identifying the game state in the jackpot game preparation process. For example, a situation identification flag of 0 means initialization, a situation identification flag of 1 means explanation interval effect, and a situation identification flag of 2 It means that the game mode determination process is in progress, and that the situation identification flag is 3 means that the jackpot start interval effect is in progress.

  When the jackpot game preparation process is first executed, the status identification flag is set to 0, and the main control program writes and sets the explanation interval effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6622). The main control program transmits the described interval effect command set in this manner to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the timer interrupt process which is executed around every 4 ms in the command transmission process described above. Next, the main control program sets an explanation interval effect timer (step S 6623), sets 1 in the status identification flag (step S 6624), and ends the jackpot game preparation processing. The timer value set in the explanation interval effect timer is decremented by one in the timer subtraction process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control program every 4 ms.

  Here, after the display effect that the result of the drawing of the special symbol is a big hit is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 with the explanation interval effect mentioned above, when the big hit is not a big hit of a specific type ( That is, it is an effect of explaining the game procedure until the jackpot game is actually started on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the jackpot of the normal type is actually started. When the jackpot is a jackpot of a specific type, in addition to the display effect to the effect that the jackpot is a jackpot, a display effect that a jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed is also performed on the gaming board-side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  By the way, the next processing cycle of the jackpot game preparation processing is 4 ms later. If the processing flag is 3 and it is determined that the situation identification flag is not 0 in step S621 described above as a result of setting 1 in the situation identification flag, the main control program determines whether the situation identification flag is 1 or not (Step S6625). In this case, since the situation identification flag is set to 1, the main control program determines whether the explanation interval effect has timed up (step S6626). If the explanation interval effect has not timed out, the main control program ends the jackpot game preparation processing. Hereinafter, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and YES in step S6625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 1 of the status identification flag until the explanatory interval effect times out. A processing routine that determines step S6626 as NO is repeatedly executed.

  When the timer of the explanation interval effect is timed up in step S6626, the main control program starts the operation of the condition device on the assumption that the explanation interval effect is finished (step S6627). Next, the main control program determines whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S6628), and when the time saving function is operating, stops the operation of the short function at this time (step S6629).

  On the other hand, when the time saving function is not activated, the main control program writes and sets a gate effective effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6636). The main control program reads out a gate enable effect command from the transmission information storage area in command transmission processing which is a part of timer interrupt processing executed every 4 ms, and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140. The peripheral control unit 4140 can recognize that the execution of the gate effective rendering, which will be described later, is permitted in response to the reception of the gate effective rendering command. Furthermore, the main control program sets 2 in the status identification flag (step S6630), and ends the jackpot game preparation processing as described above.

  Here, the gate effective effect means that the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the sorting unit 2550 become effective after the above-described explanation interval effect is finished (by the sorting detection sensor 2580L and the sorting detection sensor 2580R It is an effect display for notifying the player of the detection of the game ball by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). Although the details will be described later, for example, a display prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game shown in FIG. 78 to be described later is performed as the gate effective effect, as shown in FIG. It is possible to give a display indicating that the present is the timing of the harahara type, and a display showing that the present timing is the timing of the pounding type as shown in FIG. 80 described later.

  As described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when winning in the jackpot lottery, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention. That is, the peripheral control unit 4140 having received the gate effective rendering command, the display screen (see FIG. 78) to the effect that the effect control program prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game is to be executed (see FIG. 78). After being displayed on the side liquid crystal display device 1900 or while displaying the display screen, it may be displayed that it is possible to take a break before the big hit game.

  On the other hand, the processing flag described above is 3 and the situation identification flag is set to 2. As a result, in the jackpot preparation process for the next cycle, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and NO in step S6625. Then, the process proceeds to step S6631 to determine whether the value of the status identification flag is 2 (step S6631). In this case, since the situation identification flag is set to 2, the main control program determines YES in step S6631 and performs the following jackpot game mode determination process (step S6632).

[Big hit game mode decision processing]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process shown in FIG. 97, and FIG. 104 is an example of a table used in the jackpot game mode determination process.

  In the jackpot game mode determination process, the main control program is for the jackpot game mode decision triggered by the left gate passage of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the right gate passage of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R is detected Obtain a random number value (random number value for round number determination). The main control program includes the acquired jackpot game mode determination random number value (round number determination random number value), and the jackpot flag of the type in the flag ON state (jackpot flag of a specific type or jackpot flag of a normal type); Based on the left and right of the passed gate, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined.

  In this jackpot game mode determination process, the main control program first determines whether or not the delay of the gaming ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor, that is, the gaming ball passes through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creation means 2586 It is determined whether or not it has been (step S6071). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creation means 2586, the main control program determines whether the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (step S6072).

  When the game ball is detected as delayed in step S6071, the main control program does not determine the presence / absence of detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580L even if the game ball passes the left gate 2575L. That is, when the game ball is detected as delayed in step S6071, the main control program invalidates the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L even if the game ball passes the left gate 2575L.

  In step S6072, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R does not detect that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R, the main control program ends the jackpot game mode determination process and the jackpot game preparation process and the timer. Return to interrupt processing and execute.

  Hereinafter, until the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects the gaming ball, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the situation identification flag, and determines NO in step S625. A determination is made in the step S6631. In the jackpot game mode determination process, a determination process in the step S6071 is made in the YES, and a determination routine in the step S6072 is repeated.

  On the other hand, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects that the gaming ball has passed the right gate 2575R in step S6072, the main control program determines that the big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, the big hit flag turned on in step S6317 is a specific type It is determined whether or not it is the jackpot flag of (step S6073). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON in step S6073, the main control program determines the jackpot game mode with reference to the right gate 2575R of the table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6074). That is, the main control program changes the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) after the change time after the start condition is established for the current start memory information. The stop symbol corresponding to the established winning condition is displayed, and when the winning condition is established, thereafter, transition to the advantageous gaming state according to the established winning condition from the normal gaming state as described later (Playing state control means). For example, the main control program causes the transition to the first special game state when the established winning condition is the first winning condition, and the second special when the established winning condition is the second winning condition. Transition to the game state (game state control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6073 that the jackpot flag of the specific type is not ON (that is, the jackpot flag of the normal type is ON), the main control program refers to the right gate 2575R of table A in FIG. Are determined (step S6075).

  Here, as can be seen by referring to table A in FIG. 104, when the gaming ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the gaming detection sensor 2580R detects the gaming ball), the left gate 2575L is used as the gaming ball Although the mode of the jackpot game to be executed differs depending on when the character passes (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game is the same (( It does not have to be the same as a perfect match, as long as the game is not lost).

  In addition, when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the main control program makes 50% each of the 6 rounds of big hit games and the 12 rounds of big hit games Determined by the probability of On the other hand, when the game ball passes the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the main control program makes 50% each of the 2 rounds of big hit games and the 16 rounds of big hit games Determined by the probability of

  If the delay is not detected in step S6071, that is, if it is not determined that the gaming ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creation means 2586, the main control program causes the distribution ball to be left It is determined whether the gate 2575L has been passed (step S6076).

  If it is not detected at step S6076 that the game ball has passed the left gate 2575L, that is, if no game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines that step S6076 is NO and the jackpot game mode is determined. After the process, the process returns to the jackpot game preparation process and is executed, and further the jackpot game preparation process is ended, and the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms.

  Thereafter, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the status identification flag until the distribution detection sensor 2580L detects the gaming ball, and NO in step S6625. A determination is made in the step S6631. In the jackpot game mode determination process, the process routine in the step S6071 is determined to be NO and the process routine determined in the step S6076 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball has passed the left gate 2575L in step S6076, ie, the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines that the flag is in the big hit flag, ie, in step S6317. It is determined whether the jackpot flag turned on is the jackpot flag of the specific type (step S6077). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S6077), the main control program determines the jackpot gaming mode with reference to the left gate 2575L of the table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6078).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6077 that the big hit flag of the specific type is not ON (that is, the big hit flag of the normal type is ON), the main control program refers to the left gate 2575L of Table A and executes the big hit game. An aspect (in this embodiment, the number of rounds) is determined (step S6079).

  When the execution mode (the number of rounds in the present embodiment) of the jackpot game is determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 or step S6079, the main control program starts the operation of the bonus continuous actuation device (step S6080). . Next, the main control program determines whether or not the probability change function is in operation, triggered by activation of the accessory continuous operation device (step S6081).

  If it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is in operation, the main control program stops the probability variation function in step S6082 and executes step S6083 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6081 that the positive variation function is not operating, the main control program skips step S6082 and directly executes step S6083.

  In step S6083, the main control program sets the operation mode of the big winning opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 and step S6079 (step S6083).

  With the operation mode of the big winning opening 2103, for example, in addition to the maximum number of rounds of the round game in which the big winning opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 in each round game The opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the big hit game is set such as the upper limit number (for example, 9 pieces) and the opening and closing operation time limit of the opening and closing members 2106A and 2106B in each round game.

  Next, the main control program is a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, a round information command in which the determined number of rounds is indicated, and the jackpot game indicated that the jackpot game is already being played. A flag, etc. are set (step S6084).

  Although the details will be described later, the main control program transmits the big hit start command and the round information command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (see FIG. 240) described above, thereby playing the game. In the board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the display effect during the big hit game is selectively executable as the effect associated with the determined number of rounds. become.

  As described above, the main control program does not detect passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) even if the explanation interval effect timer is up, to the jackpot game The progress is stopped, and the next process is not executed in the jackpot game mode determination process. That is, even if it is determined in the process of step S6315 that the jackpot is determined and the condition device is activated (step S6604), the main control program proceeds to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate instead of advancing the jackpot game as it is Until the passage of the gaming ball to 2575R) is detected (steps S6072 and S6076), the big hit game is stopped.

  As described above, if the player touching the display screen of FIG. 76 or FIG. 77 does not hit the game ball to the sorting unit 2550 (right-handed) by the player's intention, the jackpot game Because it does not start, it is easy to notice immediately that the message that the player can take a break before the start of the jackpot game is displayed immediately, and makes the player recognize the content of the message more reliably be able to. In addition, as the display timing, when the player is passionate about playing the game, the game can be interrupted temporarily by the player's intention, and it is possible to take a break or go to the toilet in this state.

  After that, when the game ball to the sorting unit 2550 is fired by the player's intention, the main control program detects the game ball by the sorting detection sensor 2580L or the sorting detection sensor 2580R, and based on this, the big hit game Is canceled in step S6072, or YES in step S6076, and any one of step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, and step S6079 is executed to achieve a big hit. It is possible to determine the execution mode (the number of rounds) of the game and to start the jackpot game in the determined execution mode. As a result, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention, and since the moment of starting the jackpot game can not be missed, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lost.

  Next, the main control program sets a jackpot start interval presentation command (step S6085), sets the jackpot start interval presentation timer to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6086), and sets 3 in the status identification flag (step S6087). ), End the jackpot game mode determination processing and return to the jackpot game preparation processing to be executed, and further terminate the jackpot game preparation processing, and execute the timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. The jackpot start interval effect is a display effect to be performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 between the activation of the accessory continuous operation device and the start of the opening and closing of the opening and closing device 2106, for example, It is a display effect etc. which show that a big hit game is started.

  The jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process. Thereby, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect display indicating that the big hit game is started is displayed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  By the way, according to steps S6621 to S6629, the main control program continues to operate the time saving function until the explanation interval effect time has elapsed in the series of lottery processes concerning the execution of the big hit game. That is, despite the fact that the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that the jackpot has been made, the time saving function is activated by suspending the operation start of the condition device while the explanatory interval effect is being performed. If yes, while the explanation interval effect is being executed, entering of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 2102 is facilitated.

  When the jackpot game mode determination process described above is completed, the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is set to 3. As a result, in the jackpot preparation process for the next cycle of 4 ms, the main control program sets NO in step S6621. In step S6625, the determination is NO, and in step S6631 the determination is NO, and the process proceeds to step S6633, and it is determined whether the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6084 has timed up (step S633).

  If the jackpot start interval effect has not timed up, the main control program determines NO in step S6633, hunting the jackpot game preparation processing, returns to the timer interrupt processing routine, and executes. Hereinafter, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 3 of the status identification flag until the jackpot start interval effect time-up, and determines YES in step S625. In step S6626, a processing routine that determines NO is repeatedly executed.

  When the jackpot start interval effect is timed up, the main control program determines YES in step S633, and updates the processing flag to "4", assuming that the jackpot start interval effect has ended (step S6634). Next, the main control program sets 0 in the status identification flag to return to the initial value (step S6635), ends the jackpot game preparation processing, and returns to the timer interrupt processing routine for execution.

[Big win game processing]
Next, the jackpot gaming process (step S6220) executed when the processing flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot gaming process.

  In the big hit game processing described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the big winning opening 2103 is open (step S6801). When the special winning opening 2103 is open, the main control program determines whether the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 (the elapsed time after opening) has reached the opening / closing operation time limit set in step S6803. Is determined (step S6802). If it is determined that the open / close operation time limit has elapsed, the main control program closes the open / close members 2106A and 2106B to close the special winning opening 2103 (step S6804).

  However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet elapsed, the main control program causes the same winning opening 2103 to be opened after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls entered is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, nine) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804, and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the open / close operation restriction time set in step S6802 has not yet passed, and the number of gaming balls accepted by the special winning opening 2103 in step S6803 has not yet reached the upper limit, the main control program The big hit game processing is ended while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6801 that the special winning opening 2103 is not open, the main control program determines that the opening number of the special winning opening 2103 by the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B (the number of round games) is the above-mentioned step S6803 (figure It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in step 103) has been reached (step S805). If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program operates the open / close member 2106 according to the winning conditions established as described above, and opens the corresponding special winning opening 2103 (step S6806). End the process.

  On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds in step S6805, the main control program stops the operation of the bonus product continuous operating device to indicate that the winning condition is established It shifts to a state in which the execution of the opening / closing operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2106 executed as the condition is restricted. That is, in this case, the main control program executes step S6807 to step S6812 to store it in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in step S6317 (see FIG. 99), for example. The jackpot game processing is ended after setting the gaming state after the jackpot game on the basis of the jackpot type of the jackpot, which is the trigger of the execution of the jackpot game being played.

  When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the big hit flag and the big hit game flag to OFF states (step S6807) Then, the winning type of the big hit that is the execution trigger of the big hit game is determined (step S6808).

  Here, in step S6808, it is determined whether or not the main control program is a winning type (for example, the jackpot symbol is 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9) for operating the probability variation function. That is, in this main control program, whether or not a probability change transition condition is established to determine whether or not the gaming state (probability fluctuation state) should be relatively high in the probability that the winning condition is established than in the normal gaming state. To determine whether it is (winning probability control means). The main control program changes the probability change state when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, and transfers the transfer destination command to the transmission information storage area as a command representing a game state determined to shift next. Write. On the other hand, the main control program causes the game state to shift to the game state other than the probability change state (winning probability control means) and to determine the next transition when the probability change transition condition is not established (winning probability control means). The transfer destination command is written to the transmission information storage area as a command to be represented. Thereafter, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process (S92) to the peripheral control board 4140.

  That is, the main control program stops the operation of the condition device without operating any of the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function when it is determined in step S6808 that it is not the winning type for activating the probability fluctuation function. S6811). On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is a winning class (so-called probability variation big hit) for operating the probability fluctuation function, the main control program activates the probability fluctuation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition is established to determine whether or not the probability fluctuation state should be relatively high in the probability that the above-mentioned winning condition is established than in the normal gaming state. When the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to the probability change state set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed over the predetermined number of times of change display While this probability fluctuation state is continued while fluctuating display is made, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state if the above-mentioned probability change transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means).

  Next, after activating the time saving function (Step S6810), the main control program stops the operation of the condition device (Step S6811). When activating the time saving function, the main control program selects each time variation pattern table including a variation pattern group whose variation time is shortened from the start of the operation to the number of times of variation of the special symbol determined in advance. The value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set in the timer shorter than the value of the specified fluctuation time in correspondence with the length of the fluctuation pattern determined from the time variation pattern table concerned (time shortening function control means) . In addition, this main control program writes the transition destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command representing the gaming state determined to shift to the next, and then to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92) You may send it. At the same time, the main control program repeats the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the second starting opening 2102 according to a predetermined opening and closing pattern until the predetermined number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is reached. The gaming ball flowing down the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is easily received by the second starting opening 2102. Finally, the main control program sets the processing flag to 0 (step S6812), and ends the big hit game processing.

  In this way, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the large winning opening 2103 in the opening mode according to the winning type of the big hit until the predetermined number of rounds is reached in Step 805, When the game player is in the open state, an instruction is given to the winning ball operation according to the number of gaming balls accepted by the large winning opening 2103.

  Here, in a general game machine, game balls fired in the game area flow down between a large number of nails provided in the game area, and part of them enter the starting opening or the general starting opening On the other hand, the remaining gaming balls are discharged out of the gaming area from the outlet formed at the bottom of the gaming area (the so-called out port) (see the above first reference), but in such a gaming machine, At first glance, depending on the arrangement of features and nails provided in the game area, it may be considered that the circulation of the game ball is unlikely to be a suitable state that should originally be.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, this is solved by the following processing. First, when the above-mentioned winning condition is established, the main control program selects at least one of the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) determined above. After controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning) determined as described above, the winning condition is triggered when the fluctuation time at the time of winning corresponding to the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning. The stop symbol according to is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display are determined when the winning condition is not established and the time saving function is activated. At least one of 1186 (variable display means) is used to control the variation display of the special symbol according to the above determined time variation non-winning time variation pattern, and then the variation time according to the short non-winning variation pattern at this time The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed on the occasion that the fluctuation time has elapsed (symbol fluctuation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display are determined when the winning condition is not established and the time saving function is not activated. After controlling the variable display of the special symbol according to the determined non-time non-winning time variation pattern using at least one of 1186 (variable display means), a variation time (non-time short time according to the non-time short non-winning variation pattern The stop symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed when the non-winning time fluctuation time has elapsed.

  As described above, the variation time of the special symbol according to the big hit, the small hit and the loss as well as the lost time and the short time loss and the non short time loss among the four types (big hit, small hit, time short loss and the short time loss). When can be set, when not winning in the special lottery, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving function is operating, and the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving function is not activated (non-short time Because a fluctuation time difference is intentionally provided between the time when the game is not won and the game ball is easily discharged from the game area when one function is activated according to the setting of both fluctuation times. Because the circulation of the game ball becomes good regardless of the arrangement of the nails, etc., it is possible to improve the performance of discharging the game ball out of the game area (so-called out-performance) as compared with the conventional one. It becomes so that. Specifically, the following effects are exhibited by the following usages.

  First, as the first usage and effect, the special symbol is stopped for 500 ms as an example of the fluctuation time (non-short non-election fluctuation time) in the case of a non-short time loss, while the case of a short time loss (for example, game area If the special symbol is stopped for 1000 ms with the fluctuation time (time reduction non-election fluctuation time) as an example in the so-called right hitting as a gaming state to fire the game ball on the right side of time, the time loss is a non-short time loss Because there is a difference in the stop time of the special symbol of 500 ms, the game ball is fired about an extra minute and it becomes easy for the game ball to be discharged from the game area (outlet located at the bottom) and the collection efficiency of the game ball ( So-called out-performance is improved.

  As a second usage and effect, for example, when it is desired to increase the number of game balls to be fired per unit time, the main control program changes the time when the result of the special lottery is a short time loss (short time not elected If the variation time) is set to 2000 ms as an example, when the gaming ball is fired every 600 ms, for example, about three extra gaming balls are fired, and the out performance is improved.

  As the third usage and effect, for example, if the payout rate of the game ball in a short time (so-called withdrawal rate) is too high, the main control program, the variation time of the special symbol of lost time By setting the time long, it is possible to extend the time zone in which the payout of the game balls is concentrated, and to prevent the withdrawal rate for a short time from becoming too high.

  By the way, the main control program may set the above-mentioned award ball effective period in consideration of detection delay until the game ball entered from the entrance of the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110. (Discharge instruction regulation means). That is, when the main control program has shifted to the first special game state, the open / close member 2106 is closed after the predetermined period elapses from when the open / close member 2106 is opened, and the predetermined period is A winning ball ineffective range period which is a period excluding a winning ball effective period period until the time elapses is set (delivery instruction regulation means).

  In this way, even if the game ball is held for a while for some time inside the special winning opening 2103 or the like, the held game ball is not erroneously detected as being erroneous due to fraud it can.

[15. Precedence determination process]
The effect control program described above analyzes the command received from the main control board 4100 and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in the reception command analysis process described above (command reception means), and the command is the special symbol 1 storage command Or when it is a special symbol 2 storage command, the start hold display mode which implies the lottery result of the special lottery for new start memory information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command triggered by the reception of this command Are derived from the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) (start hold control means).

  That is, if the received command is a special symbol storage look-ahead effect command (special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command), this effect control program is read-ahead included in the special symbol storage look-ahead effect command Based on the information (for example, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol is exemplified), for example, information indicating the type of the jackpot game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command or the special symbol 2 The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is caused to derive a start pending display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery corresponding to the new start memory information corresponding to the stored look-ahead effect command, and thereafter corresponds to the new start memory information When the fluctuation time to start has passed, the derivation of the start suspension display mode is ended. ).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command or the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command is received, the effect control program displays the start / hold display mode (for example, “normally as a hold display mode in which it is difficult to hold an expectation to the jackpot A special start hold display mode (eg, a high start hold display mode is illustrated as a hold display mode which is very easy for a player to expect a jackpot from the beginning or the middle of the above derivation). To execute the preceding determination control to be led out to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (preceding determination control means). Hereinafter, such a function is referred to as "preceding determination control function".

  By the way, even in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the start-up reserve information is already stored when the game ball fired in the game area is accepted by the start-up port and the start-up condition is satisfied, There exists what performs what is called prior | preceding judgment production | presentation until the start condition of the fluctuation display of the corresponding special symbol is satisfied (refer the said 1st reference). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine is provided with means for clearly indicating that the gaming state has shifted, the gaming state shifts as follows after establishment of the start condition, and thereafter, the variation display of the variation pattern of the special symbol If the start condition for starting the game is satisfied, the advance determination effect is executed in the gaming state after the transition, because the effect mode determined in the gaming state before the transition is to be executed. It is also conceivable to give

  However, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the main control program as described above, as described above, from the transition time point Throughout, the transmission of the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command and the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is suppressed. Therefore, the effect control program recognizes that the gaming state has shifted from the probability fluctuation state to the normal gaming state by receiving the high probability end designation command described above, and then the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect as described above Based on suppression of transmission of command (precedence determination instruction command) and special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command (precedence determination instruction command) As a result, the preceding determination by the preceding determination control function over the preceding determination suppression range as a result The control is to be suppressed (preceding determination suppressing means).

  In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the gaming state is shifted as described above, the effect control program starts the main control built-in RAM in the previous gaming state (in the present embodiment, the probability fluctuation state is illustrated). Of the start storage information stored in the storage information storage area, the advance determination effect is not executed for the start storage information of the above advance determination suppression range, so that the advance determination corresponding to the stored start storage information in the advance determination suppression range It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel strange about the effect.

  As such an advance determination suppression range, for example, the maximum storage number of start storage information that can be stored in the start storage information storage area before (or after) the timing when the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state. The number (for example, 4 times) of fluctuation numbers of the special symbol corresponding to the start memory information of a minute (for example, 4 pieces) can be mentioned.

  In addition, as the advance determination suppression range, start memory information already stored in the start memory information storage area at the time of this transition, for example, after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state In this case, the number of times of fluctuation of the start storage information can be cited as many as the number of stored start storage information (for example, 1 to 4 in the case of the present embodiment).

  In addition, or as the advance determination suppression range, instead of or in combination, for example, after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the start storage stored in the start storage information storage area at the time of this transition When the information exists, the number of times of fluctuation of the start storage information can be mentioned (for example, 1 to 4 in the case of this embodiment) of the stored start storage information.

  Further, as the advance determination suppression range, for example, after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area immediately before the transition It may be for one display.

  In addition, as the advance determination suppression range described above, instead of the number of times of variation described above, for example, from the timing when the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, It may be.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol, which are variably displayed triggered by the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the start winning is satisfied, are stopped in a predetermined order However, when the reach condition is satisfied, for example, the middle decoration pattern is variably displayed in a mode in which the left decoration pattern and the right decoration pattern are aligned (corresponding to the above-mentioned reach effect), and the player is The expectation that the decorative symbols may be aligned in a predetermined manner to shift to the advantageous gaming state is enjoyed (see the first reference above). In such a general game machine, due to the relation of the effect, I want to execute reach effect for specific start memory information only at a desired timing and give a strong psychological impact to the player who is in contact with it. Although there is a case, if the reach effect is performed for other start memory information before that, the psychological impact may be weakened.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program controls reach effect by control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a using one of the following two methods (or a combination thereof).

  First, as one method, the effect control program makes the above-described reach condition satisfied, that is, the result of the special lottery may be won, corresponding to the start memory information where the start condition is satisfied. Have a function to execute reach effect suggesting (reach effect control means). The effect control program having such a function is selected for the last start storage information stored in the above-described start storage information storage area based on the reach lottery result command and the win information command received as described above. The condition is satisfied (that is, the result of the special lottery is won), and the random number value for reach determination for the remaining start memory information stored in the above-mentioned start memory information storage area is within the above non-reach range. And (at the same time, it is determined that the winning condition is not established for the remaining start memory information (not selected for the special lottery)), and the reach effect is executed for the last start memory information. Control to execute (execution control means). After that, in the reach effect corresponding to the last start memory information, the effect control program changes the central decorative symbol over the fluctuation time in a state in which the two decorative symbols on the left and right are aligned on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. After the display, the central decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the player is made to recognize that it is a big hit as an aspect in which these three decorative symbols are aligned.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the thunder cloud mode is illustrated as the special game state to be shifted by the effect control program. In this thundercloud mode, the effect control program displays the telop to the effect of being in the thundercloud mode from the left to the right while displaying it in the upper part of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, At the stage where the reach effect is performed using the three central decorative symbols, effect control may be performed that indicates that the possibility of reaching a big hit is high in the start memory information corresponding to the variable display. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed in this thundercloud mode, it is possible to make the player very strongly recognize that it may be a big hit with high probability, and to enhance the interest.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the thunder cloud mode, in the situation where the result of the special lottery is won for the last start memory information, the reach effect can not be executed for the remaining remaining start memory information. It will be. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to weaken the psychological impact given to the player by the reach effect executed in the final start memory information relatively earlier. As a result, the player is psychologically boosted by the strength of the impact in response to the reach effect that is suddenly executed, until the result of the special lottery for the last start memory information is disclosed. The game can be continued while enjoying the expectation of the big hit.

  By the way, in the effect control program, even if the reach condition is satisfied for the remaining start memory information stored in the above-described preceding determination suppression range, the start condition for the stored start memory information is satisfied even if the reach condition is satisfied. You may make it not perform reach production. In this way, for example, even when the gaming state has been shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, for example, when the effect is controlled as if it were the probability variation state as the thunder cloud mode, the advance determination suppression is performed. As the reach effect is prevented from being executed despite the fact that the preceding determination effect is suppressed as described above for the remaining start memory information stored within the range, the player may feel discomfort. It will be further suppressed.

  By the way, even when the reach condition is satisfied for a specific start storage information among remaining start storage information stored in the preceding determination suppression range described above, the effect control program has a start condition for the specific start storage information. Similarly to the above, it is also possible not to execute the reach effect when the above is established. In this way, for example, even when the gaming state has been shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, for example, when the effect is controlled as if it were the probability variation state as the thunder cloud mode, the advance determination suppression is It is more effective to give the player a sense of discomfort because normal reach is prevented from being executed despite the fact that the preceding determination effect is suppressed as described above for the specific start memory information within the range. To be suppressed.

  Further, the effect control program has won the special lottery for the last start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area, and the specific reach condition is satisfied, and the start storage information storage is performed before that. In the case where a special lottery has been won for a specific start memory information among remaining start memory information stored in the area and the reach condition is satisfied, normal reach for the specific start memory information as described above Instead of restricting the execution of, it may be performed as scheduled. In this manner, when a plurality of start storage information including the last start storage information and the remaining start storage information among start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is won in a special lottery a plurality of times However, after entertaining the player with the normal reach performed first, the player can further enjoy the super reach performed later. As a result, even in a fortunate situation in which a big hit is almost continuous, the super reach corresponding to the last start memory information as described above psychologically gives the player an impact on the player, and further without omission, the specific It is possible to maintain the psychological impact on the player of the normal reach which is executed prior to the start memory information in response to the start memory information.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, triggered by the start winning of the game ball, the special symbol is then started to change display and a big hit lottery is executed, and a predetermined winning condition is established and a certain probability transition is made. There is a transition to the probability fluctuation state when the condition is satisfied (see the first reference described above). As described above, a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to such a probability fluctuation state lasts a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as "special time") until the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the big hit game is over. There are those that continue the probability fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as "ST (special time) machine"). In such special time, until the effect control board (corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140) shifts from the probability fluctuation state to the other gaming state according to the effect command received from the game control board (corresponding to the main control board 4100) The special effect (hereinafter, special time effect) is executed over the period. Here, since a large number of pachinko machines are arranged facing each other in each island in a general game hall (hall), the power supplied to each pachinko machine depending on the power supply facilities and the use situation of the electric power Temporarily decreases, resulting in a momentary power outage (hereinafter referred to as "instant outage"). If such a momentary stop occurs unfortunately at a predetermined timing, at first glance, a part of the special time effect as described above is not executed, and a part of the special time effect which should have been enjoyed by all players. There is a possibility that you can not enjoy it.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the effect control program has shifted to the probability variation gaming status as the specific gaming status, after the jackpot gaming status has ended, the special symbol in the probability variation gaming status, for example, is an example of the specific gaming status. The special time effect (specific effect) in which the variable display number of time is predetermined is started. That is, the effect control program controls a special time effect (specific effect) in which the number of times of displaying the variation of the special symbol before the game state shifts to the game state other than the probability change game state is predetermined (specific effect control means) . On the other hand, even if the effect control program temporarily falls into a situation where it is not possible to control this special time effect, the rest of the special time effect is obtained based on the new gaming state information received next, as described later in detail. I am making a presentation.

  Specifically, even when the effect control program temporarily falls into a state in which the special time effect can not be controlled temporarily (specific effect control means), the gaming state is determined based on the remaining number of times information included in the command received next. While remaining the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed before shifting to the gaming state other than the probability fluctuation state, the remaining aspect which suggests the number of times remaining as a part of the special time effect over the number of remaining said grasps The number of effects is executed (remaining number of effects complementing means).

  In this way, for example, even if the effect control program can not control the special time effect temporarily in the peripheral control board 4140 due to the influence of a momentary power failure state, the start of the next special symbol fluctuation display As an opportunity, it is possible to resume the remaining number of times presentation of the aspect which suggests the above-mentioned number of times remaining as the remaining production of the above special time production. A player who has been in contact with such a remaining number of effects may have an impression that such interruption is also a part of the effect when the effect is returned again after the remaining number of effects has temporarily ceased Thus, the influence of the above-mentioned momentary blackout can be made difficult to play.

[16. Delay control]
By the way, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined control entity outputs effect control data and causes a predetermined effect device that has received it to execute an effect operation in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby making the player bored Although it is difficult to feel (see the first reference above), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, it may be considered that it may be necessary to adjust the display timing of the image due to various circumstances, but in such a case The control tends to be complicated since it is necessary to synchronize with the operation timing of the rendering device.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the purpose is to facilitate synchronization with the rendering device without requiring complicated control, and although the details will be described later, the peripheral control board 4140 (rendering control means) is an information storage means. The ring buffer is provided as an example, and a delay control unit is provided as an example of the information output control means. The ring buffer includes a plurality of buffers as an example of a plurality of unit storage areas in which effect control data for controlling an effect operation by an effect device to be described later can be temporarily stored. On the other hand, the delay control unit delays the timing at which the stored presentation control data should be taken out from any predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) of the plurality of buffers by a predetermined delay amount than the original timing (described later) The time required for the data processing for the predetermined display surface portion of the) is taken out, and the above stored effect control data is taken out and output. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

[16-1. Configuration Example Related to Delay Control]
FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an example configuration for delay control. Although FIG. 106 mainly shows an example of a functional configuration for realizing delay control, it also illustrates an example of a configuration regarding hardware related to delay control, for convenience of explanation. It shows.

[16-2. Control on main control board side]
In the main control board 4100, as described in FIGS. 97 to 105, the drop determination unit 4100z receives the game ball in one of the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2102 and starts up. When the detection signal is output from the switch (corresponding to the start SW shown), the above-described start condition is satisfied, while the winning lottery is performed to determine whether the above-described winning condition is satisfied. And the determination result is output to the transmission unit 4100 w as the hit information. The transmission unit 4100 w includes a transmission buffer 4100 ws. The transmitter 4100 w stores the drop information output by the drop determiner 4100 z in the transmission buffer 4100 ws, and performs serial (or parallel) communication with the peripheral control board 4140 when the above-described start condition is satisfied. Output by

  On the other hand, the fluctuation lottery unit 4100 y selects a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the established winning condition from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, triggered by the establishment of the above-mentioned start condition, and selects the fluctuation pattern as the selection result. The corresponding fluctuation pattern command is output to the transmitter 4100 w. This transmission unit 4100 w stores the fluctuation pattern command output by the fluctuation lottery unit 4100 y in its transmission buffer, and the peripheral control board 4140 together with, for example, the above-mentioned fall information, triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition described above. Output according to the serial or parallel communication system.

16-3. Peripheral control board side]
The peripheral control unit 4150 mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is, as a function of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as shown in FIG. 106, a reception having a reception buffer 4150pj for temporarily storing the command output by the main control board 4100. Other than an image system other than the image processing system (for example, at least one system of light output, sound output, and motor drive) besides the section 4150p, the interpreting section 4150q that determines consistency with the command of the reception buffer 4150pj and implements the interpretation In this case, a selection & output unit 4150r that reads data 4150t, a delay control unit 4150s, and a response control unit 4150u are provided.

  As the driver mentioned here, with regard to sound output on the frame side, audio data such as music and sound effects are transmitted through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 The driver IC (not shown) outputs output control data to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 described above with respect to the light output on the frame side, while the audio data transmission IC 4160c that outputs to the frame can be mentioned. Can be mentioned.

  On the other hand, while the driver IC (not shown) which outputs presentation control data to the lamp drive board 4170 described above can be mentioned as the above-mentioned driver regarding the light output on the game board side, the game board Regarding the motor drive on the side, a driver IC (not shown) that outputs presentation control data to the motor drive board 4180 described above can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 4150 reads image control data 4150 w (hereinafter referred to as “drawing list”) as an example of effect control data as an image system, generates a display command, and outputs it to the VDP 4160 a with built-in sound source And a VDP 4160 for reading image data used for displaying an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the image data storage unit 4160z based on the generated display command. Here, in the present embodiment, “image control data” indicates data (so-called “scenario data”) that defines what kind of image is to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the aforementioned schedule). The data is different from the data of the image itself to be displayed. On the other hand, “image data” indicates sprite data used to display an image (so-called “sprite” or the like) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is data read out from liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b as so-called character ROM. .

16-4. Specific method in delay control unit]
[16-4-1. Delay control using pointer (pointer switching)]
FIG. 107 more specifically shows an example of the ring buffer, and is an example of a state in which delay control using a pointer is performed. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a specific method related to the delay control unit 4150 s and the delay control in FIG. In the present embodiment, a ring buffer is given as an example of the delay control unit 4150 s. However, the present invention is not limited to such a ring buffer, and may be a serial buffer such as a so-called FIFO. It may be a buffer in which data is stored in a sequential manner.

  First, the ring buffer 4150 sa includes the 0 th buffer 4 150 sa 0 to the 7 th buffer 4 150 sa 7 (a plurality of unit storage areas), and each buffer 4 150 sa 0 etc. is assigned the start address as the top address of each storage area. Although the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) can be specified as long as only the start address of each buffer is defined, they do not have to have the same storage capacity, but the present embodiment In the form, desirably, for example, storage areas of the same storage capacity are used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each buffer (each unit storage area) will be described as an example of a storage area for the same storage capacity starting from the start address. In order to distinguish each buffer (each predetermined unit storage area), the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) are buffers as identification information of, for example, 0th to 7th, respectively. The number is assigned. In the present embodiment, the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 can be identified separately by the pointers (identifiers) corresponding to the respective start addresses.

  In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to proceed with the display of each frame by the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, for example, a frame interrupt is performed, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is shown in FIG. In the pointer update process, it is first determined whether the pointer needs to be updated (step S1401). Here, the pointer includes a write pointer that points to the start address of the buffer to which the effect control data is to be written, and a capture pointer that points to the start address of the buffer that has already been stored.

  One of the conditions for updating the pointer in this manner is that the frame has progressed, that is, the next frame has been displayed after the frame has been displayed. In addition to the progress of the frame, the fact that a specific condition is satisfied may also be included. As such a specific condition, for example, when rendering control data is set (stored) in one of the buffers, the pointer points although the rendering control data is not stored in one of the buffers. It is possible to prevent the buffer from moving one after another.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the write pointer and the capture pointer need to be updated, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the update so as to increment the write pointer by one (step S1402), and performs the update so as to increment the capture pointer (step S1402). S1403). On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the write pointer and the fetch pointer do not need to be updated, the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the pointer update processing, and repeatedly executes the steady processing described above.

  In the present embodiment, as a condition for updating the pointer in such a manner, for example, the progress of frame display can be mentioned. The update of the pointer may be performed according to another specific cycle instead of according to the progress of the frame display.

  An outline of delay control using a pointer is as follows. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a tries to store certain effect control data in the ring buffer 4150sa, the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas in the ring buffer 4150sa) ), And causes the effect control data to be stored in the specified predetermined buffer, and a write pointer (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding to the start address of the predetermined buffer stored therein) Also, it is managed in association with the stored effect control data). After that, similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a repeatedly stores the subsequent rendering control data group in the ring buffer 4150sa, and at this time, a pointer (identifier that can be specified to distinguish each buffer with respect to each stored rendering control data. Is used to manage the storage order of any of the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 in a predetermined buffer.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the start address for each predetermined period by adding +1 to the pointer corresponding to the start address of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 for each progress of the frame, and this updated start A state in which each of the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 can be specified once is repeated using the address.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the stored effect control based on the pointer at the timing when the stored effect control data is to be taken out from the predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) as the write position described above. The data is specified and taken out from the predetermined buffer (hereinafter also referred to as a "capture position") and output to the driver.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the timing at which the rendering control data already stored in any one of the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (corresponding to the write position) should be taken out is more than the original timing. The above-mentioned stored presentation control data is taken out and output to the driver by delaying for a predetermined delay amount due to the time difference until the stored presentation control data is taken out.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a shifts the position designation for each buffer with respect to the pointer for controlling the designation of the start address of each of the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7, thereby making the above-described predetermined. A delay amount of delay is generated. In addition, about the update method and update timing of a pointer, the pointer which shows the buffer (Hereafter, it is also only called "write position") of the writing position of production control data, The buffer (The following, The same condition may be applied, as an example, to a pointer simply indicating “capture position”.

[16-4-1-1. Delay control by changing capture position]
As a method of setting such a predetermined delay amount, for example, a method can be adopted in which the capture position is obtained and set by performing inverse calculation for the predetermined delay amount from the write initial position by changing the capture position. The details will be described below.

  FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing an example of a write-in control process of effect control data. The write and capture control process is executed, for example, triggered by a frame interrupt. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets predetermined effect control data, for example, in a buffer at a position indicated by the write pointer updated as described above (hereinafter, also referred to as “write initial position”) (step S1501).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines a predetermined delay amount (for example, +2 frames) as a delay amount (step S1502), subtracts the delay amount from the write initial position, and takes in the calculation result to obtain an initial position. And (step S1503).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an acquisition prohibition period as follows as an example of a method of delaying the extraction timing of the stored rendering control data over the time corresponding to the predetermined delay amount. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a predetermined time as a loading prohibition period (step S1504), and then checks whether the loading prohibition period has passed (step S1505). The peripheral control MPU 4150a counts down by one each time the frame advances and becomes 0 when the acquisition prohibition period starts, and the acquisition prohibition period ends. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 takes out the above stored effect control data from the buffer corresponding to the take-in initial position and outputs it to the driver (rendering operation execution means).

  Here, as an example, when the request position (write initial position) is the fifth buffer 4150sa5 and the delay is three buffers, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the 5-3 = 2 as the fetch initial position The buffer (ie, the second buffer 4150sa2) is set. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets three frames as the above-mentioned capture prohibition period.

  In addition, as a method of delaying the extraction timing of the stored rendering control data over the time corresponding to the predetermined delay amount, the method is not limited to setting the acquisition prohibition period as described above, and other methods May be adopted. Specifically, as such a method, for example, a method may be employed in which comparison is performed based on whether or not the loading position is the same as the writing position at which the effect control data is set.

[16-4-1-2. Delay control by changing the write position]
On the other hand, as a method of setting the predetermined delay amount as described above, for example, a method of determining and setting the write position by calculating the delay amount by the predetermined delay amount from the pickup position instead of the delay control by changing the pickup position described above Can also be adopted.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes, for example, a write-in control process of effect control data triggered by a frame interrupt. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds a delay amount to the buffer at the loading position for the new rendering control data, and sets the writing position from the calculation result.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a predetermined time as a capture prohibition period, and then checks whether the capture prohibition period has elapsed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a counts down by one each time the frame advances and becomes 0 when the acquisition prohibition period starts, and the acquisition prohibition period ends. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 takes out the stored effect control data from the buffer corresponding to the taken-in position and outputs it to the driver (rendering operation execution means).

  Here, as an example, when the loading position is set to the third buffer (that is, the third buffer 4150sa3) and the delay is set to three buffers, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is the 3 + 3 = 6th writing position as the writing position. The buffer (ie, the sixth buffer 4150sa6) is set.

  As described above, for the buffer corresponding to the position specified by the difference between the read position and the write position, the content of the buffer is invalidated (transfer prohibition) over the frame display period corresponding to the difference. It is to do.

  As described above, according to the delay control by changing either the loading position or the writing position, the effect control data output as described above can be specified in a manner that the storage order can be specified in the ring buffer 4150 sa. Since it is stored in a predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) of buffers 4150sa0 to 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) and then held for a predetermined period, it corresponds to the above-mentioned capture prohibition period Output latency is constantly generated.

16-4-2. Delay control by data movement]
Each of FIGS. 110 to 112 specifically shows still another form of the ring buffer as an example, and is an example of how delay control by data movement is performed, for example. FIGS. 110 to 112 are diagrams showing an example of a specific method regarding the delay control unit 4150 s and the delay control in FIG. 106, respectively. In the present embodiment, a ring buffer is given as an example, but the present invention is not limited to such a ring buffer, but may be a serial buffer such as a so-called FIFO, or a sequential method unlike the concept of ring. May be a buffer in which data is stored.

  As described above, the ring buffer 4150sa includes the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas). Although the 0th buffer 4150sa to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) do not have to have the same storage capacity, in the present embodiment, for example, storage areas of the same storage capacity are used. It is assumed that there is something. In order to distinguish each buffer (each predetermined unit storage area), the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) are buffers as identification information of, for example, 0th to 7th, respectively. The number is assigned.

  The outline of delay control by data movement is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 110, the peripheral control MPU 4150a places certain effect control data in a predetermined buffer (for example, the 0th buffer 4150sa0) as a predetermined unit storage area among the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7. After storing, when the frame display is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, for example, when a frame interrupt is issued, the effect control data already stored in the 0th buffer 4150sa0 is displayed as shown in FIG. Move to the first buffer 4150sa1. Further, when the frame control interrupt is generated next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a moves the effect control data stored in the first buffer 4150sa1 to the next second buffer 4150sa2. Similarly, every time a frame interrupt occurs next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a repeats as shown in FIG. 112, moves the effect control data from the buffer in which the effect control data has already been stored to the next buffer, and is not shown. Finally, effect control data is read out from the seventh buffer 4150sa7.

  As described above, when it is attempted to store certain effect control data in the ring buffer 4150sa, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to set a predetermined one of the zeroth buffer 4150sa to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) in the ring buffer 4150sa. A buffer (a predetermined unit storage area) is specified, the effect control data is stored in the specified predetermined buffer, and the stored write position is managed in association with the stored effect control data. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the stored effect control data at the timing when the stored effect control data is to be taken out from the predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) as the write position described above. It is configured to be taken out from the predetermined buffer (hereinafter also referred to as "intake position") and output to the driver.

  The above-described ring buffer 4150 sa may have a form in which the number of the plurality of buffers is changed according to the delay amount. In the above-described embodiment, the ring buffer 4150sa adopts the method of specifying the write position and the capture position in the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The write position and the capture position may be always the same. In this way, it is not necessary to manage the loading position and the writing position. As a specific example, for example, when it is assumed that the delay amount is always four frames, the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the fourth buffer 4150sa4 are secured as buffers, while the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 is fixed to the write position At the same time, the fourth buffer sa4 can be fixed at the loading position.

  Although the size of the buffer is secured for the maximum delay, one of the write position and the capture position in the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 may be fixed in order to adjust the delay amount. For example, when the delay amount is four frames, the write position is set to the zeroth buffer sa0, and the capture position is set to the fifth buffer sa5. In this case, the sixth buffer sa6 and the seventh buffer sa7 become unused areas. On the other hand, when the capture position is fixed to the seventh buffer sa7, the write position may be changed according to the delay amount. For example, when the delay amount is five frames, the write position is to be written from the second buffer sa2 instead of the zeroth buffer sa0. Therefore, the zeroth buffer sa0 and the first buffer sa1 become unused areas. Note that the adjustment of the delay amount may be switched when the condition of the game, the variation mode, or the like is met.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to store the presentation control data that has already been stored in a predetermined buffer (corresponding to the write position) of the plurality of buffers at a timing when the presentation control data should be extracted. It is configured to be delayed for a predetermined delay amount due to a time difference until taking out, to take out the stored effect control data and output it to the driver. That is, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a corresponding rendering control data in order to operate a certain rendering device, and a certain amount of delay from when the rendering control data is actually input to the rendering device Is assumed to be occurring.

16-5. Configuration example mainly related to response control]
Next, referring to FIG. 106, a configuration example regarding response control will be described. The above-described response control unit 4150 u (response control unit) satisfies the predetermined condition even before delaying by a predetermined delay amount (corresponding to the above-described “inhibition period of incorporation”) than the above-described original timing. In response to the above, the delay control unit 4150 s (information output control means) stores the above from any one of a plurality of buffers 4150 sa 0 to 4 150 sa 7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) from a predetermined buffer (a predetermined unit storage area). The effect control data of are extracted and output to the driver 4150 v (effect operation execution means). That is, the response control unit 4150 u (response control means) described above is triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition, and a part of the effect devices 4190 (a part of the different effect devices) among the plurality of effect devices 4190 (different effect means) Means) The effect control data (different effect control data) is output from the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 (information storage means) at an earlier timing than the other effect devices 4190 (other different effect means). Then, the rendering device 4190 immediately starts executing the rendering operation based on the rendering control data output to the driver 4150v. As an example of this rendering device 4190, although the details will be described later, for example, any one or a combination of a speaker (sound output means), a lamp (light output means) and a feature motor (feature drive means) may be mentioned. be able to. In the present embodiment, as an example, the rendering device 4190 includes a drive unit (feature motor) that drives based on the rendering control data, and a movable role that operates in a predetermined mode by this drive unit. In addition, the response control unit 4150 u (response control means) described above performs at least a predetermined frame (display surface) of effect control data in at least another effect device 4190 (another different effect means) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. ) Is output according to a predetermined period set based on a period required for data processing for the minute. The predetermined period referred to herein can be, for example, the same period as the period required for data processing for a predetermined frame (display surface).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, a response dedicated buffer may be provided separately from the delay control unit 4150 s (hereinafter also referred to as “delay buffer”) including the plurality of buffers 4150 sa 1 to 4 150 sa 7. As a situation where such a response dedicated buffer is used, for example, it is assumed that a response is required for the effect. As this response buffer, instead of preparing the plurality of buffers 4150sa1 to 4150sa7 as in the above-described delay buffer, for example, a single buffer configuration (not shown) is used. The response buffer waits for completion of the writing of the effect control data to a single buffer, and then causes the driver 4150 v to take out the effect control data as the contents stored in the buffer.

  Moreover, as such a response dedicated buffer, instead of a single buffer as described above, for example, a plurality of buffers may be used. By using a plurality of buffers in this way, it becomes possible to write another effect control data to the next buffer even while taking in effect control data from a certain buffer, such writing It is possible to perform processing and capture processing simultaneously. However, in the case of a plurality of buffer configurations, the time from writing to loading is delayed, so it is necessary to set the number of buffers so as not to impair the response. For example, if double buffering is used so that writing and fetching can be performed simultaneously, there will be a delay for one buffer at the time of the first writing, but no delay from the next fetching. The response can be minimized (or avoided) as much as possible. As a buffer, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), a dedicated buffer may be provided for each effect device.

  Note that the effect control data set in the response dedicated buffer may be switched according to the state of the game, for example, or may be fixed for each effect device. For example, when the button unit 220C of the rendering operation unit 220 is operated as a rendering button, when it is desired to output a sound at the same time as the operation, only rendering control data of a rendering device for voice (for example, a speaker) accompanying the operation of the button unit 220C May be fixed to the response dedicated buffer. In this case, whether to use the above delay buffer or the above response dedicated buffer is managed according to the type of sound.

  In this embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "predetermined condition", it can be mentioned that the operation signal is output according to the operation mode of the button unit 220C (operation means) which can be operated from the outside. The predetermined condition is not limited to the operation of the button unit 220C, but may be triggered by the occurrence of another predetermined event. For example, when it develops to reach (equivalent to a so-called "special reach") which is more likely to give the player a higher expectation of a big hit than a normal reach, or a specific effect starts, such as when a big hit is performed. It may be triggered by

[16-6. Specific example of response control]
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a first example of the response to the player's operation under the premise of performing the delay control, and FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the response to the player's operation under the delay control. It is a figure which shows a 2nd example. FIGS. 113 (A) and 114 (A) respectively show an example of an internal rendering sequence, and FIGS. 113 (B) and 114 (B) each represent a rendering sequence for an operation trigger. An example is shown.

[16-6-1. First example of response]
In the first example relating to the response, for example, the effect sequence serving as the main axis and the effect sequence for the operation trigger are provided in duplicate, and the effect sequence for the operation trigger is made to react immediately with a delay amount of 0. In the first example related to this response, by dividing and preparing the complete set of presentation control data necessary for presentation in advance, although the design burden such as the volume restriction and presentation control data is slightly increased in advance, the player is direct You will be able to get a sense of

[16-6-1-1. Internal production sequence management]
In the first example shown in FIG. 113A, delay control is performed on the effect reproduction mechanism side (corresponding to the above-described delay control unit 4150 s). By adopting such a method, since the delay control is performed on the side of the effect reproduction mechanism, the effect reproduction mechanism itself becomes somewhat complicated, but it is possible to reduce the burden of the work of producing the effect control data.

  First, as is common to the following description, the peripheral control ROM 4160 b or the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab stores a drawing request list having the following configuration. That is, in such a drawing request list, for example, the drawing list 1 corresponds to the first frame, the drawing list 2 corresponds to the second frame, and the drawing list 3 corresponds to the third frame. The fourth frame corresponds to the drawing list 4, the fifth frame corresponds to the drawing list 5, and the sixth frame corresponds to the drawing list 6.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a generates the following display list. That is, in the display list, for example, the drawing list 1 corresponds to the first frame, the drawing list 2 corresponds to the second frame, and the drawing list 3 corresponds to the third frame. The drawing list 4 corresponds to the frame, the drawing list 5 corresponds to the fifth frame, and the drawing list 6 corresponds to the sixth frame.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a interprets the display list, implements cache management and reconstructs the display list, and implements delay control using the delay control unit 4150s, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (A). The delay amount for the frame is generated. In this example, instead of the peripheral control MPU 4150a executing such processing, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a may execute such processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a operates under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and is delayed by four frames by the delay control unit 4150s, that is, it is shifted backward in time by four frame interrupts and drawing data is not Execute drawing processing by writing.

  On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, at the next frame interrupt delayed by the four frames (that is, delayed by five frames), based on the drawing data which has been stored in the frame buffer and corresponds to the drawing list 1. The video is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with a delay amount of five frames from the original timing. When the next frame interrupt is further issued, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image based on the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list 2 delayed by six frames. Furthermore, each time after that, each time a frame interrupt is issued, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has stored it in the frame buffer with a delay of 5 frames as a predetermined delay amount as described above. An image group based on each corresponding drawing data is displayed one after another.

  The selection & output unit 4150r switches between the response side (response control unit 4150s) and the delay side (delay control unit 4150s) as an output destination of the extracted data 4150t. In this case, it is necessary for the selection & output unit 4150r to perform management for switching whether to output the acquired data 4150t to the response side or the delay side. As an example of the management method, for example, the situation of presentation is determined and switched, or information indicating which is to be output is set in advance in the captured data itself, and according to the information, whether the response side It may be switched on the delay side.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the configuration of the peripheral control board 4140 is divided into an image system and a non-image system, and the image system has a response side (response control unit 4150s) and a delay side (delay control unit 4150s). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image system may be divided into the response side and the delay side.

[16-6-1-2. Operation sequence for operation trigger]
In this effect sequence for operation trigger, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), all the effect control data necessary for the sequence for operation trigger are read in advance and configured to respond immediately. According to the effect sequence for the operation trigger, the load when executing the effect control is increased, but the delay amount is zero, so the response can be improved.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a handles the complete set of effect control data for the effect device that should be handled with the player's operation as the effect control data, for example, a screen (such as the liquid crystal display device 1900), a lamp, and a sound output. The part (speaker) uses effect control data for driving the motor of the character.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, as described above, on the assumption that a predetermined delay amount has occurred with respect to screen display on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In response to the operation of the unit 220C, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the delay amount is set to 0 immediately, and the effect control data stored in the response-dedicated buffer (not shown) to be described later is Alternatively, make the response control unit 4150 u take out the above stored effect control data from any one of a plurality of buffers 4150 sa 0 to 4 150 sa 7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) (a predetermined unit storage area), It is output to the driver 4150 v (rendering operation executing means). Then, the rendering device 4190 (rendering means) relating to the screen, the lamp, the sound, and the character performs the rendering operation immediately without waiting for the delay amount based on the rendering control data output to the driver 4150v.

[16-6-2. Second Example of Response]
In the second example regarding response, triggered by the operation of the button unit 220C (operation means) by the player, instead of causing all the rendering devices such as the speaker, the lamp, and the feature motor to be synchronized immediately and responsively By causing only a part of the rendering devices to respond promptly in response to the operation, the player is made to feel good response as an illusion.

  That is, when controlling the rendering operation of the plurality of rendering devices such as the above-mentioned speakers, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the rendering control at the same time so that the plurality of rendering devices are synchronized at the same time in normal times. Although data is taken out, production control data is generated at a timing different from that of the other rendering devices for some of the rendering devices among the plurality of rendering devices, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition (predetermined condition). By taking out, the effect control is started at a timing different from that of the other effect devices (response control means). Therefore, the output timing of only the rendering device requiring the response is advanced, and the rendering device not requiring the response operates in accordance with the timing of the image. For this purpose, for example, the response control means sets different timing before the elapse of the data processing period for a predetermined display surface described later. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the response control means causes the information storage means to obtain some of the effect means among the plurality of effect means before the period required for the data processing on the predetermined display surface to be described later elapses. Output the presentation control data.

  First, comparing the first example and the second example described above, first, the first example shown in FIG. 113 described above is limited to an image (corresponding to the screen shown) and pre-reading It can be grasped as things. In the case of the first example, it is necessary to prepare a drawing list etc. in advance for operation and non-operation. Although FIG. 113 specializes in an image (corresponding to the screen shown) to the last, there is no need to specialize in an image in this way. On the other hand, it can be said that the second example shown in FIG. 114 includes (sound, lamp, and character) other than such an image.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the response control unit 4150 u (the response dedicated buffer) need not necessarily include a plurality of buffers (a plurality of unit storage areas), and may be configured by a single buffer. Also good.

  In the second example, when compared with an example (the first example) in which the work load is large when producing the effect control data, it can be said that the work load can be reduced in the points described later. First, in the second example, as in the first example, it is somewhat difficult to control the video without any delay at all, so that it is possible to include some video to make it easier. A part or all of the effect devices relating to something other than the image of the subject are immediately made to respond in response to the operation of the player. For example, the image can be delayed from the moment the button unit 220C (operation means) is operated, but the sound is output immediately and the lamp outputs the light immediately. As a result, it is possible to exhibit an effect as if the response of the entire effect increased as an illusion. On the other hand, since it is possible to produce effects such as a full flash and an enlargement on the screen (video), it is possible to exert an effect as if the response is improved while not increasing the degree of difficulty of implementation.

(1) Internal effect sequence management The internal effect sequence in the second example shown in FIG. 114 (A) is the internal effect sequence in the first example described above (see FIG. 113 (A)) Similarly, although the delay amount of the video is 5 frames and the effect reproduction mechanism is somewhat complicated, the work load in producing the effect control data is small. That is, since the delay can be freely performed only by the driver (buffer) management shown in FIG. 114A, it is not necessary to consider the delay amount for each effect. For this reason, according to the second example shown in FIG. 114 (A), it is possible to reduce the work load when creating the effect control data.

(2) Effect Sequence for Operation Trigger In the case of the second example shown in FIG. 114 (B), for example, only the effect apparatus for which preliminary preparation is unnecessary is made to immediately respond to the operation. In the case of the second example, the delay amount is 0 frame, the response is good, and the workload on producing the effect control data is also small.

  According to the embodiment as described above, when controlling the rendering operation of the plurality of rendering devices, the rendering control is performed at the same time so that the rendering control is performed by synchronizing the plurality of rendering devices 4190 at the same time in normal times It is premised to retrieve data. Under such a premise, in the peripheral control board 4140, a timing at which the peripheral control MPU 4150a establishes a predetermined condition is a timing at which some of the plurality of rendering devices 4190 differ from the other rendering devices. By extracting the effect control data, the effect control is started at a timing different from that of the other effect devices. In this way, the player who was accustomed to the effect that was originally executed with a delay amount of a predetermined delay amount suddenly of the effect device triggered by the establishment of the above-described predetermined condition (predetermined condition). You will feel that the response has improved and you may be surprised by the sudden movement of the rendering device, and the interest of the game will be improved.

16-7. Frame delay]
By the way, in a general conventional pachinko machine, in addition to a game control board (which corresponds to the main control board 4100 (claim control means in claim 1)) for controlling a game operation, an effect control board for controlling an effect operation. The effect control board (peripheral control board 4140 (corresponding to "effect control means" in claim 1)) is sometimes used as material image data (hereinafter referred to as "character data") used to display an image. ) As well as the so-called character ROM in which material image data is temporarily stored in advance, as well as the previously described material image RAM (primary storage unit) as well as a graphic chip. Some have VDP.

  In recent years, although effects in games tend to be diverse and colorful, the speed at which data is read from the character ROM is relatively low, which limits the material images that can be displayed in one frame, There is a risk that the player's interest may be lost without being able to perform display effect processing using a wide variety of material images.

  The storage capacity of the material image RAM (primary storage unit) with high read speed may be increased as a measure to cope with the low speed of data read from the character ROM, but various types of display will be realized as in recent years. It is inevitable that material image data of the character ROM is required, and that the storage capacity of the primary storage unit should be increased in proportion to the increase of the storage capacity of the character ROM. Was unavoidable.

  Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment suppresses the storage capacity of the primary storage unit by delaying the drawing process in units of frames for a predetermined number of frames from the start timing of the frame process (for example, Even when adopting character data (material image data) for several frames, and an inexpensive storage means with a low reading speed as a character ROM, a wide variety of visual memories can be provided without giving visual discomfort to the player. It has become possible to perform display effects using a display image.

  Furthermore, as described later, the amount of delay of drawing processing in frame units (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “frame processing”) may be made variable based on the effect image control command from the main control board 4100. , When a display effect with many types of characters to be displayed (for example, reach, particularly a super reach effect, a notice display effect for displaying various types of advance characters etc during a symbol change, a display effect during a big hit game) is executed In this case, the delay amount of the frame processing is increased to suppress, for example, so-called display omission of characters, frame skipping (frame omission) and the like. On the other hand, when executing the display effect in the normal gaming state where the number of character types to be displayed is small, it is noticeable that the frame processing is delayed in the monotonous effect screen if the delay amount of the frame processing is kept large Since it is impossible to avoid the player's frustration and discomfort, it is decided to reduce the delay amount of drawing processing in frame units.

  First, frame processing involved in drawing a character will be described. In the drawing command or request (drawing list) of each frame of the screen generation schedule data, for example, an identification number (corresponding to the sprite number described above) representing a material image drawn in the same frame, its drawing mode, each material It contains information necessary for drawing a material image on a frame, such as coordinate information (4 vertex management, XY coordinates, scaling ratio, rotation angle, etc.) on the frame of the image. A plurality of screen generation schedule data is provided corresponding to a command from the main control board 4100, for example, the variation pattern command described above. From the data, one or more screen generation schedule data are selected, determined or acquired based on the variation pattern command.

  FIG. 115 is a table of the correspondence between the frame and the drawing list when reproducing the fluctuation of the display screen, which is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4160 b or the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab. This drawing list is interpreted in frame units, and drawing commands or requests are executed in frame order. The drawing list 1 corresponds to the first frame, the drawing list 2 corresponds to the second frame, the drawing list 3 corresponds to the third frame, and the drawing list 4 corresponds to the fourth frame. , The fifth list corresponds to the fifth list, and the sixth list corresponds to the sixth frame. A group of drawing lists corresponds to the “drawing request list”, and the screen generation schedule data described above includes the drawing request list.

  FIGS. 116A to 116D show an example of a timing chart of the drawing process. In FIGS. 116A to 116D, they are used by peripheral control MPU 4150a (corresponding to the CPU shown) and VDP 4160a (corresponding to VDP shown) at the processing timing of each frame. The drawing request list (and the drawing request list that has been processed, etc.) is shown aligned vertically. Here, FIG. 116 (A) has the same contents as FIG. 115 described above, so the description will be omitted. Note that the words “drawing list” shown in FIG. 116C and FIG. 116D indicate not the drawing list itself but data (image data) generated based on the drawing list.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a selects the drawing request list for display control of the video at the timing of starting the drawing processing of each frame, and selects the drawing list 1 etc. as the corresponding drawing list from the peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab It acquires in order and interprets the contents, and as shown in FIG. 116 (B), it is composed of the interpreted drawing lists (drawing list 1 ′, drawing list 2 ′,..., Drawing list 6 ′, etc.) Create or extract a display list to be

  Furthermore, according to the display list created / extracted, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to execute rendering by reading necessary material images from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b or the material image RAM for each frame. The drawing data is generated, and the drawing data including the material image is stored in the frame buffer as described later. The material image RAM is an example of a temporary storage unit used like a cache, and a group of material image data in frame units is controlled by liquid crystal and sound based on the corresponding specific drawing list among the above-mentioned drawing lists. This is a type of memory for temporarily storing instead of reading out from the ROM 4160 b.

  Although it appears that the sound source built-in VDP 4160a can not directly manipulate the material image data group on the cache area of the material image RAM, for example, a controller and a ROM are provided between the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and the material image RAM. Thus, the controller can also operate the group of material image data on the cache area of the material image RAM by the control of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. The cache controller and the ROM may be built in the tone generator built-in VDP 4160 a.

  The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 displays the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160 b (corresponding to the character ROM) or the material image data group read out from the material image RAM on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (image rendering means) A frame buffer (VRAM) that can be stored as drawing data to be used is provided. This frame buffer adopts a so-called double buffer configuration, and even while drawing data is being written to one frame buffer (not shown), the display device is based on the drawing data already written to the other frame buffer (not shown). Images are to be displayed.

  While the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data using the read necessary material image data and stores it in one frame buffer, while the drawing data is stored in the other frame buffer, as shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 116, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a video composed of each frame while performing drawing processing with a delay of one frame period (corresponding to "reflect on screen" shown in FIG. 116D). .

  Next, reading of character data from the liquid crystal as the character ROM and the sound control ROM 4160 b will be described. For example, this type of character ROM often does not correspond sufficiently to random access, etc. As a result, the reading speed of stored data is not as high as that of the material image RAM, so many characters (material images) When trying to display on the screen, the built-in VDP 4160a can not read out all the characters required to display the screen from the character ROM within the processing period of one frame, and the character is dropped from the display screen. There was a high risk of occurrence.

  In particular, when the display screen starts to fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 4100, it is necessary to display many characters on the screen, and this kind of defect is noticeable to the player It will be. In the screen display in the super reach etc., the player has an interest in the game due to the appearance of a rare character etc. However, if there is a disadvantage such as the lack of the display of the character, it leads to a loss of interest . As described above, the same applies to the notice display effect for displaying the notice character and the like of various modes during symbol change, and the display effect during the big hit game.

  FIG. 117A (1) schematically shows a change in the number of characters to be displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress (# 1 → # 2... → # 9...) In the frame. In frame # 1, it is first shown that a plurality of characters belonging to group A and a plurality of characters belonging to group B are necessary, and in frame # 2, a plurality of characters belonging to group C It is shown that a plurality of characters belonging to the group D and the group D are required, and that a plurality of characters belonging to the group E are further required in the frame # 3. Furthermore, it is shown that a plurality of characters belonging to the F group are required, and that a plurality of characters belonging to the G group are further required in the frame # 5, and the frame # 6 In addition, in the H group It has been shown that a plurality of characters are required to be. A series of variations of the display screen are formed by frames # 1 to # 6. A boundary line A100 shown in FIG. 117A indicates a threshold of the maximum amount of character data that can be read out from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b within a period of one frame. Therefore, in the first frame # 1, it is shown that the reading for the B group characters is insufficient.

  As shown in FIG. 117A (2), in frame # 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the data of the character of group A from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, stores this in the material image RAM, and the period of frame # 2. , Read out the character data of group B and the character data (C ') of part of group C which could not be read out from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b during frame # 1, and store them in the material image RAM. During the frame # 3, the remaining character data (C ′ ′) of the C group and the character data (C ′) of the D group that could not be read out from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b during the frame # 2 are read. Is stored in the material image RAM, and during the frame # 4, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b Kuta data is read and stored in the material image RAM, and during period # 5, character data of the F group and G group are read out from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and stored in the material image RAM. In period 6, character data of H group is read out from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and stored in the material image RAM, whereby material image data of a series of fluctuation (A120) is made from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b It is temporarily stored in the image RAM.

  Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can store the character data (A, B) necessary for the first frame of the screen display in the material image RAM when the period of frame # 1 and frame # 2 elapses, frame # 3 Thereafter, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a can read the character data (A, B) from the material image RAM and store the drawing data in the frame buffer. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a can take in character data (A, B) within one frame processing period (within frame # 3 period) as shown in FIG. 117A (3) by having random access to the material image RAM. it can. Then, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is a processing period of frame # 4, and character data (C (C '+ C "), D) necessary for the second frame (frame # 2: FIG. 117A (1)) of the display screen It can be fetched from the image RAM.

  That is, if the peripheral control board 4140 delays the loading of the material image necessary for the drawing process on the frame by a predetermined frame (for example, at least 2 frames in the example of FIG. 117A) from the original timing, Even when all the character data necessary for drawing on the screen can not be read out from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, the material image RAM can display all the material images without the risk of displaying the material images. As described above, when a delay occurs in frame processing due to the double buffer method, the actual frame processing delay is a value to which this delay is added.

  FIG. 117B is a timing chart showing a drawing process in the case where storage of a material image in the material image RAM is executed prior to drawing of the material image in the frame from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a checks a frame delay control flag which is information in which a delay amount of a frame is set. The frame delay control flag is set, for example, in basic control data for executing the drawing process, or in the drawing data of the screen generation schedule data or the leading frame of the drawing request list.

  The frame delay control flag is for controlling an aspect of the frame delay processing described above, and is constituted of, for example, 2-bit control information. For example, the first bit determines the necessity of frame delay, and the second bit determines whether the frame delay is fixed or variable. If the character ROM has high performance and there is no risk of delay in reading character data, or if there is no shortage of character data, such as when the data amount of characters displayed on the screen is small, a frame delay flag is set in advance. A control flag that does not require frame delay processing may be set in the first bit of. If the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that this control flag is set, it does not perform processing to delay the already described frame in the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, when frame delay processing is required, the peripheral control MPU 4150a further refers to the second bit to determine whether the frame delay amount is to be fixed or variable. In the case of fixing the frame delay amount, the delay amount which does not cause a shortage in the character displayed in one frame is determined in advance, and the predetermined delay amount is fixed and fixed during the frame processing. Delay frame processing by the amount of delay.

  When making the delay amount of frame processing variable, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, for example, responds to a command from the main control board 4100 (a command for controlling an effect image such as a variation pattern command) to the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like. The amount of delay is determined with reference to the stored table data. For example, in the case of a display mode in which the amount of displayed characters is small, the frame delay amount is set to zero or in a small amount of delay, and in the case of a display mode in which the amount of displayed characters is large, the frame delay amount is set. increase. The former aspect is, for example, a normal effect image, and the latter aspect is, for example, a special effect image for attracting the attention of the player such as reach. Therefore, by making the amount of delay of frame processing variable based on the command from the main control board, the amount of delay of frame processing is determined according to the contents and attributes of the display effect, as described above, When it is necessary to reduce the display effect of the character, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience such as the lack of display of the character, and in the case of a monotonous display effect, make the delay of the frame processing inconspicuous, and maintain the interest for the player's display effect. can do.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sequentially acquires the corresponding drawing lists from the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab as shown in FIGS. Interpret and generate / extract display list sequentially. The peripheral control MPU 4150a reads a plurality of material image data necessary for drawing from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the display list, and stores the read material image in the material image RAM.

  The material image data group expanded in the material image RAM is erased from the cache area of the material image RAM or left in the cache area according to the usage history by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. For example, when certain material image data is to be expanded in the material image RAM, it is determined whether or not the material image data is already expanded in the cache area, and if it is expanded in the cache area The control is performed so that material image data is not newly expanded, and when the image is not expanded, control is performed so that the material image data is newly expanded in a predetermined arrangement manner. Furthermore, when the frequency of use of the material image data expanded in the cache area is lower than a predetermined threshold value, control is performed such that the material image data is automatically erased from the cache area.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a interprets the display list (FIG. 117B (B)) and reconstructs a new display list (FIG. 117B (C)). For this reason, since the material image data group necessary for display has been rearranged from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to the material image RAM, the storage position (readout position) of the necessary material image data group is changed. This is to allow the control MPU 4150a to grasp the reading position (address) of the material image data group. Note that such reconstruction may be performed by the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source instead of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117B (C), the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to execute drawing processing. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a starts the drawing process while grasping the storage position of the necessary material image data group in the area of the material image RAM based on the reconstructed display list ((drawing list 1 ′)...) The timing is delayed by a predetermined number of frames (if frame delay is required, it is assumed to be delayed by two frames based on FIG. 117A), and the necessary material image data group is stored in one frame buffer of the double buffer configuration. Then, the drawing process is performed (FIG. 117B (D)). Next, at the timing of the next frame processing, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the drawing data of the other frame buffer for which drawing processing has already been completed (corresponding to “screen reflection” shown in FIG. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 117B (D), a delay of one frame period is generated for each drawing list 1 ′ ′ and so on. As a result, as shown in FIG. The processing of the corresponding frame is displayed with a delay of 3 frames Note that when the double buffer configuration is adopted as described above, each frame cycle is compared with the case where the single buffer configuration is adopted. By repeating the same processing thereafter, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source can display an image corresponding to each drawing list 1 shown in FIG. The display device 1900 is repeatedly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes frame delay processing accompanying the prior capture of character data from the character ROM to the material image RAM, but VDP may be able to perform this. As described above, for rendering based on character data for VDP, reading of character data from the character ROM is rate-limiting. Therefore, VDP has a function to execute frame delay, and VDP monitors the processing status of character data such as the speed of reading character data from character ROM, and can not read necessary amount of character data within one frame period. As described above, the delay of the drawing on the frame buffer and the display of the character on the screen based on the drawing data on the frame buffer is delayed by a predetermined frame as described above. By doing this, it is possible to reliably prevent a display defect of a character or the like without exerting a load on the peripheral control MPU 4150a and expanding a colorful screen including the display of many characters.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the frame processing is delayed in order to eliminate the delay in reading out the character data from the character ROM, but in order to improve the interest of the player accompanying the image display effect, The frame processing may be intentionally delayed as an effect. For example, when the main control board 4100 sets a variation pattern having a high expectation of a big hit, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines a delay of frame processing by lottery using a random number and the like, and delays the display of the screen on the player. Delays the processing for a number of frames that can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit, for example, by intentionally making the player feel a sense of discomfort based on the display before reaching the change of the reach effect screen continuing for a while.

[17. How to Eliminate Touch LCD Abnormality]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, there are machines equipped with various devices in order to make it difficult for the player's interest to be exhausted (see the first reference). Such devices are generally subjected to initial processing at power-on and are subsequently driven continuously in a defined operating manner. On the other hand, in the game hall (hole), not only the noise is easily generated constantly because a large number of game balls are transported, but also in the game machine, not only the flow of the game balls but also the circuit and power supply noise. It can also occur. At first glance, depending on the type of device described above, it may be considered that the device does not operate in the above-described operation mode under the influence of such noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the effect control program is an operation mode (for example, 5 times) where the pressing operation unit 405 (operation means) is pressed based on an operation signal from a switch not shown. In response to the determination that the game panel is operated (hereinafter referred to as "the reset condition is satisfied"), the upper portion of the game board is partially reset without resetting the game board liquid crystal display device 1900 (one device). The side liquid crystal display 246 (the other device) is reset. At the same time, in the effect control program, the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 246 may be reset in response to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition to be described later and the satisfaction of the above-described reset condition. .

  Such predetermined conditions can mention that the main body frame 4 or the door frame 5 is open | released with respect to the outer frame 2 as a 1st example, for example. First, as described above, the main control program (game control means), under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the door frame open command triggered by the door frame 5 being opened (specific frame open While outputting the state command), the main body frame open command (specific frame open state command) is output when the main body frame 4 is opened.

  When the effect control program receives a command (command) output by the main control program under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 (command receiving means), this command is a door frame open command or a main body frame open command. Determine if there is. The effect control program assumes that the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied when this command is a door open command or a main body frame open command.

  It is desirable that such a predetermined condition is basically a condition that can be satisfied when a special operation permitted as a privilege by a store clerk (hall) is made. Such predetermined conditions are not limited to the door frame 5 or the main body frame 4 being opened as described above, but may be other situations.

  In the present embodiment, as such predetermined conditions, it is more desirable that the door frame 5 be opened than the main frame 4 be opened. Because, if something goes wrong, the salesclerk of the game arcade generally makes the game ball accepted to the general winning opening 2104 or the like as an apology for the interruption of the game after the handling of the trouble is finished. Since many prize ball services are provided to the player in many cases, one operation of opening the door frame 5 can serve both to fulfill the predetermined condition and to prepare for the prize ball service. is there.

  More specifically, in the effect control program as described above, such a prescribed condition is satisfied, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operating means) performs the prescribed operation based on the above-described operation signal. It is determined whether or not the manual reset condition is satisfied by being operated in the mode (five times pressed) (manual reset condition determination means). The manual reset condition is not only that the pressing operation unit 405 has been operated in the prescribed operation mode as described above, but also that, for example, other operations known only by the game arcade clerk have been made. good. The above-described effect control program maintains the control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means) triggered by the establishment of such a manual reset condition, while the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 246 ( The second display means is reset (display initialization means). That is, the effect control program controls the sound source built-in VDP 4160a by the peripheral control MPU 4150a and controls the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as usual using its channel CH1, while simultaneously controlling the channel CH2 (see FIG. 21). And outputs the reset signal to the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 246.

  Then, the upper-dish liquid crystal display 246 which has received the reset signal executes the predetermined reset process, restarts, and then operates in the above-described operation mode. As a result, the upper-dish liquid crystal display 246 which has become inoperable in the prescribed operation mode, which should normally be present, is not disturbed by the simple operation, particularly even when the positive change function is in operation. In an aspect, it can be restored to operate in the defined operational aspect.

  By the way, the effect control program sets a reset allowable period as a period to allow the reset signal from the channel CH2 (see FIG. 21) of the built-in VDP 4160a to the upper liquid crystal display 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. You may set it. As such a reset permissible period, a period in which the start information storage information is not stored in the start storage information storage area for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol (a period in which the number of so-called reservations is 0) It can be mentioned. Specifically, the effect control program is based on at least one of the special symbol 1 storage command and the special symbol 2 storage command received from the main control board 4100, and the starting memory information storage corresponding to the variable display waiting of the special symbol is It is determined whether it exists, and when the start display information storage waiting for fluctuation display is not present, the reset allowable period is set, while when the start storage information storage waiting for fluctuation display exists, the concerned The output of the reset signal described above is regulated without setting the reset allowable period. In this case, when the so-called number of reservations is not 0, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 246 does not receive the reset signal and performs the prescribed reset process. It does not give the player who is looking at the plate side liquid crystal display device 246 the fear that the number of reservations has become unclear or that the starting memory information (starting holding) itself has disappeared. Can be

  By the way, the effect control program is not triggered by such reset processing of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 being triggered by establishment of the automatic reset condition, for example, after the automatic reset condition is met, the above start condition is It may be made to carry out at the timing to which a decoration pattern is changed and displayed in response to a start condition being satisfied (variation display of a special symbol is started) after being satisfied. In this way, even when the reset process is executed, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 that starts the variable display of the decorative symbol displays nothing for a moment so that the jackpot is expected (hereinafter referred to as By giving recognition that "blackout effect" is executed, and giving the feeling as if it were a part of the effect, the interest of the player is lowered when the reset process is executed. It can be difficult.

  In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are devices equipped with various detection devices such as sensors in order to make it difficult for the player's interest to be exhausted (see the first reference above). . Such a detection device generally performs sensitivity adjustment as an initial process at power-on, and then operates at that sensitivity. However, while a large number of gaming balls are transported not only in the gaming machine but also in the game arcade, since the player itself also generates static electricity, noise is easily generated constantly. At first glance, depending on the type of detection device described above, it seems that there is a risk that the detection sensitivity may become inappropriate due to the influence of such noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program causes the elapsed time for which the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a defined contact state described later. When the time is exceeded, the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is automatically reset partially without resetting the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means).

  Specifically, in the effect control program, a touch on the touch surface detected by the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) on a counter (contact duration time measurement unit) or an RTC control unit 4160 (contact duration time measurement unit) not shown. The elapsed time for which the state is a defined contact state (for example, “continuous contact state of 1 second or more” is listed) is measured. In the effect control program, whether or not the elapsed time measured to be in the continuous contact state has exceeded, for example, one second (prescribed elapsed time) (whether "automatic reset condition" is satisfied or not) ) (Automatic reset condition determination means). The automatic reset condition is not only that the contact state of the contact surface is in the contact state for a predetermined elapsed time as described above, but other events continue for a predetermined elapsed time. It may be done. Furthermore, the effect control program maintains the control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means) triggered by the establishment of the automatic reset condition, while the touch panel module 246a (contact type input as a touch panel controller) By resetting the control means), the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is reset (contact initialization means).

  In this case, since the touch panel 246 is restarted, the touch panel 246 (detection device) that has temporarily stopped operating with an appropriate detection sensitivity is automatically reactivated with an appropriate detection sensitivity. be able to.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect tables are provided, and the plurality of effect tables are first effect tables having a relatively high probability of executing the effect operation using the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246. And the second effect table having a relatively low probability of executing the effect operation using the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 246. The effect control program uses the upper dish liquid crystal display device 246 out of the plurality of effect tables over the special symbol for example 5 times (prescribed number of times of variable display) from the time of establishment of the manual reset condition in this way The probability of selecting the first effect table having a relatively high probability of executing the effect operation is set low. In this case, after the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 246 is reset, the rendering operation using the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 246 is less likely to be executed over the above-described number of fluctuation display times (five times). Since it is possible, it is difficult for the player to notice the behavior of the upper-dish liquid crystal display 246 immediately after the reset, and it becomes difficult for the player to lose interest even when reset.

[Calibration timing (power on / off)]
By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine in recent years, various detection devices such as sensors are mounted in order to exert game characteristics that the player's interest is difficult to complete (see the first reference above). As such a detection device, generally, adjustment of sensitivity is performed as an initial process at the time of power-on, and then there are many devices that operate with the sensitivity. However, in recent general pachinko gaming machines, even if the adjustment of sensitivity is carried out in this way in the initial process, it may be considered that the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate depending on the game environment after that, at first glance .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program controls the power on / off control unit 4140 c (power control unit) at a predetermined timing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a to temporarily stop or temporarily stop the supply of power. Immediately after that, by resuming the supply of power, the contact on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is performed at the predetermined timing by the above-described power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module The sensitivity is adjusted (adjustment timing control means).

  As a specific method of adjusting the touch sensitivity, the presentation control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to start supplying power by the power control unit under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as described above. The threshold for contact determination in the control register 481a in which the threshold for contact determination as capacitance is stored when the contact surface in the non-contact state is stored is forcibly set to an initial value Hereinafter, it is updated by "the threshold for initial contact determination".

  In this way, for example, even if a new function is not added in order to adjust the touch sensitivity on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 during game play, the touch sensitivity adjustment function incorporated at the touch panel module 246a in advance is diverted Then, adjustment of the touch sensitivity on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 can be performed at a desired timing. Therefore, even when a problem occurs in the touch sensitivity on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 during the game, it is possible to minimize the opportunity for the player to feel discomfort when operating the touch surface of the touch panel 246. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a to control the power on / off control unit 4140c (power supply control means) to stop the supply of power instantaneously or temporarily substantially from the specified period. Output of a rendering command (command) that causes the display area of the upper-dish liquid crystal display 246 (the second display means) to execute a display operation prompting contact with the operation surface of the contact type input means Are regulated (contact prompting regulation means).

  In this way, since the player can reduce the chance of touching the contact surface of the touch panel 246 over the prescribed period, the player feels a sense of operational discomfort while adjusting the touch sensitivity. It can be difficult.

[18. Game specification browsing function]
[18-1. Booklet information display]
By the way, in general, the player can read the gaming machine related information magazine in advance about the gaming machine which has been accustomed regularly, but when the player encounters a new gaming machine which is not familiar every day, the said gaming machine As a source of information for grasping the specifications of the machine, it is possible to refer to a booklet prepared in the game arcade after being provided by a game machine manufacturing company before the start of the game. In recent years, gaming machines have become characterized by their gaming characteristics (see the first reference described above), and by referring to such a booklet, the player can easily outline the gaming specifications of the model. (Hereafter, such a present condition is also called "predetermined background"). The related information magazine as described above can not be said to be a reliable source of information, as the player must go to the point of sale at each point of sale. On the other hand, since the number of copies provided by a gaming machine manufacturer is limited, the booklet can not necessarily be obtained by all desired players.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 66, in the configuration of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b (rendering control storing means) in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the model-specific rendering operation is Model information as a prescribed storage area fixedly secured in the space from the prescribed start address to the prescribed end address separately from rendering data area 4160 ba in which the rendering data used for control is stored in advance separately A data area 4160bb is formed.

  In the model information data area 4160bb, a plurality of page unit model information data for dividing and displaying model information of the model (hereinafter referred to as "booklet information") as a plurality of pages as an example of information related to game content is defined as above. Are stored in order from the prescribed start address in the storage area of. In the present embodiment, all the page unit type information data are collectively referred to as “type information data”. The blank area 4160 bc represents the remaining space of the storage area of the effect data area 4160 ba that was not filled with data when it was stored.

  In the present embodiment, as such model information data, for example, data for dividing and displaying booklet information including at least one commentary of a game method and game specification regarding a pachinko gaming machine of a specific model into a plurality of pages Can be mentioned. Here, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 including the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment as a model A is illustrated, and a pachinko gaming machine including another gaming board as a model B is illustrated. With any of these models, model information data unique to each model is stored in a space extending from the start address (corresponding to the above-mentioned “start address”) of the model information data area 4160 ba to the prescribed end address.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a, for example, in a state where the game is not continued, the effect control program is triggered by detection of a prescribed contact state on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact state detection means), liquid crystal and sound control unit The specified start address and the specified end address of the storage areas of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b are fixedly specified in the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of 4160, and data of the specified capacity is read uniformly from the model information data area 4160bb. (Model information data control means). The read data includes model information data as the above-described model information data. The reason why the data of the prescribed capacity is read out in this way is that it is possible to apply the method in the same way without modifying the program code, even for other models.

  The effect control program causes the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to generate specific page drawing data as drawing data corresponding to a specific page among a plurality of pages from the model information data read as described above, and is not shown. Store in frame buffer. When drawing data is stored in the frame buffer, the built-in sound source built-in VDP 4160a synchronizes the V-blank signal output to the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 to draw the specific page drawing data of the frame buffer on the upper-dish liquid crystal display. Output to the device 244.

  Then, the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244 performs drawing processing based on the input drawing data in synchronization with the V blank signal received from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a, and causes the corresponding frame to be displayed in the display area. In this way, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source first displays an introduction page representing a model theme "FIRE DYNAMITE KING" as a specific page among the booklet information as information related to the game content, as shown in FIG. 119, for example. (Specific page drawing control means).

  In this way, as a player, even if a booklet or the like on which the explanation of the gaming method or the gaming specification is posted is not installed at all, or a strange gaming machine is encountered in a gaming field where a considerable number of Since the page explaining the outline of the entire game flow can be browsed instead of referring to the booklet for the unknown game machine, it is sufficient to accurately grasp the game specification without losing the game method. You can enjoy the game.

  On the other hand, as a gaming machine development company, it becomes easy for the player to correctly understand the gaming method and the gaming specification intended by the gaming machine developer, so the gaming specification is somewhat complicated and the gaming method is rare. Also, the player can be made easy to enjoy the game according to the game specification according to the intended game method.

  Also, on the other hand, it is not necessary to newly prepare a corresponding booklet or the like for each type of gaming machine that has been replaced in the island facility where the frequency of replacing gaming machines tends to be high as the gaming arcade. Not only can maintenance work be reduced, but the reduced minutes the game arcade clerk can engage in other work.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the above-mentioned model information data is constituted by a set of page unit model information data 4610za to 4610zz respectively corresponding to a plurality of pages, and each page unit model information data For the pages 4610za to 4610zz, prescribed page separation information 4160z arranged from the prescribed start address for each page is provided at the head. As shown in FIG. 67B, the page break information 4160z includes, for example, effect type information 4160za, previous page start address 4160zb and next page start address 4160zc for each two bytes from the start address of each page. . The effect type information is information relating to the type of effect content described in each corresponding page, and represents, for example, information of “reach effect”. The previous page start address 4160zb, when there is a previous page of a page currently displayed among a plurality of pages, defines a position of a storage area in which page unit type information data used for displaying the previous page is stored. Represents the start address of the On the other hand, when there is a next page of the page currently displayed among the plurality of pages, the next page start address 4160zc indicates the position of the storage area in which the page unit type information data used for displaying the next page is stored. Represents a defined starting address.

  In such a configuration, the effect control program includes model information data corresponding to each model (and a plurality of page unit model information constituting the model) over the prescribed capacity from the prescribed start address to the prescribed end address described above. Read data). That is, the effect control program is configured to read out the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb uniformly starting from the prescribed start address even if the model is different. On the other hand, the effect control program reads out each page unit type information data of each page corresponding to each type over the prescribed capacity from the prescribed start address to the prescribed end address described above. That is, the effect control program is configured to read out the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb uniformly starting from the prescribed start address even if the model is different.

  As described above, in the state where the introduction page (hereinafter referred to as the current page) is displayed on the upper-tray-side liquid crystal display device 244, the effect control program is predetermined on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 as shown in FIG. When a contact state sliding from the lower left to the upper right is detected, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is turned on the page in the predetermined direction, for example, from the left to the right along the sliding contact. Based on the page delimitation information 4160 of the page, page unit model information data is read from the next page start address 4160zc included in the page over the space of a prescribed unit capacity, and page model information for one page to be displayed next Page drawing data (hereinafter referred to as “next page drawing data”) is generated from the data, and the next page is generated. Writes drawing data into the frame buffer described above, in synchronism with the V blanking signal is output to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Then, on the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244, a page explaining the outline of the entire game flow is displayed as the next page as shown in FIG. 121 among the booklet information based on the next page drawing data. Ru.

  On the other hand, in the state where the page (hereinafter referred to as "this page" at the present time) explaining the outline of the entire game flow is displayed on the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 in this manner, the effect control program displays the touch surface of the touch panel 246 The page separation information of this page in the case of turning over the predetermined direction along the sliding contact state to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a triggered by the detection of the contact state sliding from the right to the left, for example, in the Based on 4160z, page unit model information data is read from the previous page start address 4160zb contained in this to the space of a prescribed unit capacity, and page model information data for one page to be displayed retroactively to pages Drawing data (hereinafter referred to as “previous page drawing data”) is generated, and this previous Written in the frame buffer as described above the data, in synchronization with the V blanking signal is output to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Then, based on the previous page drawing data, the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 returns and displays the page representing the model theme as the previous page among the booklet information.

[18-2. Automatic Page Display]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, the player is forced to look at the page of the booklet with only the other hand because the player operates the firing handle with one hand to fire the game ball. In many cases, he / she proceeds to the next game before reaching a desired page where commentary corresponding to the progress of the game is described.

  In order to eliminate such a disadvantage, in the present embodiment, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program is performed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display area of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. As described above, booklet information including a plurality of pages is displayed, and then, a specific page corresponding to the progress of the game is automatically displayed from among the plurality of pages constituting the booklet information.

  In order to exhibit such a function, in the model information data prepared in advance in the model information data area 4160bb of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), page separation information 4160z for each page, Not only the next page start address and the previous page start address but also effect type information corresponding to the commentary content of the main page as described above is included. As this effect type information, for example, with respect to page unit type information data used for displaying a page including commentary content on reach effect, page reach information 4160z located at the start address is "reach effect". The information to show can be mentioned.

  Specifically, the effect control program is, for example, a reach condition for executing the above-described reach effect (specific effect operation) as an example of the effect condition or a specific reach condition (effect condition) among the reach conditions. Triggered by the fact that the above was established (effect lottery means), “reach effect” among the effect type information of the page break information 4160z of the plurality of page unit type information data constituting the type information data read uniformly as described above Search the page unit type information data corresponding to (model information data control means). That is, the effect control program finds out page unit type information data associated with the reached reach condition among a plurality of page unit type information in the model information data used for displaying a plurality of pages described above.

  Next, the effect control program generates drawing data from the page unit type model information data and outputs the drawing data to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means), and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 The comment page regarding reach production as shown, for example in FIG. 122 is automatically displayed as a specific page related to reach production as an example of specific production operation among them (page automatic display control means). In addition, as a specific page to be automatically displayed as described above, not only the above-described reach effect related to the effect, but also other effect operation or other information related.

  In the present embodiment, although it becomes easier for the player to focus on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that basically performs the change display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect as an example of the effect operation according to the progress of the game When is performed, the comment on the reach effect as the effect operation is displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 (second display means). Therefore, even if the player is playing a game with a pachinko game machine 1 who is not familiar with it, it is possible to ensure that the commentary corresponding to the progress of the unfamiliar game is performed at an appropriate timing without being impaired in the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Since reference can be made, it is possible to enjoy the game while accurately grasping the original gameplay. At the same time, the player can fully enjoy the game characteristics by accurately and precisely understanding the game specifications intended by the developer of the game machine along with the progress of the game.

[18-3. Waiting for a live performance on standby]
By the way, in general, a recent gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board characterized according to a theme set for each model, and when a game is started, the movable character provided on the gaming board is It is rarely activated suddenly to surprise the player so that the player's interest is not exhausted (see the first reference above). As described above, even in the gaming machine provided with the movable decorative body 3250 on the gaming board, for example, it is general that the movable combination is in a stored state during the demonstration effect. For this reason, it is difficult for a visitor who is searching for a desired pachinko gaming machine and traveling around the passage of the game hall to imagine the operation mode of the movable body, and at first glance, the pachinko gaming machine is not familiar It was often difficult for me to try to get started.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, the effect control program receives a command (command) output from the main control board 4100 (command receiving means), and the game ball is received from the main control board 4100 in the starting opening 2101 A state (hereinafter referred to as a non-play state) for which a command (in this case, a starting opening winning command (exemplified starting opening winning command)) representing an event has not been received continues for about 30 seconds (prescribed period) Then, this is detected (non-playing state detection means). Note that the effect control program may be based on whether or not another command is received to detect the non-playing state.

  Next, the presentation control program executes an origin return program for executing the above-described origin return process, triggered by the fact that such non-playing state continues over the prescribed period (hereinafter simply referred to as “origin “Perform a return process”), operate the movable decorative body 3250 (movable character) in a prescribed operation mode (performance control means).

  In this way, it is possible, for example, for the behavior of a movable character to characterize the game character for the visitor who is looking through the passage of the game arcade without adding new control by using the existing origin return processing. Before the game, to experience the mode of operation of the mobile character characterized in this way in order to be endowed with the opportunity to interact, the mode of operation of such mobile character is implemented in any situation in the actual game In order to be able to imagine various things whether it is done or not, it is easy to reach the psychology of trying to start the game.

  Further, the effect control program performs the above-mentioned power on upon receiving a start opening winning command (start start winning command) while operating the movable decorative body 3250 in a prescribed operation mode in the above-described home position return processing. After interrupting the time processing, execute processing (hereinafter also referred to as return-to-origin-return processing after demonstration interruption) to move the movable decorative body 3250 from the interrupted position to the specified storage position (control means after interruption to demonstration) ).

[18-4. Feature operation by booklet touch]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, the player can grasp the outline of the game specification superficially by referring to the booklet, but, for example, regarding the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250. It was difficult to grasp the game without actually starting the game, and it was difficult to convey the game using the movable decorative body 3250.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal and the sound are triggered when the contact state (hereinafter referred to as the “first prescribed contact state”) on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) of the touch unit 220B is detected. Based on the model information data read out uniformly from the model information data storage area 4160bb (prescribed storage area) of the ROM 4160b (effect control storage means), the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 (second display means) of the touch unit 220B After the information on the game to be viewed by the player is displayed instead of the booklet, the specific content on the movable decorative body 3250 is displayed as a part of the information on the game in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 Contact on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact input means) corresponding to the position being It triggered (the "contact state of the second specified") that has been detected, actuating the movable decorative body 3250 (the movable won game) in behavior corresponding to a specific content being the display.

  Specifically, as described above, the effect control program reads out model information data from the model information data area 4160bb (model information data control means), and a plurality of page unit model information data included in the read model information data. From the specific page unit type model information data, the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data and outputs it to the upper plate liquid crystal display 244, and the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 specifies the plurality of pages described above. A page related to the notice effect as shown in FIG. 121 (hereinafter referred to as “the notice effect page”) is displayed as the page (specific page display control means).

  On this notice presentation page, for the notice presentation using the character named "Might you", for example, it is shown that the expectation to the jackpot changes depending on the color, and the behavior of the character is flat Is represented. It is suggested that, if this character is red, any one of four types of behavior of “normal”, “rolling”, “rocket” and “monster” is selected and displayed on this notice effect page. ing. The four types of icons indicating these behavior modes include an icon 246Z representing the above-mentioned "rolling" behavior.

  The visitor of the game arcade in contact with the notice effect page displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B in this way is, for example, interested in the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250 and controls the effect control program. In the notice effect page (specific page) displayed in the display area of the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means), the operator touches the operation surface of the touch panel 246 and touches an icon 246Z that can be visually recognized.

  Then, in the effect control program, an icon 246 Z representing a specific behavior is displayed as a specific content on the movable decorative body 3250 (movable role) as a part of the information on the game content among such preview effect pages. Although the home position return process may be performed as described above in response to detection of a prescribed contact state on a portion of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the position, Instead, for example, as a specific behavior intended by the displayed icon 246Z, a drive signal for rotating the movable decorative body 3250 in one direction is given to a motor (not shown) or the movable decorative body 3250 is It is repeated to give the motor (not shown) a drive signal to rotate in the direction, and as a specified operation mode, the rollin of the movable decorative body 3250 It is an aspect to repeat (hereinafter referred to as "rolling mode") (simulation operation control means).

  As a specific method for realizing such an aspect of repeating rolling of the movable decorative body 3250, the following method is employed in the present embodiment. First, in the peripheral control ROM 4150b storing various schedule data described above, specific schedule data corresponding to the effect pattern to be operated in a manner to repeat rolling of the movable decorative body 3250 is stored.

  The effect control program is an effect pattern to be operated in a mode (hereinafter referred to as "rolling mode") of repeating rolling of the movable decorative body 3250 among a plurality of schedule data corresponding respectively to a plurality of effect patterns from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Select and read out the specific schedule data corresponding to. The effect control program causes the movable decoration to be performed according to the selected specific schedule data triggered by the detection of the defined contact state on the contact surface covering the icon 246Z corresponding to the movable decoration 3250 as described above. Although the effect control is performed by driving a motor (not shown) for driving the body 3250, at this time, another effect for driving a rendering device (such as a speaker) other than the movable decorative body 3250 among the specific schedule data The other schedule data to be used for control is masked (schedule mask means), and the special part performance presentation schedule data used for the remaining effect control is extracted.

  The effect control program outputs a drive signal to the motor via a drive mechanism (not shown) according to the specific combination product demonstration schedule data used for the remaining effect control. Then, the movable decorative body 3250 is operated in a manner to repeat rolling horizontally in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 125 by the action of the drive mechanism (not shown).

  In this way, when the above mentioned booklet can not be obtained, or a booklet can be obtained and the outline of the game specification can be grasped, for example, the operation mode of the movable decorative body 3250 is actually what Even if it is difficult to know whether the game is actually started or not, it is possible to start the game after the visitors of the game arcade have experienced the operation mode of the movable decorative body 3250.

[18-5. Background introduction]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, the player can grasp the outline of the game specification to a certain extent by referring to the above-mentioned booklet, but especially when the character does not know the character characterizing the game machine, the game specification especially If it is related to the character, the game specification can not be grasped in detail, and there is a possibility that the game characteristic can not be sufficiently enjoyed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special control program is variably displayed, for example, the effect control program controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the display area of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Among the information on the game, a specific character (specific display area) is displayed on the part of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 corresponding to the position where a specific contact state is detected as a trigger. The information related to the specific character (specific display part) is provided based on the model information data.

  In this way, even if the player is not familiar with the character that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 (corresponding to the above-mentioned "Mit-kun"), it corresponds to the position of the character displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display 244. If a part of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 is touched with a finger, information pertaining to this character is, for example, a subject that appears in the work with the character in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display 244. As an introduction of the background, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the family structure of the character in the original work is introduced, or at least one of the stories of the original work with the character as a theme By introducing a part, it becomes possible to gain some knowledge about the character. Here, pachinko machines having a theme of a specific character generally have a game specification associated with the specific character in many cases. Therefore, when there is an opportunity to contact the background introduction as described above, the player grasps in more detail the game specification relating to this character even if he / she is not familiar with the character characterizing the pachinko gaming machine 1 This facilitates the gameplay of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the effect control program is a part of the information regarding the game in the specific page displayed (by the specific page display control means) as described above in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) The specific page unit model is triggered by detection of a prescribed touch state on a portion of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the position where the character (specific display part) is displayed as Based on background information data for performing background introduction regarding a specific character (specific display part) which is data associated with information data, the background introduction regarding the specific character is visually displayed on the specific page (Specific information display control means).

  In addition, as information related to such a character, for example, a word describing a story related to the character in the jackpot gaming state is displayed, or a manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is its own brand or It can be mentioned that the wording which appeals the model of the company is displayed.

  On the other hand, background introduction regarding such characters may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 instead of or in combination with the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 as described above. In this way, it is easy for the player to grasp the game specifications related to the character characterizing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in detail while concentrating on the game without overlooking the variation display mode of the decorative symbol.

  On the other hand, the effect control program, instead of or at the same time visually displaying the background introduction regarding the character on the upper liquid crystal display 244 or the like as described above, the bass speaker of the speaker unit 920, the top for high sound not shown From the speaker, the left speaker of the left speaker unit 430, and the right speaker of the right speaker unit 246, or a combination of any of these, the same applies to the player or the visitor of the game arcade by hearing equivalent to the background introduction regarding the character described above. You may make it aurally recognize the content of. That is, as described above, the effect control program causes liquid crystal and sound control under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a triggered by the background introduction regarding the specific character being displayed on the specific page (by the specific information display control means) The section 4160 is made to aurally output a background introduction regarding a specific character based on the background information data (specific information sound output control means).

  At this time, the effect control program further outputs the same content as described above by using one of these speakers having directivity, so that the content similar to the above can be provided only to a limited person such as a player, for example. You may tell it.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, although the said embodiment mainly shows the case where it applies to a ball-and-ball type game machine (pachinko game machine), it is not limited to this, It is not limited to this. Can also be applied. Alternatively, the present embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko gaming machine and a pachislot gaming machine. In any of these cases, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the effects described above.

  As a basic configuration of such a revolving type game machine or a game machine formed by combining the above, for example, a rotary display (rotation display means) comprising a plurality of reels (rotary bodies) with a plurality of kinds of symbols attached thereto; A plurality of casings provided with the rotary display, a plurality of operation levers (first manipulation means) provided outside the casing, and a plurality of casings provided outside the casing corresponding to the plurality of reels. And the plurality of reels are respectively rotated in response to the operation of the operation lever (corresponding to the establishment of the start condition), and the plurality of stops are stopped. According to the operation order of the button, the internal lottery which determines whether or not the predetermined winning condition is satisfied triggered by the operation of the start lever and the rotating body control means for stopping the rotation of each corresponding reel Execute Game control means (main control board described above) having lottery means and game state control means for shifting from the normal game state to the special game state advantageous to the player after the predetermined winning condition is established And 4100 functions), and effect control means (substantially equivalent to the function of the peripheral control board 4140 described above) for controlling the rendering operation according to the establishment status of the predetermined winning condition by the control of the game control means , Display means (substantially corresponding to the function of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above) which performs display operation as part of the effect operation by the effect control means, and the plurality of reels are attached by control of the game control means A payout device (payout player) executing a payout operation of gaming media according to a combination mode of a plurality of symbols stopped in the symbol display area where the variation patterns of the plurality of selected symbols are visible ) And it includes a.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... pachinko game machine (game machine), 2 ... outer frame, 3 ... door frame, 4 ... main body frame, 5 ... game board, 4110 ... payout control board (payout control means), 4100 ... main control board (game control means 4140 ... peripheral control board (effect control means).

Claims (1)

Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Video rendering means for displaying a video;
An effect control means for executing an effect associated with the game using the image based on image effect control information serving as a trigger to start drawing for displaying the image on the image effect means from the game control means;
Equipped with
The effect control means is
Constant storage means in which material image data constituting the display surface of the video is stored in advance;
Video presentation control data generation means for generating video presentation control data for display control of the video;
Temporary storage means for temporarily storing material image data for a predetermined display surface of the material image data set according to the video presentation control data in the display surface unit order based on the video presentation control data; ,
Arrangement means for reading the material image data from the constant storage means and arranging the material image data on the temporary storage means in a predetermined arrangement manner;
Display surface image storage means for reading material image data for one display surface in the order of display surface units stored previously from the temporary storage means, and storing the arranged material image data as image data to be displayed on the video effect means When,
Display surface image output means for outputting the image data stored in the display surface image storage means to the video rendering means;
Equipped with
It is possible to variably set a period from the start timing of drawing by the video presentation control information from the game control means to the storage of the image data corresponding to the video presentation control information in the display surface image storage means A game machine characterized by